(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Italian grammar"

lbeatb'6 nDo&ern Xanguage Sevt(?e 



> • ■» 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



BY 

C. H. GRANDGENT 

Professor op Romance Languages in Harvard University 



REVISED BY THE AUTHOR AND PROVIDED WITH 
NEW EXERCISES AND VOCABULARIES 



E. H. WILKINS 

Professor of Rom/ nce Languages in 
THE University of Chicago 



D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 
BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO 



[r 




Copyright, 1887 and 1904 
By C. H. GRANDGENT 



Copyright, 1915 
By D. C. heath & CO. 



2 A 4 



Printed in U. S. A. 



PREFACE 






This volume is the result of an attempt to put into con- 
venient form and the smallest possible compass all the gram- 
mar needed by ordinary students of Italian. Short as the 
book is, it contains some paragraphs which beginners will 
probably skip: the longer lists of words and endings and a 
great part of the chapters on suffixes and_iiTegula^^ 
will be useful mainly for reference. While endeavoring to 
make my work represent primarily the language as it is 
spoken and written at the present day, I have tried to give 
als o as many obso lete forms as readers of the poets will 
require. 

It has been my aim throughout to make the rules clear 
for all classes of pupils, even for those ignorant of other 
foreign languages, provided they understand the technical 
words commonly used in grammars. With this object in 
view, I have ascribed to the Italian vowels the pronuncia- 
tion of the English ones that are nearest to them; an accurate 
description of the Italian sounds would, I fear, prove con- 
fusing to beginners who have had no training in phonetics. 
It will be easy for the instructor to explain not only the 
vowels, but some of the consonants, and the division of 
words into syllables, much better than can be done in a 
book like this. 

The authorities I have consulted most are the dictionaries 

of Fanfani, Rigutini and Fanfani, Fornari {Nuovo Bazzarini), 

) and Tommaseo and Bellini. I have made but little use of 

other grammars; I am, however, indebted to Toscani for 

some ideas and a few of my examples. The chapters on 

iii 

57427G 



IV PREFACE 

syntax, and the treatment of irregular verbs, pronouns, suf- 
fixes, and the plural of words in -co and -go are almost 
entirely the result of original work. 

In conclusion, I wish to express my gratitude to Professor 
Nash, of Harvard, to my friend and teacher, Cav. Filippo 
Orlando, of Florence, and to the gentlemen who assisted 
me in correcting the proof-sheets; and I wish above all to 
thank Professor Sheldon, of Harvard, and Professor Bende- 
lari, of Yale, without whose aid and encouragement I should 
scarcely have ventured to offer this book to the public. 

, Cambridge, September, 1887. 

NOTE TO THE REVISED EDITION 

So thoroughly has the old Grammar been overhauled by 
Professor Wilkins and me that it now presents itself almost 
as a new book. The original Italian texts and bits of Eng- 
lish prose for translation have disappeared; and in place of 
the set of Lessons and Exercises added to the book in 1904, 
Professor Wilkins has furnished a fresh series, better and 
more abundant than the matter it supplants. A careful 
revision of the rules and examples has resulted in some im- 
provement of the former and many additions to the latter. 
Use has been made of the system of grammatical nomen- 
clature recently recommended by the American commit- 
tee entrusted with the study of that subject. Not least 
among the advantages of this edition is the marked gain in 
typographical clearness. 

Cambridge, March, 1915. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 

• • PAGB 

Pronunciation 1 

Sounds, Spelling, Accent, Syllabication, 1. — Additional 
Notes, 6. — Inflections of the Voice, 9. 

Articles 11 

The Definite Article, 11. — The Indefinite Article, 14. 

Nouns 15 

Gender, 15. — Number, 17. 

Adjectives 20 

Gender and Number, 20. — Comparison, 22. 

AUGMENTATIVES; DIMINUTIVES ; NUMERALS 24 

Augmentatives and Diminutives, 24. — Numerals, 26. 

Demonstrative, Interrogative, Relative, Possessive Pro- 
nouns 29 

Personal Pronouns 35 

Conjunctive Forms, 35. — Disjunctive Forms, 40. — Forms 
of Address, 43. 

Auxiliary Verbs 45 

Auxiliaries of Voice and Tense (essere, avere), 45. — Modal 
Auxiliaries, 51. 

Regular and Irregular Verbs 52 

The Regular Verb, 53. — The Irregular Verb, 57. 

Moods and Tenses 61 

Infinitive and Participle, 61. — Past, Present, and Future, 
63. — Past Future or Conditional, 65. — Subjunctive, 65. 

Conjunctions; Prepositions; Adverbs 68 

Conjunctions, 68. — Prepositions, 70. — Adverbs, 73. 

Indefinite Pronouns 76 

List of Irregular Verbs 80 

First Conjugation, 81. — Second Conjugation, 82. — Thu-d 
Conjugation, 85. — Fourth Conjugation, 90. 

V 



VI TABLE OF CONTENTS 

PAOB 

Alphabetical List of Irregular and Defective Verbs . . 92 

Lessons and Exercises 97 

Italian-English Vocabulary 155 

English-Italian Vocabulary 171 

Index .^ • • • • 181 



ITALIAN GEAMMAR 



PRONUNCIATION 

1, The Italian alphabet has the same letters as the Eng- 1 
lish, except that k, w, x, and y do not occur in native words 
in modern Italian. 

2. The Italians distinguish seven vowels: a, close e, open 
e, i, close o, open o, u; to these may be added an interme- 
diate e and o, used in unaccented syllables. Every vowel 
has a clear sound, no matter what may be its position in the 
word. It is never obscured; and it never tends, as do the 
English long vowels, to become a diphthong. 

Italian vowels are all pronounced rather quickly; hence 
there is but Httle difference in quantity between accented 
and unaccented sounds. English-speaking students must 
carefully avoid drawling the accented and slighting the un- 
accented syllables; they should try to give to every Italian 
vowel about the length of i in 'bitter.' 

a is nearly like a in 'father': as fava, canna, cassa, palla. 
e close is nearly like a in 'fate': as beve, vera, stelle, messe. 
e open may be formed by trying to pronounce e in 'bell' with 

the mouth very wide open: as bella, amena, fera, pensa. 
i is nearly like ee in 'feet': as miri, vini, fissi, spilli. 
O close is nearly like o in 'mope': as dope, dove, boUo, sotto. 
O open is nearly like aw in 'saw' pronounced with the mouth 

wide open: as no, odi, poi, donna. 
u is nearly like oo in 'boot': as una, cura, nulla, ruppi. 

(a) The letters i and u are sometimes used to represent conso- 
nant sounds (see 4); but in formulating rules they are always 
counted as vowels. 

1 



2 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

S. As Close i^.nd open vowels are not distinguished in 
spelling, some rules are necessary: 

1. Unaccented e and o are intermediate between close and open: 
as mare, sea; amo, / love. 

2. e and o are close in all monosyllables^ ending in a consonant: 
as con, with; non, not; per, for. 

3. In monosyllables^ and oxytones^ ending in a vowel, final e is 
close, final o is open: as che, what; me, me; re, king; crede, he be- 
lieved; perche, why; do, / give; Po, Po; saro, / shall he; and6, he 
went. 

Exceptions: (a) Final e is open in e = is, re=re, interjections (as 
aime, alas; che, nonsense)^ proper names (as Noe, Noah), and foreign 
words (as caffe, coffee), (b) Final o is close in lo and o. 

4. Accented e and o are always open in the groups ie and uo : as 
piede, foot; fuoco, fire, e and o standing for ie and uo are open: 
as ven=\dene, he comes; cor=cuore, heart. 

5. In words that have always formed a part of the spoken lan- 
guage, accented e is nearly always close when it represents Latin e 
or I, open when it represents Latin e or ae; accented o is nearly 
always close when it represents Latin o or u, open when it repre- 
sents Latin 6 or au. In book words accented e and o are usually 
open. 

In all cases not covered by the first three rules, the quality 
of e and o will be marked in this book, an acute accent (') 
denoting the close, a circumflex C) the open sound : as avere, 
to have; meno, less; tiene, he holds; lieto, happy; poet a, poet; 
ora, hour; molto, much; buono, good; poco, little; moto, 
motion. 

4. B, f, m, p, q, v are pronounced as in English. 

C, before e or i, sounds like ch in 'chin'; elsewhere it is always 
like English k: as cima, top; come, how; dolce, sweet. 

1 Not including shortened forms of words that regularly have more than one 
syllable. » Words accented on the last syllable. 



PRONUNCIATION 3 

g, before e or i, sounds like g in 'gem'; elsewhere it is always 

like ^ in 'go': as gatto, cat; gente, people; spingi, push. ' 
(a) A cc or a gg before e or i has merely the sound of ch in 
'chin' or g in 'gem' prolonged: as facce, faces; legge, law. 

d, 1, n, t are pronounced further forward in the mouth than in 
English; the tip of the tongue should touch the back of the 
upper front teeth: as alto, high; dato, given; luna, moon; 
nudo, naked; tuono, thunder. 

h is always silent: as ahi, oh! ha, he has. 

i, unaccented, before a vowel, sounds like English y: as ieri, yes- 
terday; paio, pair; piu, more. In the groups cia, cio, ciu, 
gia, gio, giu, an unaccented i serves only to show that the 
c or g is soft : as faccia, face; guancia, cheek; cio, that; giu, 
down; mangia, eat; raggio, ray. 

j is merely another way of writing i. 

n before a q or a hard c or g has the sound of Enghsh ng: as 
banca (bang-ka), hank; dunque (dung-kwe), therefore; 
lungo (lung-go), long. 

r is always rolled, the point of the tongue vibrating against the 
teeth: as caro, dear; rosso, red; per, for. When r is double 
or followed by a consonant, the trill is prolonged: as carro, 
cart; burro, butter; marrone, chestnut; carne, meat; porta, 
door. 

S is generally pronounced nearly like English s in 'see,' but with 
a somewhat sharper sound: as so, I know; spillo, pin. 

Initial s before a sonant (b, d, g, 1, m, n, r, v) has a 
sound intermediate between s and English z: as sdruccio- 
lare, to slip; slitta, sleigh. 

A single s between vowels has, in most words, the sound 
of Enghsh z: as caso, case; c^usa, cause; viso, face. But 
in the following cases it is pronounced Hke s in 'see,' 
'mason': 

(a) In annusare, dsino, casa, Chiusi, cosa, cosi, desiderio, naso, 
parasite, p^so, Pisa, pisello, posa, riposo, riso, susina, and their 
derivatives, and in some uncommon words. 



4 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

(6) After the prefixes de-, di-,^ pre-, pro-, re-, ri-, tra-*: as 
desistere, dis^gno, presiimere, proseguire, reservare, risolvere, tra- 
sudare. 

(c) In the adjective ending -oso and the adjective and substan- 
tive ending -ese: as noioso, troublesome; inglese, English; mese, 
month. But in cortese, francese, lucchese, marchese, paese, 
paiese, the s is like EngUsh z. 

(d) In the past absolute and past participle of chiedere, chiu* 
dere, nasc6ndere, porre, radere, ridere, rimanere, rispondere, 
r6dere, and all verbs in -endere ; and in their compounds and de- 
rivatives: as chiesi, socchiuso, nascose, risposero, rasoio, rimase, 
corrisposi, r6sero, accesi, reso, scesa. 

Exceptions to this rule are deridere, verbs in -cludere, and deriva- 
tives of rodere. 

U, unaccented, before a vowel, sounds like English w: as buono, 
good; guardare, to look; puo, he can. 

Z and zz are generally pronounced like a long and vigorous ts: 
as alzare, to lift; azione, action; prezzo, price; zio, uncle. 

In the following cases, however, z and zz sound like a 
prolonged dz: 

(a) In azzurro, dozzina, mezzo, pranzo, ribrezzo, romanzo, zelo, 
and many less common words. 

(b) In verbs in -izzare (as utilizzare, to utilize) ; except attizzare, 
dirizzare, guizzare, rizzare, stizzare, and their compounds, and a 
few uncommon words. 

6. The following combinations are to be noted: 

ch (used only before e and i) is always like English k: as fichi 
(plural of fico, jig), sch is hke sk: as scherzo, sport. 

gh (used only before e and i) is always like English g in 'go': 
as aghi (plural cf ago, needle), 

* Not to be confounded with dis-, tras-: disonore, trasandare. 



PRONUNCIATION 5 

gli (written gl if the following vowel be i) is nearly like English 

Hi in 'million': as figlio, son; figli, sons. 
But in Anglia, geroglifico, glicerina, negligerG and its derivatives, 
and a few uncommon words borrowed from the Greek or Latin, gl is 
like English gL 

gn is nearly like ni in 'onion': as ogni, every. 

qu is always like kw: as qu^sto, this. 

SC before e and i is nearly like sh in 'ship': as uscire, to go out. 

Before all other letters it is pronounced sk : as scuola, school; 

sch^rno, contempt. 

6. Every letter in Italian is distinctly and separately 

sounded; the only exceptions are h, silent i (see 4), and the 

combinations mentioned in 5. 

arte, art. andai, / went. patira, fear. 

firma, signature. aura, breeze. sentii, I felt. 

• furto, theft. bugie, lies. noi, we. 

giorno, day. Europa, Europe. p6i, then. 

verso, toward. miei, mij. su6i, his. 

Where a double consonant is written, both letters must 
be sounded, the first at the end of the preceding, the second 
at the beginnuig of the foUowmg syllable: 

anno, year. babbo, father. fatto, done. 

m6sso, put. quello, that. b6cca, mouth. 

For rr, zz, and soft cc and gg, see 4. 

1, m, n, and r, when preceded by an accented vowel and 
followed by another consonant, are prolonged: 

alto (all-to), high. tanto (tann-to), so much. 

sempre (senun-pre), always. parte (parr-te), part. 

7. The accent is nearly always the same as in Latin. In 
this book it will always be noted. Of the signs written 
here, students need use only the grave C), which is placed 
^n the last syllable of oxy tones and on some monosyllables: 
Italian writers do not agree as to the use of the other marks; 
many now use the acute, and not the grave, on final e. 



6 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

8. Italian words are divided in such a way that, if pos- 
sible, every syllable shall begin with a consonant : 

ta-vo-li-no, table. mez-zo, half. 

frat-tan-to, meanwhile. cdc-cia, hunt. 

al-1' u6-mo, to the man. og-gi, to-day. 

nar-ra-re, to relate. po-e-ta, poet. 

In the groups s+ consonant, consonant +r, those men- 
tioned in 5, and cl, fl, gl, pi, both consonants belong to the 
following syllable. i = y and u = w go with the following 
vowel; ai, au, ei, eu, oi are not separated. 



fe-sta 


ca-sti-ghi 


ri-flet-te-r 


te-d-tro 


del-P ac-qua 


miei 


a-vro 


in-chio-stro 


al-1' au-ra 


bi-s6-gno 


mi-glio-re 


tuoi 



ADDITIONAL NOTES ON PRONUNCIATION 

[The numbers prefixed to the following notes refer to the paragraphs of the fore- 
going chapter.] 

1. The Tuscan names of the letters are: 



a 


e 


1 


enne 


erre 


vu or VI 


bi 


effe 


je or i lungo 


6 


esse 


zeta (with z pro- 


ci 


gi 


eUe 


pi 


ti 


nounced dz) 


di 


acca 


emme 


cu 


u 





They do not change in the plural. Their gender is not fixed; in 
general those ending in -a or -e are considered as feminine, the 
others as mascuUne. K, x, y are cdppa, iccase, ipsilon, all masculine. 

2. (a) The sounds a, e, 6, followed by a single consonant, are 
somewhat longer than the other vowels: for instance, in dato, fero, 
ovo the accented a, e, o are longer than in dattero, vero, ove. 
Final accented vowels sound particularly short: as in amo, beM, 
caffe. 

(6) In forming i the mouth should be made as broad as possible 
from side to side. For u and 6 the hps should be puckered. For 
a and e the mouth should be opened very wide. 



PRONUNCIATION 7 

3. (a) If an adverb in -mente is formed from an adjective con- 
taining e or 6, this vowel has, in the adverb, a secondary accent, 
and retains its open sound: as (breve) brevemente, briefly; (nobile) 
ndbihnente, nobly. Furthermore, e and 6 retain their quahty in 
seeming compounds that consist, in reality, of two or more sepa- 
rate words: as tostoche =t6stoch6 =t6sto che, as soon as. 

(6) Past absolute forms and past participles in -esi, -eso, -osi, 
-CSC have a close e or o; except chiesi (also chiesi), esplosi, es- 
ploso, leso. 

(c) In the suffixes -eccio (-a), -esco (-a), -ese, -essa, -etto 
(-a), -ezzo (-a), -mente, and -mento the e is always close; while 
in the diminutive suffix -ello (-a), and in the endings -ente, -enza, 
-erio (or -ero), and -esimo (-a) it is open: as inglese, English; 
probabilmente, probably; prudente, prudent; ventesimo, twentieth. 

(d) In the endings -oio, -one, -ore, and in the suffix -oso (-a) 
the o is close; while in the ending -orio, and in -occio (-a), -otto 
(-a), and -ozzo (-a), used as suffixes to nouns or adjectives, it is 
open: as vassoio, tray; amore, love; romitorio, hermitage; casotta, 
good-sized house. 

(e) In the following cases accented e or o may have either the 
close or the open sound: in Giorgio, maestra, maestro, nego (from 
negare), neve, organo, scendere, senza, siete and sono (from es- 
sere), spegnere, Stefano, vendere; and in the past future endings 
-esti, -emmo, -este. The present subjunctive forms dieno, sieno, 
stieno are pronounced also dieno, sieno, stieno. 

( /) In poetry we often find e for ie, 6 for u6 : as ven=viene, he 
comes; cor = cuore, heart. Simple 6 for u6 is very common in mod- 
ern spoken Tuscan: as b6no = bu6no, good; n6vo = nu6vo, new. 

4. c, (a) Between two vowels, of which the second is e or i, 
single c and single g are, in ordinary Tuscan speech, pronounced 
respectively like sh in 'ship' and si in 'vision': as pdce, peace; 
stagione, season. 

(b) Between two vowels, of which the second is a, o, or u, a 
single c or a q is, in popular Tuscan speech, sounded nearly like 
English h: as poco (poho), little; di questa cosa (di hwesta hosa), 
of this thing. This pronunciation is regarded as inelegant. 



8 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



j. Some writers use j, except after a consonant, for the i that is 
pronounced y: as jeri for ieri, yesterday; pajo for pdio, pair. It is 
sometimes used also for final i in the plural of words in unaccented 
-io: as specchj (also specchi and occasionally specchii) for specchi, 
mirrors, plural of specchio. 

z. Aside from verbs in -izzdre, z and zz have the value dz in 
the following words and their derivatives : 



arzfllo 


frizzo 


magazzino 


romanzo 


zelo 


azzurro 


garzone 


manzo 


ronzio 


zenit 


barzeUetta 


gazzella 


mezzo 


rozzo 


zero 


bizza 


gazzetta 


orizzonte 


zaffiro 


zeta 


brezza 


gonzo 


orzo 


zaffrone 


zinco 


bronzo 


Lazzaro 


penzolo 


zanzara 


zodiaco 


donzella 


lazzeretto 


pranzo 


zebra 


zolla 


dozzina 


lazzo 


ribrezzo 


zeffiro 


zona 



also in all derivatives of the Greek zoos, and in many uncommon 
words. 

5. In pronouncing gli and gn the point of the tongue should 
remain behind the lower teeth: as figlio, son; ogni, every. 

6. If one of the words mentioned below, or any oxytone ending 
in a vowel, is closely followed by a word beginning with a conso- 
nant, this consonant is, in Tuscany, generally pronounced double. 
The words are : ^ 



a 


di, day 


giu 


Che 


di', say 


ha 


Chi 


6 


ho 


cio 


e 


infra 


come 


fa 2 


intra 


contra 


fe, faith 


la 


da 


fe'=fece 


li 


da, gives 


fo 


ma 


da', give 


fra 


me" 


do 


fu 


mo'= 


dove 


gia 


ne 



0* 


s5pra 


pifi 


sta2 


qua v 


sto 


qualche 


su 


qui 


te^ 


re 


tra 


sa 


tre 


se, if 


tu 


se 


va2 


SI 


vo=vado 


so 


vo'=v6glio 



modo 



1 The materials for this list were taken from D'Ovidio's article in Grober's Grund' 
riB der romanischen Philologie, I, p. 496 (2d ed., p. 644). 

2 Both the imperative sing, and the pres. ind. third sing. 

3 The disjunctive form. 

4 Both the conjunction or and the interrogative particle. 



^ PRONUNCIATION 9 

verra da me domani (verrdddammeddomdni), he will come to 
my house to-morrow. In such cases c is, of course, never pro- 
nounced like h (see 4, c, (6). 



INFLECTIONS OF THE VOICE 

1. Italian speech is at once smoother and less monotonous than 
American: it is less interrupted by breathings, and it has far 
greater variations of pitch. In order to speak or read Italian well, 
an American must learn to breathe in speaking as he does in sing- 
ing; he must inhale deeply at the beginning of the clause, and not 
stop again until he reaches the end of it. The following directions 
may be of use; they are based on the Tuscan pronunciation, and 
particularly on that of Siena. 

2. (a) The simplest inflection in a declarative sentence is as fol- 
lows: at the beginning the voice is pitched low; it rises in the 
middle (in earnest conversation often to a falsetto), and falls again 
at the end. The most emphatic v/ord generally receives the high- 
est tone; if there are no words after it to complete the cadence, the 
first words of the phrase are often repeated at the end: as me lo 
dicono tutti me lo dicono, they all tell me so, where the u of tutti is 
an octave higher than the beginning and the close of the sentence. 

(6) When there is a pause on some not particularly emphatic 
word before the main verb, that word has a shght circumflex ac- 
cent, the voice rising about one semitone and falling about three: 
as fu6ri di citta A c* e una belllssima villa \, outside the city there's a 
beautiful villa, where belllssima has the high pitch, and the a of 
citt^ has the circumflex. Tliis accent is generally heard whenever 
modifying clauses or phrases precede the main clause. 

(c) Almost all declarative sentences are made up chiefly of these 
two inflections, the long rise and fall and the short circumflex. 
Americans must avoid breaking up their sentences by meaningless 
falling tones. The fall occurs in Italian, as in English, on a very 
emphatic word, and at the end of a sentence. It is used, also, 
with a verb of saying or tliinldng, followed by a direct quotation; 



10 ITALIAN GRAJVIMAR 

and Tvdth any word or phrase used as a vocative, except in loud 
calling (see 4, 6): as allora chiama Alfredo e gli dice\: Bambino \, 
dimmi la verita\, where the syllables fre, bam, and dim have the 
highest pitch. 

3. (a) Questions to which the answer may be 'yes' or 'no' 
have either one of two circumflex accents: in the first the voice 
^rises about five semitones and falls one; in the second, which is 

sometimes used in reading and in pohte phrases, the voice rises 
and falls about an octave. Ex.: I'hai visto? have you seen himf 
where the pitches of V hdi, vi, and sto may be represented by the 
notes do, Ja, mi; ha ben dormito? did you sleep well ? where mi is 
an octave higher than dor and to. The former accent may be 
heard in the Irish pronunciation of Enghsh. 

{h) These inflections are nearly always confined to the last few 
syllables of the sentence. In some questions, however, they ap- 
pear twice, generally occurring first on the verb; and occasionally 
the circumflex on the verb is the only one. 

(c) Questions that cannot be answered by 'yes' or 'no' usually 
begin high, the pitch depending on the emphasis. The voice then 
falls, but generally rises again at the last syllable, going up about 
three semitones: as o c6me\ hai fatto/? how did you do it? Tliis 
accent is common among the Irish, and may be heard in England. 
The final rise is, however, often omitted, especially in very short 
sentences and in poHte phrases: as come sta\? how do you dof 

4. (a) Exclamations of surprise begin very high, and sink rap- 
idly: as senti\! 7io! im afifar di niente\! you don't say so!^ where un 
has the main stress; per mio bacco! / want to know!^ with the ac- 
cent on per. 

(6) In calling to persons at a distance, the Tuscans sing rather 
than speak; the usual tune is do, la, sol, the accented syllable being 
highest: as Agostina! Augustine! partenza! all aboard! 

1 Popular New England equivalents. 



ARTICLES H 



ARTICLES 

9. The article is not declined, but it agrees with its no\in 
in gender and number. 



THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 
10. Masculine : 

(a) Sing. 11, pi. i, before a word beginning with any consonant 
except s impure^ and z. 

(6) Sing, lo, pi. gli, before a vowel or s impure or z? 

Before a vowel lo becomes P; gli becomes gP before i. 

il pddre, the father. i pddri, the fathers. 

lo stesso pd.dre, the same father, gli stessi pddri, the same fathers. 

lo sci^me, the swarm. gli scidmi, the swarms. 

lo zio, the uncle. gli zli, the uncles. 

V uomo, the man. gli uomini, the men. 

V insetto, the insect. gV insetti, the insects. 



11. Feminine : 
Sing, la, pi. le. 

Before a vowel la becomes P; le becomes P before e. " 

la md,dre, the mother. le mddri, the mothers. 

V 6ra, the hour. le 6re, the hours. 

V erba, the herb. V erbe, the herbs. 

12. When the definite article is preceded by one of the 
prepositions di, da, a, in, con, su, per, the article and prepo- 

1 That is, s followed by another consonant. 

2 Li is sometimes used for gli. Some writers use il, i boforo z and before sec- or 
sci-. In poetry lo is often used for il. 



12 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



sition are generally contracted into one word, as shown in 
the following table (con, per are often uncontracted^) : 





^ 


i 


lo 


gH 


la 


le 


V 


di, 0/ 


del 


dei or de' 


dfllo 


degU 


dplla 


delle 


dell' 


da, hy 


dal 


dai or da' 


dallo 


dagU 


daila 


dalle 


daU' 


a, to 


al 


ai or a' 


alio 


agU 


alia 


alle 


aU' 


in, in 


n?l 


nei or n§' 


nello 


negli 


neila 


nelle 


nell' 


con, with 


col 


coi or co' 


coUo 


cogli 


coUa 


colle 


coll' 


su, on 


sul 


sui or su' 


suUo 


sugli 


sulla 


sulle 


sull' 


per, for 


pel 


PQi or pe' 


per lo 


pqrgU 


per la 


perle 


Pfrl' 



del pddre, of the father. 
dllo specchio, to the mirror. 
colla madre, with the mother. 
sull' uomo, on the man. 



dai pddri, hy the fathers. 
negli speccM, in the mirrors. 
colle madri, with the mothers. 
per gli uomini, for the men. 



(a) The word some is frequently rendered in Italian by di with 
the definite article. This is called the partitive construction. 



Dd-temi del vino. 
Delle belle cose. 



Give me some wine. 
Some fine things. 



13. In the following cases the definite article is used in 
Italian, though not in English : 

(a) Before the possessive adjectives: 



H nostro giardino. 
I suoi fratelli. 



Our garden. 
His brothers. 



When, however, the possessive quahfies an otherwise unmodified 
noun in the singular expressing relationship, the article is generally 
omitted: as mia madre, my mother. For a fuller statement, see 
45, a. 

1 Some writers, especially poeta, prefer to keep other prepositions separate from 
the article. 



ARTICLES 13 

(6) Before an abstract noun or one denoting a whole class; but 
not before one designating a part of a class: 

V uomo prop6ne. Man proposes {i.e., all mankind). 

I fiori ndscono dal seme. Flowers spring from the seed {i.e., 

all flowers). 
La morte e il peggi6re del Death is the worst of evils {i.e., 
mdli. death in general, and all evils). 

BUT 

II mlo giardino e tiitto fio- My garden is all in flower; roses, 
rito ; rose, glgli, viole md,n- lilies, violets send forth a sweet 
dano un odore sodve. fragrance {i.e., some roses, etc.). 

(c) Before a noun and adjective used either in a specific or in a 
general (but not in a partitive) sense: 

L' d,nno sc6rso. Last year {i.e., the last year). 

H povero Liiigi non viene. {The) poor Lewis doesn't come. 

Gil uomini buoni. Good men {i.e., all good men). 

BUT 

Ho trov^to dappertutto u6- / have found {some) good men 
mini buoni. everywhere. 

{d) Before a title followed by a proper name: 

La reglna Vittoria. Queen Victoria. 

II sign6r Bruni. Mr. Brown. 

It is not used, however, before Don, Messer, and Ser. 

(e) Before family names; often before famihar given names of 
women; occasionally before famihar given names of men: 

H Bidnchi e morto. White is dead. 

La Pdtti cdnta. Patti sings. 

Con6sco 1' Olivia. / know Olivia. 

Viene 11 Tonio. Tony is coming. 

(/) Before names of provinces, countries, and continents: 

la Toscdna, Tuscany. all' Itdlia, to Italy. 

la Svlzzera, Switzerland. per 1' Europa, for Europe. 

But the article is omitted after in in phrases that denote going 
to or dwelling in a country; and often after di or in when the 



14 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

preposition with the name of a country is equivalent to an adjective 
of nationahty: 

Vado in Germdnia. / go to Germany. 

Rimdngo in Francia. / remain in France. 

La reglna d' Inghilterra. The queen of England {i.e., the 

EngUsh queen). 

II vino di Spjigna. The wine of Spain (i.e., Spanish 

wine). 

II tedtro in ItdUa. The drama in Italy (i.e., the Ital- 

ian drama). 

The article is not used regularly w4th names of cities: as ve- 
dremo Roma, ive shall see Rome. La Spezia, however, has the 
article; and so have a few others. 

In all the above cases (beginning with 13, a) the article, 
unless it would be employed in English, is omitted when 
the noun is used as a vocative or is modified by a numeral 
or a pronominal adjective. It is often omitted in Hsts. 

Signora Monti, come sta? Mrs. Monti, how do you do? 

Italia, ti rivedo. Italy, I see thee again. 

Vieni, amico mio. Come, my friend. 

Due bellissimi cdni. Two very fine dogs. 

Questa sua opera. This work of his. 

Ha parecchi vizi. He has several had habits. 

Fede, speranza, carit^. Faith, hope, and charity. 



THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE 

14. Masculine : 

(a) Un before a vowel or any consonant except s impure and z. 
(6) Uno before s impure or z.^ 

un padre, a father. un uomo, a man. 

im anello, a ring. uno specchio, a mirror. 

tino sciame, a swarm. uno zlo, an uncle. 

Note that mascuhne un before a vowel has no apostrophe. 

1 Some writers use un before z and before see- or sci-. 



NOUNS 15 

15. Feminine : 

^na, which becomes un* before a vowel. 
una m^dre, a mother. un* 6ra, an hour. 

16. In the following cases the indefinite article, though 
expressed in English, is omitted in Italian: 

(a) Before a predicate noun expressing occupation, condition, 
rank, or nationality, and not accompanied by an adjective. 

Egli e poeta, he is a poet. Sono marchese, 7 am a marquis. 

8ieteitaMa.no, you are an Italian. E medico, he is a doctor. 

(6) Generally before an antecedent (of a relative clause) used in 
apposition to a preceding noun modified by a definite article or a 
demonstrative pronoun. 

L'Arno, fiume che traversa The Arno, a river which traverses 
Firenze. Florence. 

(c) After da meaning as, like, or for. See 79, g. 
Da uomo. Like a man. 



NOUNS 

17. Italian nomis are not declined. Possession is denoted 
by the preposition di: 

Lo specchio di mio pd,dre. My father^ s looking-glass. 

GENDER 

18. There are no neuter nouns in Italian.^ 

Nouns denoting males and females keep their natural 
gender; except creatura, creature; guida, guide; guardia, 

1 Latin neuters become masculine in Italian; masculines and feminines retain theil 
!Latin gender. This rule has very few exceptions. 



16 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

guard; persona, person; sentinella, sentinel; spia, spy; staf- 

fetta, courier; vedetta, scout; which are feminine. 

il fratello, the brother. mia sorella, my sister. 

il poeta, the poet. la poetessa, the poetess. 

una spia, a spy. la nostra guida, our guide. 

19. Of nouns denoting objects without sex some are 
masculine, some feminine. Their gender can often be de- 
termined by the final letter. All Italian nouns end in -a, -e, 
-i, -o, or -u:^ 

(a) Those ending in -a are feminine; except colera, cholera; qual- 
c6sa, something; Greek neuters in -ma,^ many geographical names, 
and a few other words, mostly foreign. 

iin' 6ra, an hour. un telegrd,mma, a telegram. 

il Canada, Canada. il sofa, the sofa. 

(b) Of those ending in -e and -i some are masculine, some femi- 
nine. All ending in -zione, -gione, or -udine are feminine. 

il fiume, the river. la p^ce, peace. 

un di, a day. una metropoli, a metropolis. 

la ragione, the reason. la servitudine, service. 

(c) Those ending in -o are mascuhne; except mano, hand. 
il ginocchio, the knee. la mano, the hand. 

{d) Those ending in -u are feminine; except soprappiu, surplus, 
and a few foreign words. 

la virtu, virtue. il bambu, bamboo. 

20. Any other part of speech (except an adjective^) used 
as a noun must be masculine: as il viaggiare, traveling. 

21. Masculine names of trees in -o or -e have a feminine 
form in -a or -e respectively, denotmg their fruit; but il dat- 

1 A few foreign nouns used in Italian end in a consonant: as lapis, pencil (i lapis, 
the pencils). Nouns in -o or -e often drop that vowel if the preceding consonant is 
1, n, or r: as cane =can, dog. ^ Mostly scientific terms. 

3 Adjectives of course have the gender of the nouns they represent. An adjective 
used as an abstract noun is masculine; il bello, the beautiful = beauty. 



NOUNS 17 

tero, date, il fico, fig, il limone, lemon, il porno, apple, are 

always the same, whether denoting the tree or the fruit. 

iin susino, a plum tree. una susina, a plum. 

il n6ce, the walnut tree. la noce, the walnut. 

quest! fichi, these fig trees, these figs. 

NUMBER 

22. Feminines in unaccented a form their plural by 

changing a into e. 

la strada, the street. le stride, the streets. 

una bugia, a lie. le bugle, lies. 

, (a) Feminines in -ca and -ga form their plural in -che and -ghe 
respectively (the h being inserted merely to indicate that the c 
and g keep their hard sound). 

un' oca, a goose. m6Ite oche, many geese. 

la bottega, the shop. parecchie botteghe, several shops. 

(b) Nouns in unaccented -cia and -gia form their plural in -ce 
and -ge respectively.^ 

la gudncia, the cheek. le gudnce, the cheeks. 

ijna ciKegia, a cherry. tante ciliege, so many cherries. 

23. Masculines in unaccented -a and all nouns in unac- 
cented -o and -e (not -ie) form their plural in -i.^ 

un poeta, a poet. diie poeti, two poets. 

lo zio, the uncle. gli zii, the uncles. 

la mdno, the hand. le mle md,ni, my hands. 

un mese, a month. tre mesi, three months. 

la cornice, the frame. qudttro comici, four frames. 

(a) Mascuhnes in -ca and -ga form their plural in -chi and -ghi 

respectively. 

il mondrca, the monarch. i mondrchl, the monarchs. 

il collega, the colleague. i colleghi, the colleagues. 

1 Provincia has provincie. In general borrowed words and words whose plural is 
necessarily very rare keep the i: audacia, audacie. 

2 In old Italian and in poetry words in -ello and -ale often form their plural ia 
-egli or -el, -agli or -ai: capello, capegli; animale, a nim ai. 



18 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

(6) Nouns in unaccented -io form their plural by changing -io 
to -i (often written i, j, or 11). 

Io specchio, the mirror. gli speech!, the mirrors. 

il ciliegio, the cherry tree. i ciliegi, the cherry trees. 

(c) Nouns in -go form their plural in -ghi. Nouns in -co form ' 
their plural in -chl if the penult is accented, otherwise in -cl. 

il castlgo, the -punishment. i castighi, the punishments. 

un catalogo, a catalogue. due cataloghi, two catalogues. i 

il fico, the fig. cinque fichi, five figs. 

antico, ancient. gli antlchi, the ancients. 

un medico, a doctor. sei medici, six doctors. 

This rule has a number of exceptions. In the following lists, 
words whose irregular plural is rare are omitted. 

1. Compound nouns in -logo denoting persons engaged in the 
sciences, and all compound nouns in -fago form their plural in -gi.^ 

il fisiologo, the physiologist. i fisiologi, physiologists. 

antropofago, cannibal. antropofagi, cannibals. 

2. The following words form their plural in -ci, although the 
penult is accented: 

amico greco inimico nemico porco^ 

Greco has a regular plural in the expression vini grechl. 

3. The following words form their plural in -chl, although the 
penult is unaccented: 



abbaco 


farmaco 


lastrico 


rammarico 


strascico 


acrostico 


indaco 


manico 


risico 


tossico 


carico^ 


intonaco 


parroco 


sciatico 


traffico 


dimentico' 


intrinseco 


pizzico 


stomaco 


valico^ 



Acrostico and farmaco have also regular plurals. 

Likewise the rare or obsolete words: flemmagogo, idragogo, metallurgo, sargo 
o reg. plur.), sortflego. Magicians = maghi; Magi = magi. 
2 Likewise the rare words: aprico, lombrico (also reg.), uvamico, vice. 

* Likewise its compounds. 

* Likewise the rare or obsolete words: filaccico, mantaco (also reg.), ostatico, sfilac« 
ico, statico (noun), uncico. 



NOUNS 19 

(d) The following masculines in -o have an irregular plural in 
-a which is feminine: 

centinaio, hundred. miglio, mile. uovo, egg. 

migliaio, thousand. paio, pair. 

Many masculines in -o have this irregular feminine plural in -a 
besides the regular masculine plural in -i. The most common are; 

braccio, arm. grido, shout. muro, wall. 

dito, finger. labbro, lip. orecchio, ear. 

frutto, fruit. legno, wood. osso, bone. 

ginocchio, knee. membro, member. 

un pdio, a pair. s^tte pd,ia, seven pairs. 

il mio braccio, my arm. le tue braccia, thy arms. 

il labbro, the lip. le labbra or i labbri, the lips. 

un osso, a bone. le ossa or gli ossi, the bones. 

Braccio, ginocchio, labbro, and orecchio nearly always have the 
irregular plural when denoting the two arms, knees, lips, or ears 
belonging to the same body. 



24. All monosyllables, and all nouns ending in -i, 
an accented vowel, or a consonant, are invariable. 

il re, the king. i re, the kings. 

il brindisi, the toast. i brindisi, the toasts. 

tina specie, a kind. otto specie, eight kinds 

la virtu, virtue. le virtu, the virtues. 

ijna citt^, a city. dieci citta, ten cities. 

V omnibus, the omnibus. gli omnibus, the omnibu^seSo 



25. The following nouns have irregular plurals: 

bue, ox, pi. buoi. moglie, wife, pi. mogli. 

<Uo, god, pi. dei.^ uomo, man, pi. uomini. 

» The article used with del is gli: gli dei. 




20 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



ADJECTIVES 

26. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender and 
number. An adjective modifying two nouns of different 
genders is generally put in the masculine plural. 

II g^tto e puKto. The cat is neat. 

Stdnze pulite. Neat rooms. 

Una cdsa e un giardino bellini. A pretty house and garden. 

La ragdzza e beillna. The girl is pretty. 

27. Numeral and pronominal adjectives, belle, bravo, 
buono, and the commonest adjectives of size and quantity, 
precede their nouns. Adjectives of nationality, shape, and 
material follow. 

Adjectives whose use is prompted by emotion, and adjec- 
tives used in a figurative sense, generally precede. 

Otherwise, of the noun and adjective, the one that con- 
tains the chief idea comes last. 

Due c^ni. Two dogs. 

Troppo pdne. Too much bread. 

La buona madre. The good mother. 

Le grandi citta. Great cities. 

Un llbro francese. A French book. 

Questa pdlla rotonda. This round ball. 

Pover' uomo! Poor man! 

Una nera menz6gna. A black falsehood. 
La vostra gentilissima lettera. Your kind letter. 

E un uomo gentilissimo. He is a kind man. 

GENDER AND NUMBER 

28. Adjectives ending in -o are masculine, and form thei/ 

feminine in -a. Adjectives in -e are invariable in the singu' 

lar. 

buono stivaletto, good boot. buona scdrpa, good shoe. 

ragdzzo felice, happy boy. ragazza fellce, happy girl. 



ADJECTIVES 21 

29. Adjectives form their plural in the same way as nouns 
(see 22, 23) : -o, pi. -i; -a, pi. -e; -e, pi. always -i. 

sei buoni cassett6ni, six good otto buone seggiole, eight good 

bureaus. chairs. 

due uomini felici, two happy tre doime felici, three happy women. 

men. 

(a) Parecchi, several, has for its feminine parecchie. 

(6) Qualche, some, is used only in the singular, even when the 
meaning is plural: as qualche volta, sometimes. 

(c) When preceding a noun, bello, beautiful, has forms similar to 
those of the definite article; and Santo, Saint, and grande, great, 
have corresponding forms in- the singular.^ Buono, good, when 
preceding its noun, has a singular similar to the indefinite article. 
The mascuhne of these words (which is the only irregular part) is, 
therefore, as follows: 

Before any consonant except s impure or z : b"^!, San, gran, buon ; 

pi. bei, Santi, grandi, bu6ni. 
Before s impure or z: bello, Santo, grande, bu6no;pl. begli, Santi, 

grandi, budni. 
Before a vowel; bell', Sant', grand', buon; pi. begli, Santi, gr^di, 

buoni. 

When used after a noun or in the predicate these adjectives have 
their full forms (bello, belli, Santo, Santi, grande, gr^di, buono, 
buoni). 

Un bel qujidro. A fine picture. 

Due bei letti. Two fine beds. 

Un bello scaffale. A fine bookcase. 

Qu^ttro begli stivdli. Four fine boots. 

Un bell' dndito. A fine hall. 

Molti begli orologi. Many fine clocks. 

Una bella stufa. A fine stove. 

Parecchie belle tende. Several fine curtains, 

II palazzo e bello. The palace is fine. 

1 Gran is, moreover, often used in the fem. sing, (for grdnde), and sometimes in 
the plur. (for grandi) ; it is regularly used before fem. sing, nouns in -e, and in the 
expression una gran bella (or brutta) cosa. Grande, on the other hand, is occasionally 
Bsed for gran. 



22 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



Le sedie son belle. 

San Pietro, Santo Stefano e 

Sant' Antonio. 
Un gran fuoco. 
Grandi camini. 
II grande scaldino. 
Dieci grdndi spllli. 
Un grande sciame. 
II grande zipolo. 
Un grand' armddio. 
Yenti grandi ^Iberi. < 
Una grande camera. ' 
Cinque grandi finestre. 
II salotto e molto grande. 
Un bu6n lume. 
Bu6ni fiammiferi. 
II buono sgabello. 
Nove buoni scolari. 
II buon olio. 
Parecchi buoni 4ghi. 
Una buona cucina. 
Le buone candele. 
II bambino e buono. 



The chairs are beautiful. 

St. Peter, St. Stephen, and St. An* 

thony. 
A big fire. 
Big fireplaces. 
The big foot-warmer. 
Ten big pins. 
A great swarm. 
The large bung. 
A big wardrobe. 
Twenty big trees. 
A large bedroom. 
Five big windows. 
The parlor is very large. 
A good lamp. 
Good matches. 
The good stool. 
Nine good pupils. 
The good oil. 
Several good needles. 
A good kitchen. 
The good candles. 
The child is good. 



30. Any adjective of either gender or either number maj 
be used as a noun. 

I buoni, the good. la bella, the beautiful wom>an. 



COMPARISON 

31. All Italian adjectives form their comparative by pre- 
fixing piu, more, and their superlative by prefixing the 
definite article to the comparative. 

bello, beautiful; piii bello, more beautiful; il pift bello, the most heaw 

tiful. 
liingo, long; pift liingo, longer; il piii liingo, the longest. 

When the superlative immediately follows the noun, this 
article is omitted. 

La via piii c6rta. The shortest way. 



ADJECTIVES 23 

(a) The following adjectives have an irregular comparison in 
addition to the regular one: 

^Ito, high; pi^ dlto or superiore; il pift dlto or 11 superiore. 
basso, low; pift basso or inferiore; il pivL basso or V inferiore. 
buono, good; pi^ buono or migliorei; il pih buono or il migliore. 
cattivo, bad; piii cattivo or peggiore^; il pii cattivo or il peggiore 
grdnde, big; piii grande or maggiore; il pi^ grande or il maggiore 
piccolo, small; pifi piccolo or minore ; il piii piccolo or il minore. 

Higher and lower are commonly rendered by piu alto and piii 
basso; superiore and inferiore generally mean superior and i?i- 
ferior. Migliore and peggiore are more used than piu buono and 
piu cattivo, which have the same sense. Larger and smaller are gen- 
erally piu grande and piu piccolo ; maggiore and minore usually 
signify older and younger. 

Noi sidmo migliori di loro. We are better than they. 

Questa sd,la da pranzo e la This dining room is the biggest. 

piii grande. 
Pietro e il fratello minore. Peter is the youngest brother. 

32. The adverb less is expressed by meno, least by il 
meno. As ... as, so ... as are tanto . . . quanto, tanto . . 
come, cosi . . . come, or simply quanto. 

Quella stanza e la meno That room is the least pretty. 

belllna. 
P^olo non ^ tanto buono come Paul isn't so good as Robert. 

Roberto. 
Giovanni e alto quanto Filippo. John is as tall as Philip. 

33. Than is che. 

L' albergo e piu grd-nde che The hotel is bigger than it is beaii-, 
bdllo. tiful. 

But before a noun, a pronoun, or a numeral than is ren* 
dered by the preposition di (see 12) . 

Riccd,rdo e peggiore di me. Richard is worse than I. 

Voi siete piu ricchi del re. You are richer than the king. 

Meno di cinque. Less than five. __ 

^ The adverbs better and worae are meglio and pSggio. ^ 



'1 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

If, however, this than is preceded by a word meaning 

. Cither, it is translated che. 

Piutt6sto la morte che il diso- Rather death than dishonor. 
n6re. 

Before an inflected verb than is che non or di quel che. 

If the verb has a negative subject, than is che. 

Abbd-ia piu che non morde. He barks more than he bites. 

Prometto meno di quel che do. / promise less than I give. 

Piu lieto che nessiin figlio lo Happier than any son had been. 
era stato. 

34. The more . . . the more, the less . . . the less, are piu . . . 

piu, meno . . . meno. More and less after a number are di 

piu, di meno. In speaking of time, longer after a negative 

ig piu. 

Pit stTjdio, pift impjiro. • The more I study, the more I learn, 

Trenta giomi di meno. Thirty days less. 

Non lo vediamo pi^. We see him no longer. 



AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES; 

NUMERALS 
AUGMENTATIVE AND DIMINUTIVE ENDINGS 

r;5. Instead of a word expressing size or quality, the Ital- 
MS often use a suffix. This suffix may be added to a noun, 
an adjective, or an adverb. When added to an adjective, 
an i generally when added to a noun, it takes the gender of 
the word to which it is affixed : occasionally, however, a suf- 
fix with masculine termination is added to a feminine noun, 
which thereby becomes masculine. A word loses its final 
vowel before a suffix; but the preceding consonant, if it be 
c or g, must keep its former quality: as Carlo+ino = Car- 
lino v6ce+6ne = voci6ne, p6co4-ino = pochIno, adagio+ino 
= adagino. 



AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES; NUMERALS 25 

(a) The commonest ending is -issimo (fem. -issima), very, 
which in general is added only to adjectives and adverbs. Adverbs 
in -mente add the -issima before the -mente (see 85). Any adjec- 
tive may take it, and it is very often used in cases where it would 
be entirely superfluous in English. 

Mrgo, wide. larghissimo, venj wide. 

bene, well. Denissimo, very well. 

grdnde, hig. grandissimo, very big. 

fa un tempo bellissimo, iVs bellissimamente, very beautifully, 
beautiful weather. 

(h) The principal suffix denoting bigness is -one; it is always 
masculine, but has a rare feminine form, -ona. 

libro, book. un librone, a big book. 

cdsa, house. un casone, a large house. 

boccia, decanter. una bocciona, a big decanter. 

(c) The most important suffixes denoting smallness are -ino, 
-cino, -icino, -iccino, -etto, -ello, Tcello, -fcello, -arello, -erello, 
-6tto, -uccio, -uzzo, -u61o,.)vith their fem. -tna, etc. These end- 
ings, especially -uccio, are often used to express affection; some of 
them may be used to express pity or contempt. Otto sometimes 
means somewhat large instead of small. 

sorella, sister. sorellina, little sister. 

bello, beautiful. bellino, pretty. 

brutto, 2igly. bruttino, rather ugly. 

piazza, square. piazzetta, little square. 

Giorgio, George. Giorgetto, Georgie. 

campana, bell. camimnello, little bell. 

dquila, eagle. aquilotto, eaglet. 

casa, house. casdtta, rather large house. 

Giovanni, John. Giovannuccio, dear little Johnny. 

pazzo, mad. pazzarella, poor mad woman. 

povero, poor. poverini, poor things ! 

(d) The ending -accio denotes worthlessness. 

roba, stuff, goods. robaccia, trash. 

tempo, weather. tein])accio, nasty weather. 

Alfredo, Alfred. Alfredaccio, naughty Alfred. 



26 



ITALIAN GRAMIVIAR 



36. Of the endings added to nouns -ino is by far the 
most common; the only ones that are freely used to form 
new compounds are -ino, little, -one, great, -uccio, dear^ 
and -accio, bad. In very many cases, endings lose their 
character of independent suffixes, and become inseparable 
parts of certain words, whose meanings they often change: 
as scala, stairway; scalino, stair; scaletto, ladder. So brother^ 
sister are always fratello, sorella. Some suffixes (as -uolo) 
are rarely used except in this way. Others (as -cine, -icino, 
-ello, -cello, -icello, -arello, -erello) cannot be attached to 
any word at pleasure, their use beuig determined by pre- 
cedent or euphony. 



37. Sometimes several suffixes are added at once to the 
same word: as ladro, thief; ladrone, terrible thief; ladroncello, 
terrible little thief. 





^ WvviLxX'- 


, 






NUMERALS 






38. The cardinal numerals are : 






1, iino. 


15, quindici. 28, vent6tto or 


101, 


centiino or 


2, due. 


16, sedici. vent' otto. 




cent' uno. 


3, tre. 


17, diciassette. 29, ventinbve. 


105, 


centocinque. 


4, quattro. 


18, diciotto. 30, trenta. 


115, 


centoquindici., 


5, cinque. 


19, diciannove. 31, trentuno or 


125, 


cento venti- 


6, sei. 


20, venti. trent' uno. 




cinque. 


7, sette. 


21, ventuno or 32, trentadue. 


200, 


dugento or 


8, otto. 


vent' uno. 40, quar^nta. 




duecento. 


9, nove. 


22, ventidue. 50, cinquanta. 


250, 


dugento cin- 


10, died. 


23, ventitre. 60, sessanta. 




quanta. 


11, undici. 


24, ventiquattro. 70, settanta. 


300, 


trecento. 


12, dodici. 


25, venticinque. SO, ottanta. 


400, 


quattrocento. 


13, tredici. 


26, ventisei. 90, novanta. 


1000, 


mille. 


14, quattordici. 


27, ventisette. 100, cento. 


2000, 


due mila. 



Uno has a feminine una; when used adjectively it has the 
same forms as the indefinite article; so also ventuno, etc. 



AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES; NUMERALS 2/ 

The plural of mille is mila. A million is un milione or mil- 
lione, of which the plural is milioni or millioni. 

1. No conjunction is used between the different parts of a num- 
ber: as dugento quaranta, two hundred and forty. No indefinite 
article is used before cento and mille: as cento libri, a hundred 
bocks. 

2. Cento, dugento, etc., when followed by another numeral of 
more than two syllables may lose the final syllable -to : as seicento 
cinquanta or seicencinquanta, six hundred and fifty. 

3. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, etc., must be rendered mille- 
cento, mille dugento, etc. : as mille ottocento ottantasette, 1887. 

4. Both, all three, etc., are tutti (fem. tutte) e due, tutti (fem. 
tutte) e tre, etc. 

(a) If the noun modified by ventuno, trentuno, etc., follows this 
numeral, it is regularly in the singular; as trentun giorno, thirty- 
one days. Sometimes, however, the noun precedes the numeral, 
and then it is in the plural. 

Sessantuna lira, or lire sessan- Sixty-one francs. 
tuna. 

(6) In dates the definite article is prefixed to the number repre- 
senting the year, if that number does not follow the name of a 
month. For instance, 1915 is il 1915. 

Nel mille ottocento ottanta- In 1887. 
sette. 

(c) What time is it ? is che ora e? or che ore sono? It is six, etc., 
is sono le sei, etc., 6re being understood. One 0^ clock is 11 tocco. 

Sono le due e mezzo. IVs half past two. 

Sono le tre e dieci. It^s ten minutes past three. 

Ci mancano venti miniiti dlle It's twenty minutes to four. 

quattro. 

S6no le cinque meno un qudrto. It's a quarter to five. 



28 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



39. The ordinal numerals are: 



1st, 


primo. 


12th, 


duodecimo or 


20th, 


ventesimo. 


2d, 


secondo. 




decimo secondo. 


21st, 


ventesimo primo or 


3d, 


terzo. 


13th, 


tredicesimo or 




ventunesimo. 


4th, 


quarto. 




decimo terzo. 


22d, 


ventesimo secondo 


5th, 


quinto. 


14th, 


quattordicesimo or 




or ventiduesimo. 


6th, 


sesto. 




decimo quarto. 


30th, 


trentesimo. 


7th, 


settimo. 


15th, 


quindicesimo or 


100th, 


centesimo. 


8th, 


ottavo. 




decimo quinto. 


101st, 


centesimo primo. 


9th, 


nono. 


16th, 


, decimo sesto. 


lloth, 


, centoquindicesimo. 


10th, 


decimo. 


17th, 


decimo settimo. 


200th, 


dugentesimo. 


11th, 


undecimo or 


18th, 


decimo ottavo. 


1000th, 


millesimo. 




decimo primo. 


19th, 


decimo nono. 


2000th, 


duemilesimo. 



All of them form their feminines and plurals like other 
adjectives in -o. 

Le settantesime quinte cose. The 75th things. 

(a) Ordinal numerals are used after the words book, chapter, 
and the names of rulers; but no article intervenes. 

Carlo secondo. Charles the Second. 

Pio nono. Pins IX. 

Libro terzo. Book the Third. 

Capitolo quarto. Chapter four. 

(b) For the day of the month, except the first, a cardinal num- 
ber is used. 

The fifth of Apnl. 



II di cinque d' aprile or il 

cinque aprile. 
II primo di maggio. 



The first of May. 



(c) The fourteenth century is il secolo decimo qudrto or il Tre- 
cento (i. e. mille trecento). H Dugento, i! Quattrocento, il Cin- 
quecento are often used for the 13th, 15th, and 16th centuries, 
and the later century names may be similarly abbreviated. 



(d) A third, a fourth, a fifth, etc., are im terzo, im quarto, un 
quinto, etc. Half is la meta; the adjective half is mezzo, 



PRONOUNS 29 

40. A couple or a pair is un paio. A dozen is una doz- 
zina. The expressions una decina, una ventina, una tren- 
tina, etc., un centinaio, un migliaio, mean about ten, about 
twenty, etc. (see 23, d). Once, twice, etc., are una volta, due 
volte, etc. 



Un paio di scdrpe. A pair of 

Una cinquantina di pers6ne. Some fifty persons. 

L' ho visto parecchie volte. Vve seen it several times. 



DEMONSTRATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, RELATIVE, 
AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 

41. For the indefinite pronouns, see 86-91. 

42. 1. The demonstratives used adjectively are questo,i 
this, and quelle or cotesto, that. Cotesto (also codesto) is 
used of objects associated with the person addressed. 
Questo and cotesto are inflected like other adjectives; but 
they generally drop o before a vowel. Quelle is inflected 
like bello (see 29, c). 

quest' uomo, this man. queste rag^zze, these girls. 

quel bambino, that infant. quel fanciiilli, those children. 

quell' amico, that friend. quegli sposi, that couple. 

quello zio, that uncle. quelle signore, those ladies. 

Questo and quello are also used substantively for this, 
that, this one, that one: as fate questo, non fate quello, do 
this, donH do that. 

2. This man is translated by questi; that man by quegli, 
quel, or cotesti (rare) ; these words are invariable, refer only 
to persons, and are used only in the nominative singular. 
Cestui and colui mean respectively the same as questi and 

1 In archaic or literary Italian esso is sometin\cs used for questo. 



30 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

quegli, but are not defective, having a feminine singular 
costei, colei, and a plural (both genders alike) costoro, coloro. 
Cestui is often used in a depreciative sense. 

Questi e francese e quegli e This man is French and that one 
tedesco. is German. 

,^^^ Chi e cestui? Who is this fellow f 

^ Parlo di colui. / speak of tJiat man. 

3. Cio, this, that, is invariable, and represents a whole 
idea, not a single word: 

Ci6 e vero. ThaVs so. 

(a) Quello and questo, quegli and questi mean also the former, 
the latter. 

(6) He who is colui che, or simply chi. The one who, whom, 
which, that which, what, is quello che or quel che. 

Chi lavo ra or colui cheJav6ra._.,J/'e who works. 
Quel che dlcoioT'" ~ "" The one I mean. 

A quel che sento. Frorn what I hear. 

43. The interrogative who, whom, is chi. What? used 
substantively is che, che cosa, or cosa.^ What? used adjec- 
tively is che or quale. Which ? is quale. 

Quale has a plural quali ; chi and che are invariable. 

How much? is quanto (-a); how ma^iy? is quanti (-e). 

Chi vedo? - Whom do I see ? 

Di chi parld,te? Of whom do you speak f 

Ditemi chi viene. Tell me who is coming. 

Che vogliono? What do they want? 

Che cosa dice? What does he- say f 

Che or quali Hbri avete com- What books did you buy f 

prato? 

Quale di questi volumi e il Which of these volumes is the first ? 

prime? 

Quante volte te Tho detto! How many times I have told you! 

1 Cosa (as cosa dice?) is generally avoided in written Italian. Note that chi ia 
used in indirect as well as in direct questions. 



PRONOUNS 31 

(a) The interrogative whose is di chi. 
Di chi d qu^sto bigh^tto? Whose card is this ? 

(h) In exclamations what a, what are rendered by che or qu^e 
without any article. 

Che bel pa^se! What a beautiful country! 

4A. The principal relative pronouns are che, cui, il quale : 
they are all applied to both persons and things, and mean 
who, whom, which, or that. II quale is inflected (la quale, i 
qudli, le quali). Che and cui are invariable: in general che 
is used only as subject and direct object, cui only after 
prepositions or as indirect object. In poetry onde is often 
used to signify of which or from which. 

La lingua che si pd,rla. The language which we speak. 

L' uomo del quale si tr^tta. The man of whom we are speaking. 

Le persone a cui or alle quali The persons to whom I speak. 

pd,rlo. 

Lo scrltto di cui pd,rlo. The work I am speaking of. 

1. As subject or direct object che is preferred to il quale, unless 
clearness requires the latter. 

I#o figlie che stiidiano. The daughters who are studying. 

Le figlie degli Americd,ni, le The Americans' daughters, who are 
quali studiano. studying. 

2. The relative whose is il cui or del quale. 

tJna sign6ra, il cui n6me e A lady whose name is Lucy. 

Lucia. 
Un uomo, le cfii figlie con6- A man whose daughters I know. 

SCO. 

L' aut6re, del cui libro si The author whose hook we are 

p^rla. speaking of. 

Le chiese delle quali si v^dono The churches whose domes we see. 

le cupole. 

3. The relative cannot be omitted in Italian. 

Le cdse che ho comprdte. The houses I have bought. 



32 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



(a) Such ... as is tale . . . quale; in poetry tale, quale have a 
plural tai, quai instead of tali, quali. As much as is tanto quanto; 
as manij as is tanti quanti. 

Quale e il pddre tale e il figlio. As is the father, so is the son. 

(6) He who, Mm who is chi or colui che (see 42, b). 

Chi ha la sanita e ricco. He who has health is rich. 

Colui che lavora e contento. He who works is satisfied. 
Amiamo chi ci dma. We love him who loves us. 

(c) Whoever is chiunque; whatever as a pronoun is tutto qu§l che 
or checche, as an adjective quale che, qualunque che, qualunque, 
per quanto. These words, excepting ttitto quel che, all take the^ 
subjunctive. Checche is now bi^t little used. 



Chiunque siate. 

Checche faccid,te, fatelo bene. 

Tutto quel che volete. 

Quali che siano i vostri motivi. 

Qualunque siano i suoi talenti. 

In qualunque stato che io mi 

trovi. 
Per quante ricchezze egli abbia. 



iL, 



Whoever you may be. ^ VJ^ *^ v 

Whatever you do, do it well. 

Whatever you wish. 

Whatever your motives may be. 

Whatever his talents may be. 

In whatever condition I may find 

myself. 
Whatever riches he may have. 



45. The possessive pronouns and adjectives are: 





SINGULAR 


PLURAL 




MASC. 


FEM. 


MASC. 


FEM. 


my, mine: 


ilmio 


la mia 


i miei 


le mie 


thy, thine: 


il tuo 


latua 


i tuoi 


le tue 


his, her, hers, its: 


ilsuo 


la sua 


i suoi 


lesue 


our, ours: 


il nostro 


la nostra 


i nostri 


le nSstre 


your, yours: 


ii v6stro 


la vostra 


i vostri 


le vostre 


their, theirs: 


il loro 


la loro 


iloro 


le loro 



Loro is invariable; the others agree with the object pos- 
sessed: 

il mio ndso, my nose. i v6stri occhi, your eyes. 

la sua bocca, his, her mouth. le lore labbra, their lips. 

When the possessive stands alone in the predicate, the 
article is omitted if the possessive is used adjectively. To 



PRONOUNS SS 

determine whether the possessive is used adjectively, con- 
sider the sentence as the answer to a question. If the sen- 
tence answers a question beginning with whose, there is no 
article; if it answers a question beginning with which, the 
article is used. 

Questo cappello e mio. This hat is mine. Whose hat ? 

Mine. 
Questo cappello e il mio. This hat is mine. Which hat? 

This one. 

(a) The article (unless it might be used in English) is omitted 
before the possessive: 

1. When a numeral, an adjective of quantity, or a demonstra- 
tive or interrogative adjective precedes it: 

Due cd,ni suoi. Two dogs of his. 

BUT I due cani suoi. The two dogs of his or his two dogs. 

Molti miei amici. • Many friends of mine. 

BUT I molti miei amici. The many friends of mine or my 

many friends. 

Questo tiio difetto. This fault of thine. 

2. When the possessive forms part of a title: 

Vostra Maesta. Your Majesty. 

Sua Altezza. His Highness. 

3. When the possessive modifies a noun used in the vocative (in 
this case the possessive generally follows its noun) : as amico roio, 
my friend! 

4. The article is generally omitted also when the possessive pre- 
cedes a noun in the singular expressing relationship : as nostra ma- 
dre, our mother; compare le mie figlie, 7ny daughters. But if the 
noun has a diminutive ending, or another adjective accompanies 
the noun, the article is not omitted : 

H tuo fratellino. Thy little brother. 

La vostra .gentillssima sorella. Your kind sister. 



34 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

Sometimes it is omitted before a predicate noun that does not 
express relationship: 

Questo sign6re d siio maestro. This gentleman is his teacher. 

10 lo credeva mio amico. I thought him my friend. 

0. The article is omitted also in certain standing phrases, such 
as: r- 

'vwUrVA'iJ'-da pdrte mla, for me. a m6do siio, in his own way. 

^ per am6r mio, for my sake. e c61pa vostra, iVs your fault, 

in cdsa nostra, in our house. a cdsa siia, to his house. 

(6) The possessive, when not necessary for clearness, is usually 
replaced by a definite article. 

C6me sta la mdmma? How is your mother? 

Ha perduto 11 giudizio. He has lost his senses. 

Bdttono i piedi. They stamp their feet. 

(c) When the name of the thing possessed is direct object of a 
verb, the Itahans often use instead of the possessive a conjimctive 
personal pronoun (see 47) and a definite article. 

Si strdppa i capelli. He tears his hair (lit., he tears to 

himself the hairs). 

Mi tdglio il dlto. / cut my finger (I cut to myself the 

finger). 

11 edne gli agguantd la gdmba. The dog seized his leg (seized to 

him the leg). 

If the thing possessed be a part of the body or clothing, this 
construction is frequent, even when the name of the thing is not 
object of a verb. 

Mi duole il cdpo. My head aches (to me aches the 

head) . 

(d) When the possessor is not the subject of the sentence, his, 
her are, for the sake of clearness, often rendered di lui, di lei : 

Egli non con6sce il di lei cuore. He does not know her heart. 

(e) A ... of mine, of thine, etc., is un mio, un tuo, etc.: 
Una nostra cugina. A cousin of ours. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS 35 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS 

46. Personal pronouns are divided into two classes, con- 
junctive and disjunctive: the conjunctive forms are those 
used as direct object of a verb, and as indirect object with- 
out a preposition; the disjunctive forms are those used as 
subject of a verb, and as object of a preposition. 

£gli ve lo da per me. 
He to you it gives for me. 



CONJUNCTIVE FORMS 

47. Conjunctive pronouns are always unaccented, and 
cannot be separated from the verb, which they sometimes 
follow but oftener precede, as will be explained in 48. 

They are used only as direct object of a verb or as indirect 
object without a preposition. The forms are: 

mi, me, to me. ti, thee, to thee. 

ci, us, to us.^ vi, you, to you. 

si (reflexive), himself, to himself; herself, to herself; itself, to itself. 

si (reflexive), themselves, to themselves. 

lo, him^: gli, to him."^ la, her; le, to her. 

li, them (masc); loro, to them.^ le, them (fern.); loro, to them. 

It must be rendered by a masculine or feminine form, 
according to the gender of the noun it represents. It rep- 
resenting not a word, but a whole clause, is lo.^ 

Mi con6sce. He knows me. 

Ti do i libri. / give thee the books. 

Ci vedete. You see us. 

Vi dico tutto. / tell you everything. 

1 In old Italian and in poetry ne is often used for ci, and il for lo. 
* In conversation li is often used for gli, and gli or li for lore. 

» In certain idiomatic phrases la represents an indefinite object: as pagfirla cara, 
to pay dearly for it. 



36 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

Si v^ste. He dresses himself. 

Si divertono. They amuse themselves. 

Ecco 1' oro : ve lo do. Here's the gold: I give it to you. 

Ecco la palla: la vedo. Here's the ball: I see it. 

C6me poteva sapere se lo How coidd he tell whether I was 

venlva o no? — Lo ha indo- coming or not? He guessed it. 

vin^to. 

1. It will be seen that the third person (not reflexive) has differ- 
ent forms for the direct and the indirect object. 

Lo trovdi. / found him. 

Gli feci un regd,lo. / made him a present. 

La lascia. He leaves her. 

Le scrive. He writes to her. 

Li cercdte. You seek them (masc). 

Le salutate. You greet them (fern.). 

Mandiamo 16ro mille saliiti. We send them (masc. or fern.) a 

thousand greetings. 

2. The reflexive pronouns of the first and second persons are mi, 
ci; ti, vi. All plural reflexive pronouns are used also as reciprocal 
pronouns. A verb is called reflexive when it has as direct or indirect 
object a conjunctive pronoun representing the same person as its 
subject. 

Mi defendo. I defend myself. 

Vi lavdte. You wash yourselves. 

Si fa on6re. She does herself credit. 

Si odiano. They hate each other. 

Ci amiamo. We love one another. 

3. Another conjunctive pronoun is ne,^ of it, of them; it corre- 
sponds also to amj, some when these words mean any, some of it, 
any, some of them. It is often used pleonastically in Italian. 

Ne pdrla. . He speaks of it. 

Ne ho. / have some. 

Non ne abbidmo. We haven't any. 

Ne volete? Do you want any ? 

Tu ne approfitti di questa You make good use of this liberty. 
liberta. 

1 Cf. French en. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS 37 

(a) Vi, you, and ci and ne, us, are not distinguished by form 
nor position from the adverbs vi, ci, meaning there, here, to it, to 
them,^ and the adverb ne, thence (see 84) i^ 

Ci v^do. / go ther^. 

Vi e st^to. He has been there. 

Ne vengono. They come from there. 

The adverb ci or vi is used to express to it, to them, in speak- 
ing of things. 

Ci pensero. / shall attend to it. 

Mi fa dei gesti, ma non He makes signs to me, but I do not 

vi rispondo. reply to them. 

48. The conjunctive pronouns, except loro, immediately 
precede the verb: 

Mi vedete. Yoit see me. 

Non lo capisco. / donH understand him. 

But when the verb fc an infinitive/^ a positive imperative,^ 

a present participle, or a past participle used without an 

auxiliary, the pronoun follows the verb, and is WTitten as 

one word with it:^ 

per vederlo, to see him. di av6rlo veduto, to have seen him. 

vedeteli, see them. vedendoci, seeing us. 

avendoci veduto, having seen us. vedutoti, having seen thee. 

The addition of the pronoun does not change the place of 

the accent. 

Lore always follows the verb, but is never united to it. 

Egli da loro del vino. He gives them some wine. 

Parlate loro. Speak to them. 

1 Cf. French y. 2 Cf. French en. 

3 Not the infinitive used — with a negative — as imperative (see 72): as non lo 
fare, do not do it (second pers. sing.). 

4 Not the negative imperative, nor the subjunctive used imperatively (see 77, a): 
as non li guardate, do not look at them; si regoli, let him moderate himself (third pers. 
sing. pres. subj.). 

5 Students should follow strictly all of these rules; but they will find that the first 
is, in certain cases, not always observed by good Italian writers. In literary style a 
pronoun often follows a verb that begins a sentence: as vedolo venire, / see him coming. 



38 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

(a) When an infinitive depends immediately (wathout an inter- 
vening preposition) on another verb, a conjunctive pronoun be- 
longing to the infinitive may go with cither verb: 

Posso vederti or ti posse / can see thee. 
vedere. 

(never: posso ti vedere) 

A reflexive pronoun oftenest goes wdth the main verb. 
Si deve correggere. He must correct himself. 

If both verbs have objects, the main verb regularly takes all 
conjunctive pronouns: 

Ve lo sento dire. I hear you say it. 

Me lo fa caplre. He makes me understand it. 

If, however, the main verb is impersonal, it cannot take the 
object of the infinitive: 

Bisogna farlo. It is necessary to do it. 

If the main verb is fare, lasciare, sentire, udire, or vedere, it 

must take the pronoun: 

Lo fa chiam^re. He has him called. 

(b) If the main verb is fare, and the dependent infinitive has 
a direct object, the object of fare, if it has one, must be indireqt: 

Le fa avere la lettera. He lets her have the letter. , 

Fateli vedere a quel signore. Let that gentleman see them. 
Dovrei farglielo accettare. / ought to make him accept it. 

This construction is generally used also with lasciare, to let, and 
often -vvdth sentire and udire, to hear, and vedere, to see. Note 
that the main verb takes all conjunctive pronouns. 
Glielo vedo d^re. / see it given him. 

(c) When a conjunctive pronoun is joined to an infinitive, that 
infinitive drops its final e; if it ends in -rre, it drops -re: 

farlo (fdre), to do it. condurviicondune), to conduct you. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS 39 

(d) The final vowel of mi, ti, si is often, and that of lo, la is 
nearly always elided before a verb beginning with a vowel : 

T' ^mo. / love thee. 

L' ho visto. I've seen him. 

(e) All conjunctive pronouns except gli and glie (see 50) double 
their initial consonant when added to any form of a verb that ends 
in an accented vowel : 

Daromi {imper. da.^ from ddre). Give me. 

Parlerolle (antique, for le par- / shall speak to her. 

lero). 

DUlo {imper. 6V from dire). Say it. 

(/) Pronouns are joined to the interjection ecco, see here, just 
as they are joined to the imperative of a verb: 
Eccomi, Here I am. 

Eccotelo pr6nto. Here it is ready for thee. 

49. When two conjunctive pronouns come together, the 

indiiect object precedes the direct: 

Mi vi presenta. He introduces you to me. 

Non vuol presentarvimi. He will not introduce me to you, 

Gli si presento un uomo. A man presented himself to him. 

But see 55, end. 

Lore, however, always comes last: 
Presentatela loro. Introduce her to them. 

Ne follows all forms except lore : » 

Me ne da. He gives me some. 

Datene lore. Give them some. 

50. Mi, ti, ci, vi, si change their i to e before lo, la, li, le^ 

ne (pronoun or adverb); and if the two words follow the 
verb, they are joined together:^ 

Me lo dice. He tells me it. 

Ve ne domando. / ask you for some. 

Mandatecelo. Send it to us. 

^ In poetry me lo, me ne, etc., often become mel, men, etc.: as tel dice, / tell thee 
9o; sen torna, he returns thence. Non lo often = noJ. 



4U ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

Gli and le (to her) become glie before lo, la, li, le, ne, and 
unite with them: 

Glieli mjindo. / send them to him, to her. 

Voglio darglielo. / vrish to give it to him, to her. 



DISJUNCTIVE FORMS 

51. These forms are so called because they do not neces- 
sarily stand next to the verb. 

Disjunctive pronouns have two cases, nominative and 
objective (or accusative). The objective case is used only 
after prepositions (for exceptions, see 51, a, b). 

The disjunctive forms are these: 

10, /; me, me. tu, thou; te, thee. 

noi, we; noi, us. voi, you; voi, you. 

I egli, lui, esso, he; lui, esso, hiin. 
I ella, lei, essa, she; lei, essa, her. 
I essi, loro, they (masc); loro, essi, them (masc). 
I esse, loro, they (fern.); loro, esse, them (fern.). 

It must be rendered by a masculine or feminine form, ac- 
cording to the gender of the noun it represents. It as sub- 
ject of an impersonal verb is regularly not expressed (see, 
however, 51, h). 

La c^sa e grandissima, e in- The house is very large, and around 
torno ad essa c' e un giar- it there is a garden. 

dino. 

Non e vero. * It isn't true. 

Piove. It rains. 

1. The various pronouns of the third person are used as follows: 
In speaking of things the different forms of esso are generally 

employed. 

In speaking of persons egli (or esso), ella (or essa), pi. essi, esse, 

are used for the nominative in written ItaHan,i but in the spoken 

1 Italian formerly possessed also masc. eglino, fern, elleno, they, for persons; like- 
wise pi. igli (or ei) and elle. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS 41 

language they are replaced by lui, lei, loro. For the objective, 
lui, lei, lore (sometimes esse, essa, essi, esse) are used both in 
conversation and in writing. 
For he who, etc., see 42, h. 

Qu^ste c6se s6no v4re anch' esse. These things are true, too. 

Ella pd,rla con loro. She speaks with them. 

Lei e gi6vane ma lui d vecchio. She is young, but he is old. 

Vennero da noi anch' essi. They came to us, too. 

2. As the Italian verb denotes by its endings the person and 
number of its subject, the personal pronouns of the nominative 
case are generally omitted. When expressed (for clearness, em- 
phasis, or euphony), they may precede or follow the verb; in 
dependent clauses they nearly always follow. The subject of an 
interrogative verb usually comes after it, as in English. ■ 

Parlijimo di lui. We speak of him. 

Non vado. / don't go. 

S' 10 fossi riceo c6me e egli. // / were rich as he is. 

Vengono essi? Are they coming ? 

3. The disjunctive reflexive pronoun of the third person is se, 
which is mascuUne and feminine, singular and plural. 

Lo f^cero da se. They did it by themselves. 

In the other persons me, noi, te, voi are used. 

(a) Use the objective case and not, as in Enghsh, the nominative: 

(1) When a pronoun of the third person may be regarded as the 
subject of an unexpressed verb: 

Be^tolui! Happy he! 

Tdnto i genit6ri che lui 86no His parents as well o^ he are rich. 
ricchi. 

(2) When the pronoun stands in the predicate after the verb 
essere : 

Credendo eh' fo f6ssi te. Thinking I was you. 

But note carefully that it is I, etc., are sono fo, sei tu, e liii, e 
lei, si^lino noi, siete vol, sono loro. 



42 ITALIAN GEAMMAR 

(6) (1) When the pronoun is at all emphatic, the disjunctive 
form must be used. In this case the conjunctive form is often in- 
serted also. 

Pdrlo a vol sign6re. / speak to you, sir. 

Mi piiice dnche a me. It pleases me too. 

BUT 

Vi pdrlo, / speak to you. 

Mi pidce. It pleases me. 

(2) The disjunctive form must therefore always be used when the 
verb has two direct or two indirect objects. 

Vedo lui e lei. / see him and her. 

Lo do a mio padre e a te. / give it to my father and to thee. 

(c) In speaking of a company, a class, or a people noi altri, v6i 
altri (wliich are also written as one word) are used for noi, voi. 

Noi altri italiani. We Italians. 

Voi altri pittori. You painters. 

(d) With me, with thee, with himself, herself, themselves are either 
con me, etc., or meco, teco, seco. 

(e) Myself, thyself, etc., used for emphasis with a pronoun or 
noun, are rendered by the adjective stesso. 

N6i stessi la vedemmo. We saw her ourselves. 

( /) One another, each other is 1' iin 1' altro. 
Ci amidmo 1' un 1' altro. We love one another. 

(g) In Florence ella is often shortened into la (plural le), which 
is used of both persons and things. In poetry egli becomes ei. 

La non viene. She doesn't come. 

Pare che la si possa tener in It looks as if it might he held in the 
^ md,no. hand. 

Ei tdce. He is silent. 

(h) In impersonal phrases like it is the subject, it, is occasionally 
expressed in Italian; it is then translated egli, which in the spoken 
language is shortened into gli. 

Gli e che. It is because. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS O 43 

, S 

52. 1. The usual form of address in Italy is Ell^ (or ella), 
objective Lei (or lei); in conversation Ella is replaced by 
Lei (or lei) . This word really means it, and takes the verb __^ 
in the third person; but an adjective or past participle *- 
modifying it agrees in gender with the person it represents, t 

The plural of Ella is Lore (or loro), which takes the verb 1 
in the third person plural. 

The use of the capital initial in all these words is optional. 
It marks respect, and is sometimes useful to distinguish 
you from she. 

Lei or Ella e ted^sco, sign6re. You are German, sir. 

Signorina Neri, Lei or Ella fu Miss Neri, you were left alone. 

lasciata sola. 

Sono lieto che La stia bene Pm glad you are well. 

(see 51, ^). 

E Loro, dove vanno? And you, where are you going f 

Loro erano gia partiti. You were already gone. 

Signorine, loro sono m61to Young ladies, you are very stu- 

studiose. dious. 

Like other personal pronouns, Ella and Lore are very 
often omitted in the nominative. 

Lei e troppo gentile or e You are too kind. 

troppo gentile.- 
C6me stanno? How do you (pi.) do? 

The conjunctive forms of fiUa are La, Le (or la, le), those 
of Lore are Li, Le, Lore (or li, le, lore); they occupy the 
same positions and undergo the same modifications as the 
corresponding pronouns of the third person (see 48, 49, 50). 

Note that regularly in the singular the same pronoun is 
used, whether one is addressing a man or a woman ; altliough 
occasionally lo, gli are substituted for la, le in speaking to a 

1 Standing for Vostra Signoria, your lordship, or ladi/nhip, or some other title of 
the femiuiue geuder^ 



44 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

male. In the plural, however, if the pronoun be a direct 
object, the sexes are regularly distinguished. 
The reflexive pronoun of Ella and Lore is si. 

Le prometto di visitarla. I promise (you) to visit you. 

Glielo do. / give it to you. 

La prego d' accomoddrsi. / heg you to seat yourself. 

VIdi Lei e il babbo. / saw you and your father (see 

51, h, 2). 
Dlco loro. / tell you (pi.). 

Le cercava. / was looking for you (fern. pi.). 

Non posso vederli. / canH see you (masc. pi.). 

Si divertono, signorini? Are you enjoying yourselves, young 

gentlemen ? 

The possessive of fiUa is Suo (or sue) ; that of Loro is Loro 
(or loro). See 45. 

La Sua gradlta lettera. Your welcome letter. • 

2. Vol is the form of address oftenest found in books; it is 
used sometimes in conversation also, but only toward in- 
feriors or toward equals with whom one is on familiar terms.^ 
It is employed for both plural and singular (like English 
you), although its verb is always plural; an adjective or 
participle modifying it agrees in gender and number with 
the person or persons it represents. 

V6i qui, Pietro? You here, Peter ? 

Voi siete dlti tutti e due. You are tall, both of you. 

3. In speaking to an intimate friend, a near relative, a 

child, or an animal, the only form of address is tu. Tu is 

used also, like English thou, in poetry and poetic prose. 

The plural of tu is voi. 

Ti chiamo Enrico. 7 call you Henry. 

Dove sei tu? Where art thou ? 

Voglio vedervi, figliuoli miei. My children, I wish to see you: 

1 Though advocated by some of the best wTiters and speakers of ItaUan, the use 
of voi instead of Lei and L6ro has not become general. In Southern Italy, however, 
voi is the form popularly used. 



AUXILIARY VERBS 



45 



AUXILIARY VERBS 



53. -The irregular verbs essere, to he, and avere, to have, 
are the ones most used as auxiliaries in Italian. They are 
conjugated as follows: 



(a) Infinitives: 


essere, to be; essere stato, to have been. 


Participles 


: essendo, being; 
been. 


essendo stato, 


having been; stato, 




Indicative 




PRESENT PAST DESCRIPTIVE 


past absolute 


future 


/ am, etc. * 


/ was, etc. 


/ was, etc. 


/ shall be, etc. \ 


sono 


era 


fui 


saro 


sei 


eri 


fosti 


sarai 


e 


era 


fu 


sara 


siamo 


eravamo 


fiimmo 


saremo 


siete 


eravate 


foste 


sarete 


sono 


erano 


furono 


saranno 


PRESENT 
PERFECT 


past perfect 


second past 
perfect 


FUTURE 

perfect 


/ have been, etc. 


/ had been, etc. 


/ had been, etc 


. / shall have been, 
etc. 


sdno stato 


era stato 


fui stato 


saro stato 


(stata) 


(stata) 


(stata) 


(stata) 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


siamo stati 


eravamo stati 


fummo stati 


saremo stati 


(state) 


(state) 


(state) 


(state) 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


Imperative 


Subjunctive 


Past Future 


Be, etc. 


present 


past 


/ should be, 




/ be, etc. 


/ were, etc. 


etc. 




sia 


fossi 


sarei 


sii or sia 


sia 


fossi 


saresti 




sia 


fosse 


sarebbe 


siamo 


siamo 


fossimo 


saremmo 


siate 


siate 


foste 


sareste 




siano or sieno 


fossero 


sarebbero 



46 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 





Subjunctive 




PAST FUTURE 


PRESENT 


PAST 


PERFECT 


PERFECT 


PERFECT 


/ should have 


I have been 


I, etc. I had been, etc. 


been, etc. 


sia stato (stata) fossi stato (stata) 


sarei stato 


\ 






(stata) 


etc. 




etc. 


etc. 


{Z>) Infinitives: 


avere, to have; 


avere avuto, to have had. 


PARTiCIPLES : 


; avendo, having 
had. 


'/ avendo avuto, 


having had; avuto, 




Indicative 




PRESENT PAST DESCRIPTIVE 


PAST ABSOLUTE 


FUTURE 


/ have, etc. 


/ had, etc. 


/ had, etc. 


/ shall have, etc. 


ho 


aveva 


ebbi 


avr6 


hai 


avevi 


avesti 


avrai 


ha 


aveva 


ebbe 


avra 


abbiamo 


avevamo 


avemmo 


avremo 


avete 


avevate 


aveste 


avrete 


hanno 


avevano 


ebbero 


avranno 


PRESENT 


PAST 


SECOND PAST 


FUTURE 


PERFECT 


PERFECT 


PERFECT 


PERFECT 


1 have had, etc. 


/ had had, etc. 


I had had, etc. 


/ shall have hadf 
etc. 


ho avuto - - 


aveva avuto 


ebbi avuto 


avro avuto 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


Imperative 


Subjunctive 


Past Future 


Have, etc. 


PRESENT 


PAST 


/ should have, 




/ have, etc. 


/ had, etc. 


etc. 




abbia 


avessi 


avrei 


abbi 


ibbi or abbia 


avessi 


avresti 




abbia 


avesse 


avrebbe 


abbiamo 


abbiamo 


avessimo 


avremmo 


abbiate 


abbiate 


aveste 


avreste 




Sbbiano 


avessero 


avrebbero 




PRESENT 


PAST 


past future 




PERFECT 


PERFECT 


PERFECT 




/ have had, etc. 


/ had had, etc. 


/ should have 
had, etc. 




khhia avuto 


avessi avuto 


avrei avuto 




etc. 


etc. 


etc. 



AUXILIARY VERBS 47 

54. 1. The auxiliary of the passive is essere, to be. 
U esercito fu sconfitto. The army was defeated. 

2. The future {shall, will) and the past future or condi- 
tional (should, would) are formed in Italian without any 
auxiliary. 

lo andro ed egli verra. / shall go, and he vrill come. 

Vorrei vederlo. / should like to see him. 

3. The auxiliary of the perfect, past perfect, second past 
perfect, and future perfect tenses is avere, to have, if the 
verb be active and transitive. 

If the verb be passive, reflexive, or reciprocal, the auxiliary 
is always essere. For the definition of a reflexive verb, see 
47, 2, on p. 36. 

If the verb be intransitive, the auxiliary is generally es- 
sere, but sometimes avere. ^ 

Ho parlato. / have spoken. 

Avevano fatto queste cose. They had done these things. 

Mi sono fatto m^le. / have hurt myself. 

Le donne si erano sbaglidte. The women had made a mistake. 

Saro venuto. / shall have come. 

E nevicato. It has snowed. 

Aveva viaggiato. He had traveled. 

(a) A past participle used with the auxiliary essere must agree 
with its subject in gender and number. 

La ragd,zza ^ tom^ta. The girl has returned. 

Le donne si sono disput^te. The women have disputed. 

But when the verb has a reflexive pronoun as indirect object, and 
some other word as direct object, the past participle may agree with 
the subject, or with the direct object, or remain invariable. 

La sorella si e Mtta mdle. Our sister has hurt herself. 

Ci sidmo fatti onore. We have done ourselves credit. 

Ci siamo ddta {or dato) parola We havf. pledged our word of honor. 
d' onore. 

1 The use of avere with intransitive verbs must be learned by practice. 



48 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

(6) A past participle used with avere may or may not agree 
with its direct object, according to the choice of the writer. It 
usually does not agree when the object follows; and it nearly al- 
ways does agree when the object is a personal pronoun preceding 
the verb. 

La birra che aveva beviito (or The beer he had drunk. 

bevuta). 

Ho veduto molte cose. / have seen many things. 

Li ho trovdti. / have found them. 

(c) To be, expressing a state or condition, is often rendered by 
stare (92, 4), instead of essere. Stare per or essere per (followed 
by the infinitive) means to be on the point of. 

Sto bene. Fm well. 

C6me sta? How are you f 

Stava per uscire. / was jv^t going out. 

(d) Enghsh am (or was) -hthe present participle, when express- 
ing duration, is rendered either by the simple present (or past de- 
scriptive) or by the same tense of stare i+the present participle; 
when denoting futurity, it is translated by the future (or past 
future), sometimes by the present (or past descriptive). 

Camminava. He was walking. 

State lavord,ndo. You are working. 

Leggevano or stavano leggendo. They were reading. 

Medito or sto meditd-ndo. / am meditating. 

Dice che verra (or viene). He says he is coming. 

DIsse che verrebbe. He said he was coming. 

(e) A verb with the auxihary used to (or would = used to) is 
translated either by the simple past descriptive, or by the infini- 
tive with solere, to be accustomed (92, 14). 

Vi andava (or soleva andare) He used to go (or would go) there 
6gni sera. every evening. 

(/) Venire, to come (92, 166), and rimanere, to remain (92, 16), 
are sometimes used as auxiliaries in the simple tenses of the passive, 

1 Andare (92, 1) and venire (92, 166) are sometimes used instead of stare. 



AUXILIARY VERBS 49 

instead of essere. Andare, to go (92, 1), is similarly used, but 
always implying duty or obligation. 

I ladri vennero arrestati. The thieves were arrested. 
Rimase sorpresa. She was surprised. 

II fucile non va toccato. The gun mustn't be touched. 

(g) The English auxihary do is not expressed in Italian. 
Non viene. He does not come. 

(h) To have a thing done is far fare una cosa (92, 2). 
II re lo fece ammazzd,re. The king had him killed. 

55. The third person of the passive is very often replaced 
by the reflexive construction with si: 

Si racconta. It is related. 

Questo libro si legge. This book is read. 

La spada che mi si diede. The sword that was given me. 

Quelle cose si facevano. Those things were done. 

Many writers always make the verb agree with its sub- 
ject in number; but in popular speech the verb is nearly 
always in the singular when its subject follows (as if si were 
the subject of the verb, and the original subject were the 
object) : 

Si vedono (or vede) moltis- Many things are seen. 

sime cose. 
Non si puo (or possono) leg- These books can't be read. 

gere questi llbri. 

Si belonging to a dependent infinitive regularly goes with 
the main verb (see 48, a). 

The construction with si is generally used also to render 
the English indefinite they followed by a verb: as si dice, 
they say. In this sense it is employed with neuter as well as 
with transitive verbs: as si va spesso, people often go. See 
also 63, a. In this construction an object pronoun may 
precede si : as lo si fa, it is done. 



50 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



56. Following are synopses of the compound tenses of 
transitive, neuter, reflexive, and passive verbs. In the para- 
digms given henceforth these forms will be omitted. 

(a) Following is a synopsis of the compound tenses of trovfire, 
to find, and venire, to come: 

avere trov^to, to have found. 
avendo trovd,to, having found. 
ho trovato, / have found. 
aveva trovato, / had found. 
ebbi trovato, / had found. 
avro trovjito, / shall have found. 
avrei trovato, I should have found. 
dbbia trovato, I have found. 
avessi trovato, / had found. 

(b) Following is a synopsis of the compound tenses of alz^si, 
(to raise one's self), to get up, and andarsene,i to go away. 

Infinitive: past 
Participle: past 
Indicative: pres. perf. 
PAST perfect 

SECOND past perfect 

future perfect 
Past Future: perfect 
Subjunctive: pres. perf. 

PAST perfect 



^ssersi alzato 
essendosi alzato 
mi sono alzato 
mi era alzato 
mi fui alzd^to 
mi saro alzato 
mi sarei alzato 
mi sla alzato 
mi fossi alzato 



essere vemito, to have come. 
essendo venuto, having come. 
sono venuto, / have come. 
^ra venuto, / had come. 
fui venuto, / had come. 
saro venuto, / shall have come. 
sarei vemito, I should have come. 
sla venuto, / have come. 
venuto, / had come. 



essersene anddto 
essendosene anddto 
me ne sono and^to 
me ne era andato 
me ne fui andato 
me ne saro andato 
me ne sarei andato 
me ne sia anddto 
me ne fossi anddto 



(c) Following is a synopsis of the entire passive of amare, to love: 



Infinitive: present 

PAST 

Participle: present 

PAST 

Indicative: present 
present perfect 
past descriptive 
past perfect 
past absolute 
second past perfect 



Essere am^to, to be loved. 

essere st^to amd,to, to have been loved. 

essendo amdto, being loved. 

essendo stdto amato, having been loved. 

s6no amdto, / am loved. 

s6no stdto am^to, / have been loved. 

era amd,to, I was loved. 

era stato am^to, / had been loved. 

fui amato, / was loved. 

fui stato amato, / had been loved. 



1 Andarsene is composed of the verb andare, to go, the reflexive si, and the adverb 
ne, thence (see 47, a). 



AUXILIARY VERBS 



51 



FUTURE 

future perfect 
Past Future 

PERFECT 

Imperative 

Subjunctive: present 
present perfect 

PAST 

PAST PERFECT 



8ar6 amdto, / shall be loved. 

sard stato amato, / shall have been loved. 

sarei amato, / should be loved. 

sarei std,to am^to, / should have been loved. 

sii amdto, be loved. 

sia amd-to, / be loved. 

sia stato am^to, / have been loved. 

f6ssi amdto, / were loved. 

fossi state amdto, / had been loved. 



57. May, might, can, could are generally rendered by the 
proper tense of potere^; must, ought, shall = must, should = 
ought, by dovere^; will and would expressing volition, by 
vole/e.^ 



Pu6 essere vero. 
Non poteva parMre. 
Deve pagarlo. 
Dovrebbe Mrlo, 
Voglio sapere. 
Non vorrei andd,re. 



It may be true. 

He couldn't speak. 

He must pay him., he shall pay him. 

He ought to do it, he should do it. 

I will know. 

I wouldn't go. 



Note that ought must be expressed by the past future (or con- 
ditional) of dovere. 

Dovremmo parlare. We ought to speak. 

Avrei dovuto fdrlo. / ought to have done it. 

No preposition intervenes between these verbs and the 

dependent infinitive. 

Hdnno potiito dormlre. 
Potremo partlre. 
Dovemmo venire. 
Dovrete trovdrla. 
Vorra tornd,re. 
Vorrei sapere. 



They have been able to sleep. 
We shall be able to start. 
We had to come. 
You will have to find her. 
He will want to return. 
I should like to know. 



These verbs are not defective, like the English modal 
auxiliaries; hence in Italian the tense is expressed by the 

1 See 92, 21, 8, 19. The auxiliary of these verbs is regularly avire; but some writers 
use with them the auxiliary that belongs to the dependent infinitive: as hfinno potuto 
venire or sono potuti venire, they have been able to come. 



52 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

auxiliary itself, and not by the dependent infinitive. To 
find the proper form of potere, dovere, or volere, replace 
may, etc., by the correct tense of to he able; must, etc., by 
to he ohliged; will, etc., by to want or to like: as I could have 
said it=I should have (avrei) been able (potuto) to say it 
(dirlo)=avrei potuto dirlo. 

Avrebbe dovuto tacere. He ought to have kept still. 

Avremmo voluto restore. We would have stayed. 

(a) Mitst is also expressed by the impersonal verb bisognare, to 
he necessary, followed by the infinitive or by che, that, wdth the 
subjunctive. To have to is avere da. 

Bisogna fdrlo. It must be done. 

Bisogna che andi^mo. We must go. 

Ho da scrlvere una lettera. / have to write a letter. 

(b) To be able meaning to know how is sapere (see 92, 6). Not 
to be able to help doing a thing is non peter a meno di non (with 
infinitive) or non peter fare a mene di (with infinitive). 

Non seppe farlo. He couMnH do it. 

Sa leggere e scrivere. He can read and write. 

Non pote a meno di non ridere. He couldn't help laughing. 



REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS 

58. Italian verbs are divided into four conjugations, ac- 
cording as the infinitive ending is -are, accented -ere, un- 
accented -ere (or -rre), or -ire. Regular verbs of the second 
and third conjugations are, however, inflected just alikoo 

(a) The final e of the infinitive may be dropped before any word 
except one beginning with s impure.^ 

1 Cf. 10, 6; 14, h. Italians find it hard to pronounce three consecutive consonants 
of which the middle one is s. 



REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS 



53 



THE REGULAR VERB 

59. Parlare, to speak, will serve as a model for the first 
conjugation. All compound tenses are omitted (see 56) : 

Infinitive and Participles 

parlare parlindo parltto 

Indicative 



PRESENT 


past descriptive 


PAST ABSOLUTE 


FUTURE 


parlo 


parliva 


pariai 


parlerd 


parli 


pariavi 


parmsti 


parlerai 


parla 


pariava 


parld 


parleri 


parliamo 


parlav^mo 


parlammo 


parleremo 


pariate 


parlavate 


parlaste 


parlerete 


parlano 


parlavano 


parlarono 


parler&nno 


Imperative 


Subjunctive 


Past Future 




PRESENT 


PAST 






parU 


parlassi 


parler§i 


parla 


parli 


parlassi 


parleresti 




parU 


parlasse 


parlerdbbe 


parliimo 


parliamo 


parlassimo 


parleremmo 


pariate 


parliate 


parlaste 


parlereste 




parlino 


parlassero 


parlerebbero 



(a) Verbs whose infinitives end in -care or -gare insert h after 
the c or g in all forms where those letters precede e or i: 

P^ghi (pagjire). Let him pay. 

Cerchero (cerc^re). I shall search. 

"Verbs in -ciare and -glare drop the i before e or i: 

Mangi (mangiare) . Thou eatest. 

Comincera^ (comincid,re) . He will begin. 

But all other verbs in -iare drop the i only before another i: 

Picchi (picchiare). Let him strike. 

Pigli (pigliare). Thou takest. 

BUT 

Picchier^, piglierei. He will strike, I should take. 

I Some writers retain the i before e : as comincierft. 



54 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



(6) The verbs giocare, rotdre, sondre generally change o of the 
stem into uo in all forms where that vowel is accented: 



Suoni. 
Giudcano. 



Let him play. 
They play. 



Rinnov^e and tondre may make the same change, 
sometimes used throughout. 



The u is 



60. Verbs of the second and third conjugations^ are in- 
flected like credere, to believe: 

Infinitive and Participles 
credere credendo creduto 







Indicative 




PRESENT PAST DESCRIPTIVE 


past absolute 


FUTURE ' 


credo 


credeva 


credei (credetti) 


crederd 


credi 


credevi 


credesti 


crederai 


crede 


credeva 


crede (credette) 


crederS 


crediamo 


credevamo 


credemmo 


crederemo 


credete 


credevate 


credeste 


crederete 


credono 


credevano 


crederono (credettero) 


crederanno 


Imperative 


Subjunctive 
present past 


Past Future 




creda 


credessi 


crederei 


credi 


ere da 


credessi 


crederesti 




creda 


credesse 


crederebbe 


crediamo 


crediimo credessimo 


crederemmo 


credete 


crediate 


credeste 


credereste 




credano 


credessero 


crederebbero 



The following verbs and their compounds do not have in 
the past absolute the forms in parentheses: 

battere m^scere stridere 



competere 


mietere 


tessere 


convergere 


pascere 


tondere 


divergere 


prudere 




lucere 


ripetere 





* Many grammars and dictionaries class these two together as the "second con- 
jugation.". 



REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS 



55 



Verbs in -cere and -gere insert after the c or g an i before 
the u of the past participle, but not before the o or a of the 
singular or third person plural of the present indicative or 
subjunctive: 

mesciamo, mescete, mescono; 



mescere; 
mesca, etc., 



mesco, mesci, mesce, 
mescano: mesciuto. 



61. Most verbs of the fourth conjugation^ are inflected 
like finire, to finish: 

Infinitive and Participles 
finire finendo finito 

Indicative 



present 


PAST DESCRIPTIVE 


PAST ABSOLUTE 


FUTURE 


finisco 


finiva 


finii 


finiro 


finisci 


finivi 


finisti 


finirai 


finisce 


finiva 


fini 


finira 


finiamo 


finivamo 


finimmo 


finiremo 


finite 


finivate 


finiste 


finirete 


finiscono 


finivano 


finirono 


finiranno 


Imperative 


Subjunctive 


Past Future 




PRESENT 


PAST 






finisca 


finissi 


finirei 


finisci 


finfsca 


finissi 


finiresti 




finisca 


finisse 


finirebbe 


finiamo 


finiamo 


finissimo 


finiremmo 


finite 


finiate 


finiste 


finireste 




finiscano 


finissero 


finirebbero 



Though inflected like finire in all other parts, dormire, 
fuggire,^ pentire, sentire, servire, vestire are always, abor- 
rire, bollire, and verbs in -vertire are generally, and assor- 
bire, inghiottire, mentire, nutrire, tossire are often, in the 
present indicative, imperative, and subjunctive, conjugated 



1 Many grammars and dictionaries call this the "third conjugation. 

2 Fuggire inserts no extra i (see last sentence of 60) . 



56 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

after the model below. Partire and sortire are, when tran- 
sitive, inflected like finire, when intransitive, like sentire.^ 



Indicative 


Imperative 


Subjunctive 


sento 




senta 


senti 


senti 


senta 


sente 




senta 


sentiamo 


sentiimo 


sentiamo 


sentite 


sentite 


sentiate 


sentono 




sentano 



62. The present participle of all verbs is invariable. 
Stavdmo parldndo. We were speaking. 

63. In all conjugations a form of the first person singular 
of the past descriptive ending in -o instead of -a is nearly 
always used in conversation, and occurs often in the works 
of modern authors : 

Leggevo. / was reading. 

(a) In popular speech the first person plural of all tenses is 
generally replaced by the third person singular preceded by si: 

Noi ^Itri si crede. We believe. 

Noi si era veniiti. We had come. 

Ci si decise. We decided (ourselves). 

(b) Final o of the third person plural is frequently omitted: 
Pdrlan di liii. They speak of him. 

rorms in -toio sometimes drop -no: 
Diran tiitto. They will tell everything. 

(c) The past descriptive endings -avamo, -avate, -evSmo, 
-evate, -ivdmo, -ivate are often pronounced -dvamo, -dvate, etc. 

{d) Occasionally, especially in poetry, -at- is omitted from the 
ending of the past participle of the first conjugation: destato = 
desto. 

i Compounds are conjugated like their simple verbs. 



REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS 



57 



THE IRREGULAR VERB 

64. Certain parts of Italian irregular verbs are always 
regular: the example given below will show which they are. 
Essere (see 53, a) is an exception to all rules. 

65. Many irregular verbs that belong or once belonged 
to the third conjugation have the infinitive contracted (fare 
for f acere, dire for dicere, condurre for conducere) : in this 
case the future and past future are formed from this con- 
tracted infinitive (faro, direi, condurrebbe), while the pres- 
ent participle, the past descriptive and past subjunctive, 
and certain persons of the present and past absolute are 
formed from the uncontracted stem (facendo, diceva, con- 
duciamo). 

66. Porre (for ponere), to put, a verb of the third conju- 
gation, will serve to show which are the regular and which 
the irregular parts of irregular verbs: the forms printed in 
boldface are regular in all verbs except dare, dire, essere, 
fare, stare ; those in Roman type may be irregular. 

Infinitive and Participles 
p6rre ponendo p6sto 







Indicative 




present 


PAST DESCRIPTIVE 


PAST absolute 


FUTURE 


pongo 


poneva 




p6si 


porro 


poni 


ponevi 




ponesti^ 


porrdi 


pone 


poneva 




pose 


porra, 


ponidmo 


ponevamo 




ponemmo^ 


porr6mo 


ponete^ 


ponevate 




poneste^ 


porrete 


pongono 


ponevano 
» See 66, 4. 




posero 
2 See 66, 3. 


porrduno 



58 


ITALIA]^ 


GRAMMAR 




Impebativw 


Subjunctive 


Past Future 




PRESENT 


PAST 






ponga 


ponessi* 


porrei 


poni 


ponga 


ponessi 


porresti 




ponga 


ponesse 


porrebbe 


ponidmo 


poniamo 


ponessimo 


porremmo 


ponete 


poniate 


poneste 


porreste 




pongano 


ponessero 


porrebbero 



It will be seen that the present participle, the past de- 
scriptive and past subjunctive, and certain persons of the 
present and past absolute are always regular. 

1. Dare and stare have in the future and past future dar6, 
darei; staro, starei. Otherwise the only irregularity in the future 
and past future is that they are contracted in many verbs even 
when the infinitive is uncontracted : as vedere, to see, vedro; 
venire, to come, verrei. 

2. From the first person singular of the past absolute the other 
irregular persons can be constructed, the third person singular by 
changing the ending -i to -e, the third person plural by adding 
-ro to the third person singular.^ 

3. The regular persons of the past absolute and the whole past 
subjunctive are sUghtly irregular in dare and stare, which substi- 
tute e for a in those forms (desti, demmo, deste, dessi; stesti, 
stemino, steste, stessi). 

4. Dire (for dicere) and fare (for facere) have dite and fate in 
the second person plural of the present indicative. 



(a) Verbs whose stem ends in -1, -n, or -r often drop final e or 
i in the singular of the present indicative and imperative: 

Non vuol andare. 
Vien qui. 

See also 63, a, h, c. 



He will not go. 
Come here. 



1 See 66, 3. 

2 This rule applies only to an irregular past absolute. 



REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS 59 

(6) The three forms of the imperative are exactly hkc the cor- 
responding persons of the present indicative, except in avere, sa- 
pere, and volere, where they follow the subjunctive: 

abbi abbiamo abbiate 

sappi sappiamo sappiate 

vogli vogliamo vogliate 

and in andare, dare, dire, fare, and stare, which have in the 
singular va*, da', di', fa', sta'. 

(c) The third person plural of the present indicative can always 
be constructed from the first person singular, from which can be 
formed also the whole present subjunctive except the first and 
second persons plural: these* can be made from the first person 
plural of the present indicative. 

Exceptions to this rule are andare, avere, dare, fare, sapere, and 
stare, which have in the third person plural of the present indicative 
vanno, hanno, danno, fanno, sanno, stanno; while avere, dare, sapere, 
and stare, have in the present subjunctive abbia, dia, sappia, stia. 

67. With the aid of the above notes any verb except 
essere can be constructed from the infinitive, the partici- 
ples (the present participle often being necessary to show 
the uncontracted form of the infinitive), the present indica- 
tive, and the first person singular of the past absolute and 
future. A list of irregular verbs begins on page 80. 

(a) In general, compound verbs not differing in conjugation 
from their simple verbs will be omitted from this list. All com- 
pounds of dare and fare are accented on the same syllable as the 
simple verbs: 

Fa. He does. Disfa. He undoes. 

The compounds of stare demand special mention: ristare, so- 
prastare, sottostare, sovrastare are inflected hke stare (rista, so- 
prastetti, sottostiano) ; distare has no present participle, is regular 
in the present of all moods (disto, etc.), but otherwise is inflected 



60 ITALIAJSr GRAMMAR 

like stare (distetti, etc.); constare, contrastare, instare, ostare, 
prestare, restare, sostare are regular throughout (consta, contra- 
stano, instai, ostarono, prestero, resti, sostassi). 

68. In old Italian and in poetry both regular and irreg- 
ular verbs differ in many ways from the normal types: 
some of the commonest variations are given below. 

(a) In the first and third persons singular and the third person 
plural of the past descriptive v is often dropped, but never in 
the first conjugation: voleva=volea (also volia); fiiiivano=finiano. 
Some of these forms are not uncommon in modern prose. 

(b) The past future endings -ei, -ebbe, -ebbero are generally 
replaced in poetry by -ia, -ia, -lano: crederei=crederia. 

(c) The future endings -o, -dnno are sometimes replaced by 
-aggio or -abbo, -aggiono or -abbono: amer6=ameraggio; ame- 
ranno = amerabbono. 

(d) In the third person plural of the past absolute -no or -ono 
is often dropped: ainarono=amaro or amar (also amomo, amonno). 
In the tliird person singular we find amao, credeo, sentio. 

(e) Final -ero is often replaced by -ono: avrebbero=avrebbono. 

(/) In the first person plural final o is often dropped, and then 
the m sometimes becomes n: andiaino=andiam or andian, 

(g) In the first person plural of the present indicative of the 
second and third conjugations -iamo may be replaced by -emo. 

(h) Final -iano, wherever it occurs (also -eano in the imperfect), 
may be replaced by -ieno or -ieno: avevano=avieno. 

(0 At the end of a word we often find e for i, sometimes i for e: 
pensi = pense ; ascoltate = ascoltati. 

(j) E is sometimes added to a word ending in an accented vowel: 
am6=am6e. 



MOODS AND TENSES 



61 



MOODS AND TENSES 



69. The English gerund in -4ng used as subject, predicate 
nominative, or direct object of a verb must be rendered in 
Italian by the infinitive, nearly always preceded by the def- 
inite article. 



Mi pid,ce il viaggiare. 
Rifarsela cogli anim^li e da 

sciocchi. 
La nostra prima cura fu il 

cercare una pensione. 
Odio lo studiare. 



/ like traveling. 

Taking vengeance on animals is 

folly. 
Our first care was hunting up a 

hoarding house. 
I hate studying. 



70. The English gerund preceded by a preposition is 
translated as follows : 

1. If the preposition is a necessary part of the thought, it is 
expressed in Italian, and the English gerund is rendered by the 
infinitive with the definite article. This article is, however, omitted 
(unless it would be used in English) after the following preposi- 
tions : 



di, of. invece di, 

dopo di, after. prima di, 

Oltre il fare scarabocchi scrive 

male. 
Parlai contra il trarre litile di qu61- 

la disgrazia. 
II vizio di fumare. 
Ho r abitudine di coricanni tardi. 

Invece di dirmi tiitto. 
Prima di morire. 
Parliamo senza riflettere. 



instead of. senza, without, 

before. 

Besides making blots he writes 

badly. 
I spoke against utilizing that 77iis' 

fortune. 
The habit of smoking. 
I am in the habit of going to bed 

late. 
Instead of telling me everything. 
Before dying. 
We speak without thinking. 



2. If in English the omission of the preposition, although it 
made the construction awkward, would not essentially change the 



62 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

meaning, the phrase is rendered in ItaUan by the present participle 
without any preposition. 

Studiando si impara. {Through) studying we learn. 

Dovrei corrispondere alia sua / ought to acknowledge her courtesy 

cortesia ascoltandola. (Joy) listening to her. 

Partendo incontro un amico. (On) going away he met a friend. 

Copiando non fa errori. {In) copying he makes no^mistakes. 

3. To amuse one's self by . . . and to weary one's self by . . . are 
divertirsi a . . . and afifannarsi a . . . -^dth the infinitive: 
Si diverte a tirar sassi. He amuses himself throwing stones. 

Some other verbs often take this construction. 

71. Following are some other rules for the use of the in- 
finitive and participles: 

(a) When any verb is used as an auxiUary, the mood and tense 
are expressed in that verb, and not in the dependent infinitive 
(see 57). 

Avrei potuto farlo. / could have done it. 

(b) After fare, to make or to have {=to cause), sentire and udire, 
to hear, and vedere, to see, the Itahan present infinitive is used to 
render an Enghsh past participle. After lasci^e, to let, and often 
after the preposition da an Itahan active infinitive is used to trans- 
late a passive one in Enghsh. 

Si fa capire. He makes himself understood. 

Faro fare un paio di scdrpe. / shall have a -pair of shoes mxide. 

L' ho sentito dire. / have heard it said. 

Lo vide ammazzare. He saw him killed. 

Si lascia ingannare. He lets himself be deceived. 

Non c' e niente da fare. There is nothing to be done. 

(c) The Italian past participle is inflected hke any other adjec- 
tive. The present participle (which was originally an ablative 
gerund) is invariable. 

When in Enghsh the present participle is used adjectively, 
without any verbal force whatsoever, it is translated, not by the 



MOODS AND TENSES 63 

form we have called the participle, but by a verbal adjective, 
which can be formed from almost any Itahan verb by changing 
the infinitive ending into -ante for the first conjugation, and into 
-ente for the others. This adjective may be used substantively. 
It was originally a present participle, and some Itahan writers 
have used it as such. 

Questi v^si sono rotti. These vases are broken. 

La donna sta cucendo. The woman is sewing. 

Std,vano parMndo. They were speaking. 

Un anim^le parlante. A speaking animal. 

Acqua bollente. Boiling water. 

Due amanti. Tvjo lovers. 

(d) A whole conditional clause (or protasis) is often replaced in 
Itahan by a present participle, or by an infinitive with a. 

Andandovi lo vedrebbe. // he went there, he would see it. 

A bucarsi esce il sdngue. // you prick yourself, blood comes. 

(e) Writers sometimes use, instead of a clause in indirect dis- 
course, an infinitive followed by the word that would have been 
subject of the clause. 

Disse essere questo V uomo He said this was the man we were 
che cercavd,mo. looking for. 

72. In negative commands the infinitive is always used 
'nstead of the second person singular of the imperative. 

Trovalo. Find it. 

Non lo trovare. Do not find it. 

But the negative of trovatelo is non lo trovate. 

73. When an action is represented as having taken place 

and still continuing, the English uses the present perfect 

or past perfect tense, the Italian the present or the past 

descriptive. 

Studio 1' italidno da 6tto / have studied Italian for eight 

mesi. months. 



64 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

74. In subordinate clauses referring to the future and in- 
troduced by a conjunction of time, where the present is 
often used in English, the future tense must be employed in 
Italian. 

\ Qudndo vi andr6, glielo diro. When I go there, Fll tell him. 

(a) The future is often used, without any idea of future time, to 
express probability. 

Sara uscito. He has probably gone out. 

Avra m61to dend,ro. He probably has a great deal of 

money. 

75. The difference between the past descriptive (or im- 
perfect) and the past absolute (or preterit) is this: the 
latter is used of an event that occurred at a definite date in 
the past, the former is used in a description or in speaking 
of an accessory circumstance or an habitual action in past 
time — the preterit is a narrative, the imperfect a descrip- 
tive tense. 

The second past perfect (or preterit perfect) is used — 
instead of the past perfect (or pluperfect) — only after con- 
junctions meaning as soon as (appena che, subito che, tosto 
che), and sometimes after quando, when, or dope che, after, 
when immediate sequence is denoted.^ 

Entrd mentre dormivamo. He came in while we slept. 

Facevo cosi 6gni mattina. / did so every morning. 

Lo fece 1' anno scorso. He did it last year. 

Tosto che 1' ebbe visto, usci. As soon as he had seen it, he went. 

(a) In conversation the present perfect is often used instead of 
the past absolute, when the event is not remote. This use is, 
however, far more restricted than it is in French. 

Vi sono andato ieri. / went there yesterday. 

1 It is used also in phrases like: in cinque minuti ebbe finita la lettera, in five min- 
utes he had the letter finished. 



MOODS AND TENSES 65 

76. The past future (or conditional), like the English 
should and would, has two uses: in indirect discourse after a 
principal verb in a past tense it expresses the tense which in 
direct discourse would be future^; in the conclusion of a 
conditional sentence it is used when the conditional clause 
is (or, if expressed, would be) in the past subjunctive (see 
77). 

DIsse che lo farebbe. He said he would do it. 

Se f6sse vero lo crederei. // it were true, I should believe it. 

Questa casa mi converrebbe. This house would suit me. 



77. When a condition is contrary to present fact, or con- 
sists of a more or less unlikely supposition referring to future 
time,^ the conditional clause has the past (or imperfect) 
subjunctive, the conclusional clause has the past future (or 
conditional) . 

If the unreal condition refers to past time, the conditional 
clause has the past perfect subjunctive, the conclusional 
clause has the past future perfect.^ 

Otherwise both condition and conclusion are in the in- 
dicative. 

Se r avessi te lo darei. If I had it, I should give it thee. 

Se fosse tomato Tavreiveduto. // he had returned, I should have 

seen him. 

Se venisse noi ce ne andremmo. // he came, we should go. 

Se vi andassi morrei. // / should go there, I should die. 

Se non e vero e ben trovdto. // it isn't true, it's a good invention. 

Se lo fece sara punlto. // he did it, he will be punished. 

1 The perfect of the future or the conditional is sometimes used where the simple 
tense would be expected: disse che non 1' avrebbe fatto piu, he said he would do it no 
more. 

2 Rendered in English by the past, or by the auxiliary should. 

3 The imperfect indicative is occasionally used to replace the past or past perfect 
subjunctive of the condition (or protasis) and the past future or past future perfect 
of the conclusion (or apodosis) : as se veniva, mi diceva tutto, if he had come, he would 
have told me everything. 



66 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

(a) The missing persons of the imperative are supplied from 
the present subjunctive. The past subjunctive is used to express 
a wish that is not likely to be reaUzed. 

Si accomodi. Be seated (sing.). 

Stiano zitti. Be quiet (plur.). 

Sia pure. Be it so. 

Vengano siibito. Let them come at once. 

Fosse piire! Would it were so ! 

(b) When a relative clause restricts its antecedent to one of all 
its possible conditions or actions, the verb of that relative clause 
is in the subjunctive, — the present subjunctive if the verb on 
which it depends be present or future, the past if it be past or past 
future. 

Non c' e animdle piu bellino There is no animal prettier than a 

d' un gatto giovane che fac- kitten that is at play. 

cia il chiasso. 

Dove troverete un giovine che Where mil you find a young man 

sposi voi? who will marry you ? 

Vorrei vedere un bel quadro / should like to see a fine picture 

che non fosse antico. that is not old. 

(c) The verb of a subordinate clause depending on an imper- 
sonal verb, on a superlative, or on one of the words first, last, and 
only, is in the subjunctive. This rule does not apply to reflexive 
verbs, nor to aflfirmative phrases meaning it is true or it is because. 

Bisogno ch' lo vi andassi. / had to go there. 

E giusto che siano puniti. Ws right they should he punished. 

II piu belle ch' io conosca. The finest that I know. 

Si vede che non e cosi. You see it isn't so. 

E vero che ci sono stato. It's true that I've been there. 

(d) The subjunctive is used after all conjunctions meaning al- 
though, as if, unless, provided that, in order that, in such a way that 
(denoting purpose), before, until (referring to future), whenever, 
wherever, without. 

Benche stia nasc6sto, lo tro- Although he be hidden, I shall find 

vero, doviinque sia. him, wherever he is. 

Partiro a meno che egli non / shall go unless he comes. 
venga. 



MOODS AND TENSES 



67 



Lo fece perclie lo venissi. 
La divise in modo che le due 

parti fossero iigudli. 
Aspetta finche lo torni. 
Pdrti senza che ti veda. 



He did it that I might come. 

He divided it in such a way that 

the two parts should he equal. 
Wait until I return. 
Go without his seeing you. 



(e) The subjunctive is used after the indefinite words and 
phrases quale che, qualunque, chiunque, checche, per quanto. 

Chiunqiie venga. Whoever comes. 

Qualunque disgrjlzia che sue- Whatever misfortune happens. 

ceda. 

Per quante volte ci vada. However many times I go there. 

Per quanto ricco egli sia. However rich he may he. 

(/) The verb of an indirect question is nearly always in the 
subjunctive when it depends on a main verb in a past tense. ^ 



Domdndano se il re e morto. 
Domando se il pddre fosse 
uscito. 



They ask whether the king is dead. 
He asked whether his father was 
out. 



(g) In a clause dependent on a verb of saying the subjunctive 
is used if the main verb is negative, or interrogative, or in a 
past tense. 1 

It is generally not used, however, after an affirmative verb in a 
past tense when the author himself wishes to imply that the indi- 
rect statement is true. 



Dice che la cosa e chiarissima. 

Non dico che questo sia vero. 

Dissero che lo zio fosse amma- 
Mto. 

Gli dissi che mi chiamava En- 
rico. 



He says the thing is perfectly clear. 
I don't say this is true. 
They said their uncle was ill. 

I told him my name was Henry. 



(h) The subjunctive is used after verbs expressing causation, 
concession, desire, emotion, prevention, and uncertainty: i.e., after 
verbs of bringing about; granting, permitting; commanding, hop- 
ing, requesting, wishing; fearing, regretting, rejoicing; forbidding, 
hindering; being ignorant, denying, disbeheving, doubting, expect- 



1 The term past tense includes the past future. 



68 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



ing, pretending, supposing, suspecting, thinking. 
hope, very often does not take the subjunctive. 



But sperdre, to 



Non so chi siano. 
Vorrei che non fosse accaduto. 
Supponiamo che sia provato. 
Spero che verr^. 



/ don't know who they are. 
I wish it had not happened. 
Let us suppose that it is proved. 
I hope he will come. 



(i) Se, if, is occasionally omitted before a past subjunctive; in 
this case the subject, if expressed, must follow the verb. 

Sarei felice venisse egli. / should be happy, should he come. 



CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, AND ADVERBS 
CONJUNCTIONS 
78. The principal conjunctions are: 



after, dopo che, 

also, anche, pure. 

although, . benche, sebbene, non 

ostante che. 
and, e. 

as, come, quanto (after tanto). 
as ( = since), siccome, poiche. 
as fast as, via via che. 
as if, come se, quasi. 
as long as, finche. 
as well as, come anco. 
because, perche. 
before, prima che, avanti che. 
both . . . and, e . . . e. 
but, ma. 

either ... or, o ... o. 
even if, anche se, ancorche. 
except that, se non che. 
for, che. 

granting that, dato che. 
however {= nevertheless), per6, 

pure. 



however (before an adj.), qualtin- 

que, per quanto. 
if, se (occasionally quando, ove). 
in case, caso. 
in order that, perche, accioche, 

afhnche. 
much less, non che. 
neither . . . nor, ne . . . ne. 
nevertheless, tuttavia, nondimeno, 

pero. 
nor, ne, nemmeno, neppure. 
nor . . . either, nemmeno, neppure. 
nor even, neanche, neppure. 
not to say . . . but even, non che . . . 

ma. 
or, o, owero, ossia. 
or else, ossia. 
provided that, purche. 
rather, anzi. 

since (temporal), dacche. 
since (causal), poiche, siccome. 
so, dunque, adunque. 



CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, AND ADVERBS 



69 



so that (result), di modo che, sic- 

che. 
so that (=in order that), perche. 
than, che. 
that, che. 

that (=in order that), perche. 
then, dunque. 
therefore, dunque, pero, percid, 

adunque (at the beginning of a 

clause). 



too, pure, anche. 

unU'Hs, a. meno che non, eccetto 

che non, senza che. 
until, finche non. 
when, quando. 
whence, donde. 
where, dove, ove, la dove. 
wherever, dovunque. 
whether, se. 
while, mentre, mentre che. 



The final vowel of anche, che, dove, neppure, and ove is 
generally elided before e or i. 

(a) Of the above conjunctions the following require the sub- 
junctive: 

accioche come se prima che 

affinche dato che purche 

a meno che non dovunque qualunque 

ancorche eccetto che non quasi 

avanti che non ostante che sebbene 

benche perche meaning in order that senza che 

caso per quanto 

For the use of che, that, with the subjunctive, see 77, c, g, h. 
Come is occasionally used for come se, and then it takes the sub- 
junctive. Finche when referring to the future sometimes has the 
sense of finche non, and then it generally takes the subjunctive. 
Se is followed by the subjunctive when it introduces an indirect 
question or statement dependent on a verb in a past tense, or a 
condition contrary to fact. Quando and ove, meaning if, fre- 
quently take the subjunctive when se would not. — For examples, 
see 77, c, d, f, g, h. 

(b) Che cannot be omitted in Itahan as that is in English:^ 
Disse che fosse v6ro. He said it was true. 

Se can be omitted before an imperfect subjunctive (see 77, i). 

1 It is omitted, however, in the following peculiarly Italian construction: il ragazzo 
pareva fosse felice, the boy seemed to be happy; that is, between a verb of seeming and 
the subjunctive dependent on it, when in English the construction would be a verb 
of seeming with a dependent infinitive. It is occasionally omitted also after verbs of 
wishing, hoping, and fearing: as spero mi scriva presto, / hope you will write to me soon. 



70 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



(c) E and o are often -^Titten ed and od before a vowel. 
MIo pjidre ed lo. My father and I . 

{d) Between a verb of motion and an infinitive and is rendered 
by the preposition a. 
Andro a cercd,rlo. Fll go and look for it. 

(e) When anche, also or too, relates to a personal pronoun, the 
disjunctive form of that pronoun must follow anche, even if some 
form of the same pronoun has already been expressed. 



Andremo dnche noi. 

Parte anch' egli, 

Trovai anche lui. 

Vennero anch' essi. 

Lo or me lo diede anche a me. 

Ti piace anche a te. 



We shall go too. 
He goes away too. 
I found him too. 
They came too. 
He gave it to me too. 
You like it too. 



PREPOSITIONS 



79. The principal prepositions are : 



about ( = approximately), circa. 
about { = around), intomo a, at- 

tomo a. 
above, sopra. 
according to, secondo. 
after, dopo, dopo di. 
against, contra, contro. 
along, lungo. 
among, fra, tra. 
around, intomo a, attomo a. 
as far as, fino a, sino a. 
as for, per, quanto a, in quanto a. 
as to, rispetto a. 
at, a. 

becausQ of, per motive di. 
before (time), prima di, innanzi. 
before (place), davanti a, innanzi. 
behind, dietro. 
below, sotto. 



beside (place), accanto a. 

besides, beside ( = in addition to), 

oltre. 
between, fra, tra. 
beyond, oltre, al di la di. 
by, da, accanto a ( = beside) . 
by means of, per mezzo di. 
during, durante. 
except, tranne, eccetto, fuori di. 
from, da, fin da. 
in, in. 

in front of, davanti a, innanzi. 
inside of, dentro di. 
instead of, invece di. 
in the midst of, in mezzo a. 
into, in. 
near, vicino a. 
of, di. 
on, su (before a vowel, sur), s6pra. 



CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, AND ADVERBS 



71 



through, per. 
under, sotto. 
upon, su (before vowels, sur), s6- 

pra. 
u-p to, fine a, sino a. 
with, con. 
within, fra, tra. 

within (= inside of), dentro di. 
without, senza. 
without { = outside of), fuori di. 



on this side of, al di qua di. 

on to, su (before vowels, sur), s6- 

pra. 
opposite, dirimpetto a. 
out of, da, di, fuori di. 
outside of, fuori di- 
over, sopra. 

round and round, tomo tomo a. 
since, da. 
^0, a. 
toward, verso. 

When governing a personal pronoun contra, dietro, dope, 
senza, sopra, sotto, and often fra and verso take di after 
them: 

senza di me, without me. fra di 16ro, among themselves. 

After con, in, per, a word beginning with s impure gen- 
erally prefixes i:^ 

la strdda, the street. in istrdda, in the street. 

(a) To before the name of a country, after a verb of motion, 
is in. 

Andidmo in Francia. Let us go to France. 

{b) To before an infinitive is rendered in ItaUan as follows: 

1. After the verbs 

fare, make 
lasciare, let 
parere, seem 
potere, can, be able 
sapere, know 

to before a following infinitive is omitted. It is omitted also in 
exclamations and indirect questions consisting only of an interrog- 
ative and an infinitive. 



bastare, suffice 
bisognare, need 
convenire, suit 
desiderare, desire 
dovere, must, ought 



sentire, hear, feel 
solere, be accustomed 
udire, hear 
vedere, see 
volere, wish 



Dovrei capire. 
Bisogna pensarci. 
Potremo venire. 
Non sa che fare ne dove awol- 
gersi. 



/ ought to understand. 
It is necessary to look out for it. 
We shall be able to come. 
He doesn't know what to do nor 
where to turn. 



Cf. 68, a. 



72 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

' 2. A fter verbs of accustoming, attaining, beginning, compelling, 
continuing, hastening, helping, inviting, learning, preparing, teach- 
ing, and after verbs of motion, to before a following infinitive is a. 

Andranno a vederla. They will go to see her. 

Si affrettd a risp6ndere.T He hastened to reply. 

3. After all other verbs it is di; but to denoting purpose or result 
is per, and to indicating duty or necessity is da. 

Gli dissi di scrivere. / told him to write. 

Mi e grato di dirlo. I am happy to say so. 

Legge per divertirsi. He reads to amuse himself. 

E troppo basso per arrivdrci. He's too short to reach it. 

Ho qualchecosa da fare. / have something to do. 

(c) By denoting the agent is da. 

Fu fatto da liii. It was done by him. 

(d) 7n is in; but when expressing future time it is fra. 

Fra tre giorni sara finite. In three days it will be finished. 

(e) For is per : as 1' ha fatto per me, he has done it for me. But, 
in the sense of since, in speaking of past time, for is da. For 
meaning during is omitted or translated durante. Sentences hke 
it is right for him to do it must be translated by che with the sub- 
junctive: e giusto che lo faccia. 

Dimora da m61ti dnni a Firenze. He has lived for many years at 

Florence (see 73). 
Resterd cinque settimd,ne. I shall stay for five weeks. 

Piowe durante un mese. It rained for a month. 

' Bisogna ch' lo vdda. It is necessary for me to go. 

(/) From is da; but before adverbs and sometimes after verbs 
of departing it is di. In speaking of time it is generally fin da. 

Arriva da Parigi. He arrives from Paris. 

E lontano di qua. It is far from here. 

Esco di cdsa. / go out of the house. 

Fin dal principio. From the beginning. 

(g) Da has, in addition to the meanings by, from, since, another 
sense hard to render in English: it may be translated as, charac- 



CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, AND ADVERBS 73 

tenstic of, destined for, such as to, or suited to, according to the 
context. Da means also at the house of or to the house of. Da 
corresponds to English on, at, or to before the word side, parte, 
used in its hteral sense. 

Prometto da uomo d' on6re. / promise as a man of honor. 

II Salvini da Otello. Salvini as Othello. 

Sar^ste tdnto buono da venire? Would you be so good as to come ? 

Questo e da sciocchi. This is acting like a fool. 

II bambino ha un giudizio da The child has the judgment of a 

grande. grown person. 

La sdla da prdnzo. The dining-room. 

Una tazza da caffe. A coffee-cup. 

L' ho veduto dal Sign6r Neri. / saw him at Mr._Jler£^ 

Viene da me. He comes to my house. 

Da questa parte. On this side. 

(h) A is often used before a noun — not indicating material 
(which is expressed by di) nor purpose (expressed by da) — that 
describes another noun, when in EngUsh these two substantives 
would form a compound word. 

Una m^cchina a vap6re. A steam-engine. 

Una sedia a dondolo. A rocking-chair. 

Uno sgabello a tre piedi. A three-legged stool. 

(i) l)ssere per or stare per means to be about to. 
Std,va per parMre. He was on the point of speaking. 

(j) In some idiomatic phrases di is used in Italian when another 
preposition would be employed in English. 

Di giorno, di notte. By day, by night. 

Essere contento di una cosa. To be satisfied with a thing. 

Vivo di pdne. / live on bread. 

Che f aceva delle forbici? What did he do with the scissors f 



ADVERBS 

80. 1. Adverbs, unless they begin the clause, are gen- 
erally placed immediately after the verb; non, however, 
always precedes the verb. When a compound tense is 



74 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

used, the adveib nearly always follows the past participle, 

but gia, mai, piu, and sempre usually precede it. See also 84. 

Non precedes a conjunctive and follows a disjunctive 

pronoun. 

Non ci v^do mai. / never go there. 

Ho parldto spesso. / have often spoken. 

Non ha sempre parldto cosi. He hasn't always talked so. 

lo non lo vedo. / don't see him. 

2. Adverbs are compared like adjectives (see 31); but 
better, worse, more, less are respectively mdglio, peggio, piu, 
meno. 

81. Yes is si or gia : si when it expresses real affirmation, 
gia when it denotes passive assent. No is no. Not is non, 
after which a word beginning with s impure generally pre- 
fixes i. Or not at the end of a clause is o no : 

Le pi^ce? — Si. Do you like it f — Yes. 

Che tempaccio! — Gia. What nasty weather! — Yes. 

Sta bene? — No. Is he well? — No. 

Non ista bene. He isn't well. 

Sia vero o no. Whether it be true or not. 

{a) What? meaning what do you sayf is come? Che and the 
interjection o are often used to introduce questions. 

perche non rispondete? — Why don't you answer? — What? 
Come? — Che siete sordo, — Are you deaf, sir f 
signore? 

(6) Very is molto (see, however, 35, a). Instead of using a 
word or suffix for very, the Italians often repeat the emphasized 
adjective or adverb. 

E molto bello or e bellissimo. It is very beautiful. 

1 suoi genitori erano poveri His parents were very poor. 
poveri. 

82. Only may be translated by the adverb solo, soltanto, 
or solamente; or by the adjective solo. When it modifies 



CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, AND ADVERBS 75 



anything but a verb, it is often rendered by non . . . che, 
with the whole verb intervening, and with the word modi- 
fied by only immediately after che. 

Non ne ho comprdto che diie. / have bought only two of them. 

83. Never is non . . . mai, with the inflected part of the 
verb intervening. Just, as an adverb of time, is or ora. • 
Early is presto, per tempo, or di buon* ora. This morning is 
stamane ; last night is stanotte. The day after to-morrow and 
the day before yesterday are respectively doman V altro and 
ier V altro. A week, a fortnight from to-day are oggi a otto, 
a quindici. Ago is translated by fa, which follows the sub- 
stantive of time; if this substantive is plural, ago may be 
rendered also by sono (erano or saranno if the date from 
which time is counted be past or future). 

Non ti ha mai vediito. He has never seen thee. 

Son arrivd,ti or ora. They have just arrived, j 

Tre dnni fa. Three years ago. 

Quattro gi6rni sono. Four days ago. 

Lunedi erano due settimdne. Two weeks ago Monday. 

Domdni saranno cinque mesi. Five months ago to-morrow. 

84. Here and there, when they denote a place already 
mentioned, and no particular stress is laid upon them, are 
ci and vi, which are often used hi Italian when they would 
be superfluous in English; there is, there are, etc., are c* e or 
vi e, ci sono or vi sono, etc. (sometimes vi ha). Ci, vi, and 
also ne, thence, occupy the same positions with regard to 
the verb, and undergo the same changes, as the pronouns 
ci, vi, ne (48, 50); they precede conjunctive pronouns be- 
ginning with 1 or n, and follow all others: ce lo manda, ti ci 
mando. 

When emphasized, here is qui or qua, there indicating a 
place near the person addressed is cost! or costa, and there 



76 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

denoting a point remote from both speaker and hearer is 1! 
or la. 

Carlo vi e tomdto. Charles has gone back there. 

Alia scuola non ci v^do. / don't go to school. 

Voi rimarrete costa, egli You will remain ivhere you are, he 

Tester^ laggiu, ed lo non will stay down there, and I shall 

partiro di qui. not ?nove from here. 

(a) Here I am, here it is, etc., are eccomi, eccolo, etc. 

85. Most adverbs of manner are formed by adding 
-mente to the feminine singular of the corresponding adjec- 
tive. Adjectives in -le and -re drop their final e in forming 
the adverb. See 35, a. 

franco, frank. francamente, frankly. 

felice, happy. felicemente, happily. 

piacevole, pleasant. piacevolmente, pleasantly. 

(a) So meaning it is translated lo: 

Lo Mccio. I do so. 

Lo crede. He thinks so. 

Lo dicono. They say so. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 

86. One, people, we, you, they, used in an indefinite sense, 

are rendered in Italian by the reflexive construction with 

si (see 55). 

Si canta bene in Itd,lia.> They sing well in Italy. - 

Si fa cosi. You do this way. 

Se ne pdrla. People speak of it. 

Si fanno speseo queste c6se. One often does these things, ' 

87. All SiS2i substantive is tutto (tutti, etc.) : 
Tacevano tutti. All were sitent. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 77 

The adjective all, the whole is tutto followed by the def- 
inite article. 

Tutta la terra. The whole earth. 

Tutto il gi6rno. All day. 

Tutte le romjine son belle. All Roman ladies are beautiful. 

88. Any, when it really adds nothing to the sense, is 
omitted : 

Non ha libri. He hasn't {any) hooks. 

Volete vino? Do you want (any) wine ? 

When, however, this redundant any might be replaced by 
any of the, it is translated by the partitive construction 
(see 12, a) : 

Volete del vino? Do you want any {of the) wine ? 

Any used substantively in the sense of any of it, any of 
them is ne (see 47, 3) : 

Non ne ho. / haven't any. 

Non ne ha ipiii. He hasn't any more. 

Ne avete? Have you any ? 

Any used adjectively and meaning any whatsoever is qua- 

liinque : 

Lo fa meglio di qualunque He does it better than any other 
dltra persona. person. 



89. Some, when it adds nothing to the sense, is omitted 
or rendered by the partitive construction : 

Volete biirro or volute del Will you have some butter? 
burro? 

Some meaning some of it, some of them is ne : 
Ne ha. He has some. 



78 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

Otherwise some is alcuno or qualche. Qualche is always 
singular (even when the meaning is plural), and is never 
used substantively. 

Alcune pers6ne or qualche Some persons. 

pers6na. 
Alcuni lo dicono. Some say so. 

90. Some . . . others, the one . . . the other, one . . . another 
are translated by chi . . . chi, altri . . . altri, V uno . . . 
Paltro, or alcuni . . . alcuni. 

Alcuni used in this way is always plural. A verb whose 
subject is chi or altri (used in this sense) is always singular; 
altri is not used after prepositions. But P uno and V altro 
can be used in any case or number. 

Tiitti, chi piu tosto, e chi All died, some sooner, some later. 

meno, morivano. 
Altri cade, altri fugge. Some fall, others flee. 

Gli uni son buoni, gli altri Some are good, others bad. 

cattivi. 

91. Following is a list of some other uidefinite pronouns 
and adjectives: 

anybody, qualcuno, qualcheduno, everything, tutto, pron. 

chicchessia, pronouns. feiv, a few, pochi (pi.), pron. or adj. 

any more, piu, ne . . . pifi, pron. however much (or many), per 
anything, qualchecosa, pron. quanto (-ti), adj. 

anything else, altro, pron. little, poco, pron. or adj. 

both, tutti e due, 1' uno e 1' altro, less, meno, pron. or adj.^ 

ambedue, pron. or adj. many, molti, pron. or adj.^ 

certain, certo, adj. more, pit, pron. or ad]. 

each, ogni, ciascuno, ognuno, adj. much, molto, pron. or adj. 

either, V uno o 1' altro, pron. or neither, non . . . P uno ne 1' altro, 

adj. ne 1' uno ne 1' altro, pron. or 

every, ogni, ciascuno, ogntino, cia- adj. 

scheduno, adj. no, non . . . nessuno, non . . . al- 
everybody, tutti (pL), ciascheduno, cuno, adj. 

ciascuno, ognuno, pron. nobody, non . . . nessuno, pron. 

* Less= smaller is piu piccolo. * ^ great many is moltissimi. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 79 

no more, non ne . . . piii, pron., somebody, qualcheduno, qualcuno, 

non . . . piii, adj. pron. 

none, non ne . . ., i)roii. something, qualchecosa, i)ron. 

nothing, non . . . niente, non . . . something else, altro, pron. 

nulla, pron. such, tale, adj. 

nothing else, non . . . pih niente, swc/i a, un tale, adj. (but also pron. 

non . . . piii nulla, pron. in Ital., meaning so-and-so), 

others, altrui (see 91, d), pron. whatever, qualunque (invariable), , 

several, parecchi (fern, parecchie), adj. 

pron. or adj. 

(a) The verb used with nessuno, alcuno, niente, nulla (mean- 
ing no, 7iobody, nothing) must be preceded by non, not, unless this 
pronoun or adjective precedes the verb. 

Non ho visto nessuno. / have seen nobody. 

Nessun popolo lo possiede. No people possesses it. 

(b) Nothing, followed by an adjective, is niente di. 
Non avete niente di buono. You have nothing good. 

(c) Ciascuno, ciascheduno, ognuno, nessuno, and alcuno when 

used adjectively are inflected like uno (see 14, 15). 

{d) Altrui, another, others, our neighbor, is invariable, and is not 
used as subject of a verb: 

Con altrui. With other people. 

Chi ama altrui d,ma se stesso. He who loves his neighbor hves 

himself. 

The prepositions di and a are sometimes omitted before it: 

La m6stro altrui. / point her out to others. 

La voglia altrui. The will of another. 



80 ' ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 

Arranged according to Conjugation.^ 

92. This list contains no compound verbs except those 
which differ in conjugation from their simple verbs and 
those for which no simple verb exists in Italian. With every 
verb its irregular forms are given: in the same line with the 
infinitive are the present participle (if it be needed to show 
the original form of the infinitive), the first person singu- 
lar of the past absolute indicative, the past participle, and 
the first person singular of the future indicative (if the future 
be contracted); immediately below are the present indica- 
tive, the imperative, and the present subjunctive, if these 
parts be peculiar. For dare and stare the whole past abso- 
lute and the first person singular of the past subjunctive 
are given also. Essere is irregular throughout. All tenses 
not mentioned are regular. For peculiar endings, see 63, 68. 
Note the following rules: 

(a) If the -present participle is given, the following forms, unless 
expressly mentioned, are to be constructed from its stem: all past 
absolute forms with accented endings, and the whole past descriptive 
and past subjunctive. E.g., fare, pres. part, facendo: hence past 
abs. 2d sing, and 1st and 2d pi., facesti, facemmo, faceste; past 
descr., faceva, etc.; past subj., facessi, etc. 

If the present participle is not given, these forms, unless they 
be mentioned, are to be constructed from the stem of the infini- 
tive. E.g. , venire : past abs. , venisti, venimmo, veniste ; past descr. , 
veniva; past subj., venissi. 

(b) A past absolute whose 1st pers. sing, ends in -ai, -ei, -ii, or 
-etti (except detti and stetti) is regular throughout. In any other 
past absolute the third person singular can be formed from the 

1 Reference to these tables is facilitated by an Alphabetical List of Irregular and 
Defective Verbs (see page 92). Students are advised not to learn forms in paren- 
theses nor any verbs or forms marked rare or poetical. 



LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 



81 



first person by changing final i to e, and the third person plural by 
adding -ro to the third person singular. E.g., fare, p. abs. feci: 3d 
sing., fece; 3d pi, fecero. 

(c) If the future is not given, it is to be constructed from the 
infinitive. The past future always has the same stem as the future. 
See 65, p. 57. 

(d) The imperative, when not given, is like the corresponding 
forms of the present indicative. See 66, b. 



FIRST CONJUGATION 
1. Andare, go, andd,i, andato; andro (andero). 



PRES. 


IND. 


IMPER. 


PRES. 


SUBJ. 


vado or v6 


andiamo 


va' 


vada 


andiamo 


vai 


andate 


andiamo 


vada 


andiate 


va 


vanno 


andate 


vada 


vadano 



2. Fare, do, facendo, feci,^ fatto; faro. Fare (formerly also facere) 
was originally a verb of the third conjugation (see 92, a) . 



PRES. 


IND. 


IMPER. 




PRES. 


SUBJ. 


ficcio or f6 


facciamo 


fa' 






faccia 


facciamo 


fai2 


fate 


facciamo 


faccia 


facciate 


fa2 


fanno 


fate 






faccia 


facciano 


3. Dare, 


give, dTedi or detti. 


dd,to; 


daro. Past subj. dessi. 




PRES. IND. 


^ PAST. ABS. 






IMPER. 


PRES. 


SUBJ. 


do 


diedi or detti 








dia 




dai 


desti 






da' 


dia 




da 


'• diede or dette^ 








dia 




diamo 


demmo 






diamo 


diamo 




date 


deste 






date 


diate 




danno 


diedero or dettero' 






diano 


or dieno 



1 In poetry we sometimes find a past abs. f6i, festi, £e or fee, femmo, feste, ferono 
or fero or fenno; and past descr. fea, etc. 
* Also faci face. 
» Also die, sing. ; dier or diero or dierono, pi. 



82 



^scte. 



\ 

ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



4. Stare (67, a), stand, stetti, stdto; star6. Past subj. st^ssi. 



PRES. IND. 


PAST. ABS. 


IMPER. 


PRES. SUBJ. 


st6 


stetti 




stia 


st&i 


stesti 


sta» 


stia 


■ sta 


stette 




stia 


stiamo 


stemmo 


stiamo 


stiamo 


state 


steste 


state 


stiate 


.(^yO stanno 


stettero 




stiano or stieno 



ii 



SECOND CONJUGATION 

5. Avere, have, ebbi, avuto; avro. See 53, b.^ 

6. Sapere, know, seppi, sapiito; sapro. 

PRES. IND. IMPER. 

;sd sappi^mo sippi 

sai sapete sappiamo 

sa sanno sappiate 

7. Cadere, fall, cd,ddi, cadiito; cadro. 

PRES. IND. 



PRES. SUBJ. 

s^ppia sappiamo 

sappia sappiate 

sappia sappiano 



PRES. SUBJ. 



cido (caggio) cadiamo (caggiSmo) cada (caggia) cadiamo (caggi^mo) 
c^di cadete cada (caggia) cadiate (caggiate) 

cade cadono (caggiono) cada (caggia) cadano (caggiano) 



8. Dovere, owe, dovei (dovetti), doviito; dovro. Imperative lacking. 

PRES. SUBJ. 

debba (deva or deggia) 

debba (deva or deggia) 

debba (deva or deggia) 

dobbiamo 

dobbiate 

debbano (devano or deggiano) 



PRES. IND. 

devo (debbo or deggio) 

devi (debbi) 

deve (debbe) 

dobbiamo (deggiamo) 

dovete 

devono (debbono or deggiono)^ 



9. Sedere, sit, sedei or sedetti, seduto. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

siedo or seggo sediamo (seggiamo) sieda or segga sediamo (seggiamo) 

siedi sedete sieda or segga sediate 

siede siedono or seggono sieda or segga siedano or seggano 

1 In poetry we find: aggio, abbo, or aio for ho; ave for ha; aggia or aia for abbia; ei 
for ebbi; a future ar6, etc., or avero, etc., and similar forms in the past future. 

2 Also dec, del, dee, dovemo, dovete, deono or denno. 



LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 



83 



10. Vedere, see, vidi, vediito or visto; vedro. Prowedere has a 
future provvedero; prevedere has prevedero or prevedro. All 
other compounds are like vedere. 



PRES. IND. 


PRES. SUBJ. 


vedo (veggo or veggio) 


veda (vegga or veggia) 


vedi 


veda (vegga or veggia) 


vede 


veda (vegga or veggia) 


vediamo (veggiamo) 


vediamo (veggiamo) 


vedete 


vediate (veggiate) 


vedono (veggono or veggiono) 


vedano (veggano or veggiano) 


11. Giacere, lie, gMcqui, giaciuto. 


PI^ES. IND. 


PRES. SUBJ. 


giaccio giacciamo 


giaccia giacciamo > 


giaci giacete 


giaccia giacciate 


giacG giacciono 


giaccia glacciano 



12. Piacere, -please: like giacere (11). 

13. Tacere, he silent: like giacere (11). 

14. Solere, he wont, solito. No past, ahs., fut., past fut., nor im- 
perative. 



PRES. IND. 




PRES. SUBJ. 


soglio sogliamo 




soglia sogliamo 


suoli solete 




soglia sogliate 


suole sogliono 




soglia sogliano 


15. Dolere, grieve, dolsi, 


doluto; 


• 
; dorr6. 


PRES. IND. 




PRES. SUBJ. 


dolgo (dogUo) dogliamo^ 




dolga (doglia) dogliamo* 


duoli dolete 




dolga (doglia) dogliate 


duole dolgono (dogliono) 


dolga (dogUa) dolgano (dogliano) 


16. Rimanere, remain, rimdsi, rimjisto or rimdso; rimarro. 


PRES. IND. 




PRES. SUBJ. 


rimango rimaniamo ^ 




rimanga rimaniamo ^ 


rimani rimanete 




rimanga rimaniate 


rimane rimangono 




rimanga rimangano 



1 Also dolghiamo: a popular form. 

2 Also rimanghiamo: a popular form. 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



--17. Tenere, hold, tenni, tenuto; terro. 

r\ ' ^C PRES. IND. PRES. SUB J. 

t§ngo teniamo^ tenga teniamo^ 

tieni tenete tenga teniate 

tiene tengono tenga tengano 



18. Valere, be worth, valsi, vJ^tD or valso; varro. 



PRES. IND. 


PRES. SUBJ. 


valgo (VagHo) vagliamo valga (vaglia) 
vali valete valga (vaglia) 
Ykle valgono (vagliono) valga (vaglia) 


vagliamo! 

vagliate 

valgano (vagliano) 


19. Volere, wish, volU,^ 


voluto; vorro. 




PRES. IND. 


IMPER. 


PRES. SUBJ. 


voglio (vo') vogliamo 
vu6i' volete 
vudle vogliono 


vogli 

vogliamo 

vogliate 


voglia vogliamo 
vogUa vogliate 
voglia vogliano 



20. Parere, seem, pdrvi, psif^^aijr parso; parro. 

IND. PRES. SUBJ. 



pSio paiamo or pariSmo 
pari parete 
pare paiono 


paia paiamo or pariamo 
paia paiate 
paia paiano 


21. Potere, be able, potei, 


potuto; 


potro.^ No imperative. 


PRES. IND. 




PRES. SUBJ. 


pdsso possiamo 
pu6i potete 
pud 5 possono^ 




possa possiamo 
possa possiate 
possa possano 



22. Persuadere, persuade, persudsi, persuaso. Pres. persu^do, etc. 

23. Calere, matter, calse, caluto. Impersonal. No fut., past fut, 

nor imperative. Not mx)dem. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

cale caglia 

1 Also tenghiamo; valghiamo: popular forms. 

2 Also volsi. 3 Also vuogli or vuoli. 
* In poetry we find a fut. por6 and a past fut. poria. 

6 Also puote; ponno. 



LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 85 

THIRD CONJUGATION 

(e) All irregular verbs of the third conjugation are accented, in 
the singular and third person plural of the present indicative and 
subjunctive, on the same syllable as in the infinitive. 

( /) Verbs in -cere and -gere insert no i between the c or g and 
the or a of the present indicative and subjunctive endings, 
except in the first person plural of both moods and the second 
person plural of the subjunctive. Cf. 60, last paragraph. 

(g) See chapter on Pronunciation, 4, s, d. 

Present Regular 

24. Accendere, light, accesi, accuse. 

25. Affliggere, afflict, afflissi, afflltto. 

26. Algere, be cold, alsi. Defective. Rare. 

27. Alludere, allude, alMsi (alludei), alluso. 

28. Ardere, burn, d,rsi, drso. 

29. ArrSgere, add, arrosi, arr6so or arr6to. Defective, Rare. 
I 30. Assidere, besiege, assisi, assise. Rare. 

31. Assolvere, absolve, assolvetti or assolvei or ass61si, ass61to or 

assoluto. So risolvere (determine). For solvere, dissolvere, 
and risolvere (dissolve), see 107. 

32. Assorbere, absorb, assorsi (not in use), assorto. Rare. 

33. Avellere, uproot, avulse, aviilso. Defective. Rare. 

34. Chiudere, shut, chiusi, chiiiso. So all verbs in -chiiidere or 

-cludere. Scq, however, 4, s, d. 

35. Colere, revere, c61to or ciilto. Defective. Rare. 

36. Connettere, connect, connessi (connettci), connesso (connettiito). 

Rare. 

37. Conoscere, know, con6bbi, conosciiito. 

38. Conquidere, conquer, conquisi, conqulso. Rare. 

39. Consumere, consume, consunsi, consunto. Rare. PresUmere 

has also presumei. 

40. Contundere, bruise, contiisi, contiiso. 

41. Correre, ru7i, corsi, c6rso. 

42. Crescere, grow, crebbi, cresciiito. 

43. Cuocere, cook, cocendo, cossi, cotto. Pres. cuocio or cuoco, etc.^ 

' 1 In the 1st and 2d persona plural of the pros, ind., subj., and imperative, uo is 
generally replaced by o: cociamo, etc. The uo occurs in those parts of the verb where 
the accent falls on that syllable. 



86 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

44. Decidere, decide, decisi, declso. 

45. Difendere, defend, difesi (difendei), difeso. 

46. Dirigere, direct, diressi, diretto. 

47. Discutere, discuss, discussi (discutei), discilsso. 

48. Distinguere, distinguish, distinsi, distinto. 

49. Dividere, divide, divlsi, diviso. 

50. Elidere, elide, elisi (elidei), eliso. 

51. Eludere, elude, eliisi (eludei or eludetti), eliiso. 

52. Ergere, erect, ^rsi, erto. Rare. 

53. Esigere, exact, esigei (esigetti), esd,tto. 

54. Esistere, exist, esistei (esistetti), esistito. 

55. Espellere, expel, espiilsi, espiilso. Rare. 

56. Esplodere, explode, esplosi, esploso. 

57. Esprimere, express, espressi, espresso. So all other verbs in 

-prlmere. Premere and its compounds with e are regular. 

58. Fendere, split, fendei (fendetti or fessi), fenduto or fesso. 

59. Figgere (figere), j^x, fissi, fitto. 

60. Fingere, feign, finsi, finto. 

61. Fondere, melt, fusi (fondei), fuso (fondiito). 

62. Frangere, break, fransi, franto. 

63. Friggere, fry, frissi, fritto. 

64. Genuflettere, kneel, genuflessi, genuflesso. Rare. 

65. Intridere, dilute, intrisi, intriso. 

66. Intrudere, intrude, intrusi, intniso. 

67. Invadere, invade, invdsi, invjiso. 

68. Ledere, offend, lesi {not in use), leso. Rare. 

69. Leggere, read, lessi, letto. 

70. Licere or lecere, be lawful, lecito or licito. Impersonal. Defeo- 

live. Poetical. 

71. Ludere, play, lusi, luso. Rare. 

72. Mergere, plunge, mersi, merso. Rare. 

73. Mettere, put, messi or misi, messo. 

74. Molcere, soothe, mulse. Defective. Rare. 

75. Mordere, bite, morsi, morso. 

76. Muovere, iiiove, movendo, moasi, mosso.* 

77. Nascere, be born, nd-cqui, nd,to. 

78. Nascondere, hide, nascosi, nasc6sto. 

79. Negligere (see 5, gli), neglect, neglessi, negl^tto. 

80. Offendere, offend, offesi, offeso. 

81. Ostendere, show. Defective. Rare. 

82. Percipere, perceive, percetto. Defective. Rare. 

83. Perdere, lose, perdei or perdetti or persi, perdiito or perso. 

84. Piovere, rain, piowe (piove), pioviito. Impersonal. 

1 See page 85, footnote. 



LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 87 

85. Porgere, present, porsi, porto. 

86. Prediligere, prefer, predilessi, prediletto. 

87. Prendere, take, presi, preso. 

88. Proteggere, protect, protessi, protetto. 

89. Radere, shave, rdsi (radei), rdso. 

90. Redimere, redeem, redensi (redim6i), redento. 

91. Reggere, support, ressi, retto. 

92. Rendere, render, resi (rendei or rendetti), reso (renduto). 

93. Ridere, laugh, risi, riso. 

94. Riflettere, reflect, riflettei or riflessi, riflettuto or riflesso. Riflet- 

tere, reflect light, is generally irregular; riflettere, meditate, is 
usually regular. 
. 95. Rifulgere, shine, rifulsi. Past part, lacking. Poetical. 
' 96. Rilucere, shine, rilussi or rilucei. Past part, lacking. , 

97. Rispondere, answer, risp6si, risp6sto. 
' 98. Rodere, gnaw, rosi, r6so, 
99. Rompere, break, ruppi, rotto. 

100. Scendere, descend, scesi, sceso. 

101. Scindere, sever, scindei or scissi, sclsso. 

102. Sciolvere, breakfast, sciolsi or sciolvetti, sci6Ito. Rare. 

103. Scorgere, perceive, scorsi, scdrto. 

104. Scrivere, write, ecrissi, scritto. 

105. Scuotere, shake, scotendo, scossi, scosso.^ 

106. SofEolcere, support, soffolse, soffolto. Defective. Rare. 

107. Solvere, undo, solvei (solvetti), soliito. Poetical. So dissol- 

vere;/or assolvere and risolvere (determine), see 31. 

108. Sorgere, rise, sorsi, s6rto. 

109. Sospendere, suspend, sosp^si, sospeso. So appendere, impen- 

dere. Pendere is reg.; dipendere either reg. or irreg. 

110. Spandere, spill, spandei or spandetti, spdnto. 

111. Spargere, scatter, sp^rsi, spd,rso or spdrto. 

112. Spendere, spend, spesi, speso. 

113. Spergere, disperse, spersi, sperso. Rare. 

114. Sporgere, project, sporsi, sporto. 

115. Struggere, melt, strussi, striitto. 

116. Succedere, happen, success! or succedei, successo or succoduto. 

So concedere, which has also concedetti; cedere and its other 
compounds are generally regular. 

117. Suggere, suck, suggei or sussi. Past part, lacking. Rare. 

118. Tendere (transitive), extend, tcsi, teso. The intrans. verb is reg, 

but has no past participle. 

119. Tergere, wipe, tersi or tergei, terso. Rare. 

120. Tdrcere, twist, torsi, torto. 

1 See page 85, footuote. 



88 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

121. Uccidere, kill, uccisi, ucciso. 

122. Vincere, conquer, vinsi, vinto. 

123. Vivere, live, vissi, vissuto or vivuto; vivero or vivro. 

124. Volgere, turn, volsi, volto. 

125. Volvere, turn, volsi, volto. Rare. Devolvere has a past parL 

devoluto. 

Present Irregular 

126. !fessere, he, fui, std-to; saro. See 53, a.^ 

127. Bere or bevere, drink, bevendo, bewi (bevetti or bevei), be- 

viito (beiito); bero or bevero. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

bevo or beo beviamo or beiamo beva or bea beviamo or beiamo 

bevi or bei bevete or beete beva or bea beviate or beiate 

beve or bee bevono or beono beva or bea bevano or beano 

128. Chiedere, ask, chiesi (chiesi or chiedei), chiesto. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

chiedo (chieggo) ^ chieda (chiegga)^ 

chiedi chieda (chiegga) 

chiede chieda (chiegga) 

chiediamo chiediamo 

chiedete chiediate 

chiedono (chieggono) '^ chiedano (chieggano)^ 

129. Condurre, conduct, conducendo, condussi, condotto; condurrd. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

conduco conduciamo conduca conduciamo 

conduci conducete conduca conduciate 

conduce conducono conduca conducano 

130. Nuocere, harm, nocendo, nocqui, nociuto. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

nudco or noccio nociamo nuoca or ndccia nociimo 

nuoci nocete nuoca or noccia nociate 

nuoce nudcono or nocciono nuoca or noccia nuocano or n6c- 

ciano 

1 In the past descriptive eramo is often used for eravamo. We find in poetry: 
sete for siete; enno or en for sono (third pi.) ; sie for sfa; erfimo, erate for eravamo, 
eravate; u for o in the past absolute and past subjunctive; foro for furono; fia, fiano 
or fieno for sar^, sar&nno; fora, forano for sarei, sarebbe, sarebbero; sendo for es- 
sendo; suto, essfito, or issiito for stato. 

3 Also chieggio, chieggiono, chieggia, chieggiano. 



LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS 89 

131. Porre, put, ponendo, p6si, p6sto; porr6. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

pongo poniamo (ponghiamo) ponga poniamo (ponghiamo) 

poni ponete ponga poniate 

pone pongono ponga pongano 

132. Trarre (traere), drag, traendo, trdssi, trdtto; trarrd. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

traggo traiamo or traggiamoi tragga traiamo or traggiamo* 

trai (traggi) traete tragga traiate 

trae (tragge) traggono tragga traggano 

133. Vellere (verre), tear up, velsi, velto; vellero (verro or velger6). 

Vellere, which is rare, has not all the forms given here; but its 
compound, svellere, has them all. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

vello or velgo velliamo (velgiamo) vella or velga velliamo (velgiamo) 

velli (velgi) vellete vella or velga velliate (velgiate) 

velle (velge) vellono or velgono vella or velga vellano or velgano 

134. Cogliere (corre), gather, colsi, colto; cogliero or corro. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

colgo (coglio) cogliamo (colghiamo) colga (coglia) cogliamo (colghiamo) 

cogli cogliete colga (coglia) cogliate 

coglie c61gono (c6gliono) colga (coglia) colgano (cogliano) 

135. Scegliere (scerre), choose: like cogliere (134), 

136. Sciogliere (sciorre), untie: like cogliere (134). 

137. Togliere (tone), take: like cogliere (134). 

138. Giungere (giugnere), to arrive, giunsi, giiinto; giimgero (giu- 

gnero). 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

giungo (giugno) giunga (giugna) 

giungi (giugni) giunga (giugna) 

giunge (giugne) giunga (giugna) 

giungiamo (giugniamo) giungiamo (giugniamo) 

giungete (giugnete) giungiate (giugniate) 

giungono (giugnono) giungano (giugnano) 

139. Cingere (cignere), gird: like giungere (138). 

140. Mugnere (mungere), milk: like giungere (138). 

1 Also tragghiamo. 



90 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

141. Piangere (piSgnere), weep: like giungere (138). 

142. Pingere (pignere), paint: like giungere (138). 

143. Pungere (pugnere), prick: like giungere (138). 

144. Spegnere (spengere), extinguish: like giungere (138), except 

that the forms with gn are far commoner than those with ng. 

145. Spingere (spignere), push: like giungere (138). 

146. Stringere (strignere), hind: like giungere (138), except that the 

past part, is stretto or strinto. Costringere, compel, has for 
past part, only costretto. 

147. Tingere (tignere), dye: like giungere (138). 

148. Ungere (ugnere), anoint: like giungere (138). 

FOURTH CONJUGATION 
Present Regular 

149. Aprire, open, aprii or apersi, aperto. Pres. dpro, etc. 

150. Coprire (cuoprire), cover, coprii or copersi, coperto. Pres. 

copro (cuopro), etc. 

151. OfErire (offerire), offer, offrii (offerii) or offersi, ofiferto. Pres. 

offro (offerisco), etc. 

152. Sofifrire, suffer: like offrire (151). 

153. Convertire, convert, convertii or conversi, convertito or con- 

verso. Pres. converto or convertisco, etc. All other verbs in 
-vertire are reg. 

154. Costniire (constmire), construct, co(n)strussi or co(n)struii, 

co(n)struito or co(n)strutto. Pres. co(n)struisco, etc. 

155. Digerire, digest, digerii, digerito (digesto). Pres. digerisco, etc. 

156. Esaurire, exhaust, esaurii, esaurito or esausto. Pres. esaurisco, 

etc. 

157. Seppellire or sepellire, bury, sep(p)ellii, seppellito or sepolto. 

Pres. sep(p)ellisco, etc. 

Present Irregular 

158. Cucire, sew, cucii, cucito. Pres. cucio or cucisco. This verb 

inserts i before o and a, but not before e and i. 

159. Sdrucire or sdruscire, rip: like cucire (158). 

160. Empire or empiere, fill, empiendo, empii, empito. All but the 

present from the stem of empire. So compire or compiere, 
which has also a past part, compiuto. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 



empio (empisco) empiamo 


empia 


empiamo 


empi (empisci) empite 


empia 


empiate 


empie (empisce) empiono (empiscono) 


empia 


empiano 



LIST OP IRREGULAR VERBS 91 

161. Morire, die, morli, morto; morro or morird. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

mudio (muoro) moriamoormuoia- muoia (muora) moriamo or muoi- 

mo amo 

muori or muoi morite muoia (muora) muoiate 

muore muoiono (muoro- muoia (muora) muoiano (muora- 

no) no) 1 

162. Seguire, follow, seguii, segulto. Pres. scguo, etc. The verb is 

generally regular; but the e may be changed to ie in all forms 
where it is accented. Proseguire has -scguo or -seguisco. 

163. Sparire, disappear, sparfi or sparvi, sparito. Pres. (regular) 

sparisco, etc. Apparire has appdrvi or -si or -ii, apparito or 
apparso; comparire has compjirvi or -si or -ii, comparso; 
otherwise they are like sparire, but they have in the present the 
additional forms: -paio, -pd.re, -paiono; -pdia, -pdiano. 

164. Dire, say, dicendo, dissi, detto; diro. Dire (formerly dicere) 

belongs really to the third conjugation: dicesti, -eva, -essi. 

PRES. IND. IMPER. PRES. SUBJ. 

dice diciamo di' dica diciamo 

dici dite diciamo dIca diciate 

dice dicono dite dica dicano 

165. Salire, ascend, salii or sdlsi, saKto. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

salgo (sallsco) saliamo or sagliamo ^ saiga (salisca) saliamoor sagliamo^ 

sali (salisci) salite saiga (salisca) sagliate 

sale (salisce) salgono (saliscono) saiga (salisca) salgano (saliscano) 

166. Venire, come, venni, venuto; verro. 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

vengo (vegno) veniamo^ venga (vegna) veniamo^ 

vieni venite venga (vegna) veniate 

viene vengono (vegnono) venga (vegna) vengano (vegnano) 

167. Udire, hear, udii, udito; udiro (udro). 

PRES. IND. PRES. SUBJ. 

6do udiamo 

ddi udite 

dde ddono 

1 In all forms where uo occurs, it may be replaced by o. 

2 Also salghiamo; venghiamo: popular forms. 



dda 


udiSmo 


dda 


udiate 


dda 


ddano 



92 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

168. Uscire (escire), go out, uscii, usclto. 





PEES. 


IND. 




PRES. 


SUBJ. 


esco 




usciamo 


esca 




usciamo 


esci 




uscite 


esca 




usciate 


esce 




§scono 


esca 




escano 



169. Orire, he horn, orto. Defective. Rare. 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DE- 
FECTIVE VERBS 

93. Every irregular verb in this list is followed by a num- 
ber referring to the table of Irregular Verbs arranged ac- 
cording to Conjugation. Obsolete defective verbs that 
present no irregularity have not been mentioned. 

(a) Compound verbs have, in general, been excluded from this 
list, unless they differ in conjugation from the simple verbs from 
which they come (see 67, a). The commonest prefixes are: a- (cor- 
responding in meaning to the preposition a) ; as- ( = Latin dbs-) ; 
CO-, com-, con-, cor- ( =prep. con); contra- ( =prep. contra); de-, 
di- (=Lat. de-); dis- (=Lat. dis-)\ e-, es- (=Lat. ex); i-, im-, 
in-, ir- (=prep. in); o- (=Lat. oh); per- (=prep. per); pre- 
(=Lat. prae-); pro- (=Lat. pro-); r-, re-, ri- (=Lat. re-); s- 
( = Lat. ex- or dis-) ; so-, sos-, su- ( = Lat. sub) ; sopra-, sopr-, 
sor- (=prep. sopra); sett-, sotto- (=prep. sotto); stra- (=Lat. 
extra); tra- ( =prep. tra). After several of these prefixes the initial 
consonant of the simple verb is generally found doubled: a+ca- 
dere = accadere. S- is sometimes combined with con-, r- with sl- 
ot in-: scoscendere, raccogliere, rincorrere. 

Accadere, see cadere, 7. Affliggere, 25. 

Accendere, 24. Algere, 26. 

Accludere, see chiudere, 34. Alludere, 27. 

Accorgere, see scorgere, 103. Ancidere, see uccldere, 121. 

Acquisire has only acquisito. Andare, 1. 

Addurre, see condurre, 129. Annettere, see connettere, 36. 



IRKEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 



93 



Antep6rre, see porre, 131. 
Antivedcre, p. -p. only antiveduto, 

otherwise like vedere, 10. 
Apparire, see sparire, 163. 
Appartenere, see tenere, 17. 
Appendere, see sospendere, 109. 
Aprire, 149. 
Ardere, 28. 
Arrogere, 29. 

Ascendere, see scendere, 100. 
Asciolvere, see sciolvere, 102. 
Ascondere, see nascondere, 78. 
AspSrgere, see spergere, 113. 
Assalire, see sallre, 165. 
Assidere, 30. 

Assistere, see esistere, 54. 
Assolvere, 31. 
Assorbere, 32. 

Assumere, see consiimere, 39. 
Avellere, 33. 
Avere, 5. 
Bere, 127. 

Bevere, see bere, 127. 
Cadere, 7. 
Calere, 23. 
Cedere, generally reg., sometimes 

has p. abs. cessi, p. p. cesso. 
Chiedere, 128. 
Cliiudere, 34. 
Cignere, see clngere, 139, 
Cingere, 139. 

Circoncidere, see decidere, 44. 
Cogliere, 134. 

Coincfdere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 
Colere, 35. 

Colludere, see liidere, 71. 
Comparire, see sparire, 163. 
Competere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 
Compiere, see empire, 160. 
Complre, see empire, 160. 
Comprimere, see esprimere, 57. 
Concedere, see succedere, 116. 
Concludere, see chiudere, 34. 
Concutere, see discutere, 47. 



Condurre, 129. 
Conncttere, 36. 
Conoscere, 37. 
Conquidere, 38. 
Consistere, see esistere, 54. 
Constd-re is reg. 
Construire, see costruire, 154. 
Consiimere, 39. 
Contendere, see tendere, 118. 
Contrastare is reg. 
Controvertere, see vertere. 
Contendere, 40. 

Convergere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 
Convertire, 153. 
Coprire, 150. 
Corre, see cogliere, 134. 
Correre, 41. 

Corrispondere, see rispondere, 97. 
Cospargere, see spergere, 111. 
Cospergere, see spergere, 113. 
Costruire, 154. 
Crescere, 42. 
Cucire, 158. 
Cuocere, 43. 

Cuoprire, see coprire, 150. 
Dare, 3. 
Decidere, 44. 

Dedurre, see condurre, 129. 
Delinquere, reg. verb, has no p. z>., 
and its p. abs., delinquetti, is rare. 
Deprimere, see esprimere, 57. 
Desistere, see esistere, 54. 
Devolvere, see volvere, 125. 
Difendere, 45. 
Digerire, 155. 

Dipendere, see sospendere, 109. 
Dire, 164. 
Dirigere, 46. 

Dirimere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 
Discendere, see scendere, 100. 
Discutere, 47. 

Dispergere, see spergere, 113. 
Dissolvere, see solvere, 107. 
Dissuadere, see persuadcre, 22. 



94 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



Distdre, reg. in pres. of all moods, 
no pres. p., otherwise like stdre, 
4. 

Distlnguere, 48. 

Distruggere, see struggere, 115. 

Divedere has nothing but infin. 

Divergere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 
j Dividere, 49. 

Dolere, 15. 

Dovere, 8. 

Eleggere, see leggere, 69. 

Elidere, 50. 

Eludere, 51. 

Empiere, see empire, 160. 

Empire, 160. 

Ergere, 52. 

Erigere, see dirigere, 46. 

Esaurire, 156. 

Escire, see uscire, 168. 

Escludere, see chiudere, 34. 

Esigere, 53. 

Esimere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 

Esistere, 54. 

Espellere, 55. 

Esplodere, 56. 

Esprimere, 57. 

Essere, 126. 

Estinguere, see distinguere, 48. 

Evadere, see invd,dere, 67. 

Fare, 2. 

Fendere, 58. 

Fervere, reg. verb, has no p. p., and 
is rare except in the third pers. of 
the pres. ind. and past descr. 

Figere, see figgere, 59. 

Figgere, 59. 

Fingere, 60. 

Fondere, 61. 

Frangere, 62. 

Friggere, 63. 

Genuflettere, 64. 

Giacere, 11. 

Gire, defect.: pres. giamo, gite; past 
descr. giva or gia, etc.; imper. 



gidmo, gite; pres. siibj. gidmo, 
giate; no pres. p.; rest reg. 

Giugnere, see giungere, 138. 

Giungere, 138. 

Illudere, see ludere, 71. 

Impellere, see espellere, 55. 

Impendere, see sospendere, 109. 

Imprimere, see esprimere, 57. 

Incidere, see decidere, 44. 

Includere, see chiudere, 34. 

Inciitere, see discutere, 47. 

Indiirre, see condurre, 129. 

Insistere, see esistere, 54. 

Instare is reg. 

Instruire, see construire, 154. 

Intendere, see tendere, 118. 

Intercedere, see succedere, 116. 

Intridere, 65. 

Introdurre, see condurre, 129. 

Intrudere, 66. 

Invadere, 67. 

Invalere, p. p. only invdlso, other' 
wise like valere, 18. 

ire, defect.: pres. ite; p. des. iva, etc.; 
p. abs. isti, iste, iro; fut. iremo, 
irete, iranno; imper. ite; past 
subj. isse, iste, issero; p. p. ito. 

Istruire, see costruire, 154. 

Lecere, see licere, 70. 

Ledere, 68. 

Leggere, 69. 

Licere, 70. 

Lucere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 

Ludere, 71. 

Mantenere, see tenere, 17. , 

Mergere, 72. 

Mettere, 73. 

Molcere, 74. 

Mordere, 75. 

Morire, 161. 

Miignere, 140. 

Mungere, see miignere, 140. 

Muovere, 76. 

Nascere, 77. 



IKREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 



95 



N'asc6ndere, 78. 

Negligere, 79. 

Nuocere, 130. 

Offendere, 80. 

Offerlre, see offrire, 151. 

Offrfre, 151. 

Opprlmere, see esprlmere, 57. 

Orire, 169. 

Ostdre is reg. 

Ostendere, 81. 

Parere, 20. 

Percipere, 82. 

Percuotere, see scuotere, 105. 

Perdere, 83. 

Permanere, see rimanere, 16. 

Perslstere, see eslstere, 54. 

Persuadere, 22. 

Piacere, 12. 

Pi^gnere, see pid,ngere, 141. 

Pi^ngere, 141. 

Plgnere, see pingere, 142. 

Pingere, 142. 

Piovere, 84. 

Porgere, 85. 

P6rre, 131. 

Pospdrre, see p6rre, 131. 

Possedere, see sedere, 9. 

Potere, 21. 

Precldere, see decidere, 44. 

Precludere, see chiiidere, 34. 

Prediligere, 86. 

Premere is reg. 

Prendere, 87. 

Prestdre is reg. 

Presiimere, see consiimere, 39. 

Prevedere, see vedere, 10. 

Produrre, see condurre, 129. 

Proteggere, 88. 

Prowedere, fut. and past fut. un- 

contracted, otherwise like vedere, 

10. 
Prudere, reg. verb, has no p. p., and 

is used only in the third pers. 
Pugnere, see pungere, 143. 



Piingero, 143. 

Raccogliere, see cogliere, 134. 

Radere, 89. 

Raggiiingere, see giungere, 138. 

Recidere, see decidere, 44. 

Redimere, 90. 

Reggere, 91. 

Rendere, 92. 

Repellere, see espellere, 55. 

Reprimere, see esprlmere, 57. 

Reslstere, see esistere, 54. 

Restore is reg. 

Ridere, 93. 

Ridurre, see condiirrc, 129. 

Riflettere, 94. 

Rifulgere, 95. 

Riliicere, 96. 

Rimanere, 16. 

Risolvere (dissolve), see solvere, 

107. 
Risolvere (determine), see assol- 

vere, 31. 
Rispondere, 97. 
Ristare, see stdre, 4. 
Risiimere, see consumere, 39. 
Rodere, 98. 
R6mpere, 99. 
Salire, 165. 
Sapere, 6. 
Scegliere, 135. 
Scendere, 100. 
Scerre, see scegliere, 135. 
Scmdere, 101. 
Sciogliere, 136. 
Sciolvere, 102. 
Sciorre, see sciogliere, 136. 
Scommcttere, see mettere, 73. 
Scoprire, see coprire, 150. 
Scorgere, 103. 
Scrivere, 104. 
Scuotere, 105. 
Sdrucire, 159. 

Sdruscire, see sdrucire, 159. 
Sedere, 9. 



96 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



Sedurre, see condijrre, 129. 

Seguire, 162. 

Sepellire, see seppellire, 157. 

Seppellire, 157. 

Sofferfre, see soffrire, 152. 

Soffolcere, 106. 

Soffrire, 152. 

Solere, 14. 

Solvere, 107. 

Sopprimere, see esprimere, 57. 

Soprastdre, see stare, 4.^ 

Sorgere, 108. 

Sospendere, 109. 

Sostare is reg. ^ 

Sottostare, see std,re, 4. 

Sovrastare see stdre, 4. 

Spdndere, 110. 

Spargere, 111. 

Sparire, 163. 

Spegnere, 144. 

Spendere, 112. 

Spengere, see spegnere, 144. 

Spergere, 113. 

Splgnere, see spingere, 145. 

Spingere, 145. 

Sporgere, 114. 

Stare, 4. 

Stridere, reg. verb, has no p. p. 

Strignere, see strlngere, 146. 

Stringere, 146. 

Struggere, 115. 

Subire is reg. : pres. subisco. 

Succedere, 116. 

Suggere, 117. 

Sussistere, see eslstere, 54. \ 



Svellere, see vellere, 133. 

Tacere, 13. 

Tendere {trans.), 118. 

Tendere (intrans.), reg. verb, has 

no p. p. 
Tenere, 17. 
Tergere, 119. 
Tignere, see tingere, 147. 
Tingere, 147. 
Togliere, 137. 
Torcere, 120. 
Torre, see togliere, 137. 
Tradiirre, see condurre, 129. i 
Trd,ere, see trd,rre, 132. 
Transigere, see esigere, 53. 
Trc4rre, 132. 
Uccidere, 121. 
Udire, 167. 

Ugnere, see ungere, 148. 
Ungere, 148. 
Uscire, 168. 
Valere, 18. 
Vedere, 10. 
Vellere, 133. 
Venire, 166. 
Verre, see vellere, 133. 
Vertere, reg. verb, is used only in 

the pres. and past descr. 
Vilipendere, see sospendere, 109. 
Vincere, 122. 
Vivere, 123. 
Volere, 19. 
Volgere, 124. 
Volvere, 125. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 

LESSON 1. PRONUNCIATION 

Study sections 1, 2, 3. 

Note. — In this and in all other lessons the assignment of a section 
number means that the whole section, including all subdivisions, is to 
be studied, unless special directions to the contrary are given. 

EXERCISE 1 

1. State the quality of the e {close or open) in each of these wordsy 
and pronounce each word: te, tre, ne, se, pote, e, diedi, fieno, Siena, 
desti, debito, Alfredo, presto, merito, Valerio. 

2. State the quality of the o in each of these words, and pronounce 
each word: fo, no, cantero, pero, muore, suona, noi, ricoveri, Roma, 
bove, opera, Modena. 

3. Pronounce: abittidine, alfabeto, Alfieri, altrui, America, Am- 
ieto, andatevene, animato, augurerai, balenio, benedirono, benevolo, 
bibliofilo, cavaliere, colui, conservatorio, contadino, Costantinopoli, 
costui, credulo, cui, demolirete, Demostene, Domenico, dove, ei, 
Emanuele, eroe, esprimereste, Faraone, formidabile, fui, Galileo, 
Goldoni, idea, impermalito, impero, insubordinato, io, linea, Lom- 
bardia, lui, lunedi, maestro, miei, mio, Napoli, naufrago, neutro, 
nobilta, nuora, ode, oibo, onorevole, ortografia, Orvieto, ovest, 
Panama, Paolo, patata, paura, perde, perpendicolo, personalita, poi, 
povero, responsabilita, restituiti, rimanevate, Rimini, Romolo, 
Rovere, Serao, Severmo, suoi, Taormina, umile, uno, vende, voi, 
volonta, vuoto. 



98 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



LESSON 2. PRONUNCIATION (continued) 

Study 4 [omitting (a), (b), (c), {d) under s], 5, 6, 7. Read (a), (6), 
(c) ufider s in 4, mid 8. 



EXERCISE 2 

1. Pronounce: cane, panca, tasca, come, Pascoli, cura, alcuni, 
scudo, classe, Tecla, credo, sacro, ascrivere, che, chetare, oche, 
panche, maschera, chi, chino, bachi, parchi, boschi, chiudo, richiamo, 
manchiamo, schiavo, Ischia, Peschiera, cena, celare, voce, vivace, 
Nocera, elce, incendio, ci, civile, Cimabue, dieci, taci, Lucia, 
Medici, porci, Pulci, Vinci, ciarla, diciannove, oncia, marcia, cielo, 
specie, cio, bacio, commercio, Pincio, ciurma, fanciuUo, accendere, 
uccello, accidente, piccino, faccia, boccia, taccio, piccione, Duccio, 
acciuffo, ricciuto, scena, nasce, discepolo, scibile, lasci, disciplinai, 
sciame, poscia, lascio, mesciuto.^ 

2. Pronounce : gala,, targa, sgarbato, pago, valgo, sgombro, gusto, 
augurare, guardia, Guido, sangue, gloria, anglomania, magro, sgri- 
dare, ghetto, paghero, alghe, sghembo, ghirlanda, ghinea, Ghiberti, 
sughi, Inghilterra, ghianda, ghiotto, paghiamo, Alighieri, ringhiera, 
gelare, genere, Genova, agevole, Eugenio, stringendo, Angelico, 
sgelare, giro, agitato, antologia, Perugino, piangi, cangia, Borgia, 
giorno, giovedi, Giovanni, adagio, mangio, giu, giusto, Giulio, digiuno, 
ingiuria, friggere, piagge, oggi, fuggire, piaggia, foggiare, leggiero, 
maggiore, solfeggio, Reggio, aggiunta, raggiustare, magli, begli, tigli, 
moglina, medaglia, pigliare, Cagliari, moglie, cogliendo, taglio, 
luglio, pagliucola, figliuolo, gli, pugnare, Campagna, Bologna, spugne, 
mugnere, compagnia, Mascagni, stagno, sogno, Foligno, ognuno, 
piagnucolare. 

3. Pronounce the words in (a) under s on p. s', then pronounce 
these words, in which the s has the sound of English z: basilico, 
brindisi, caso, causa, confusione, deserto, desinare, elemosina, enfasi. 

4. Pronounce these words, in which the z {or zz) is pronounced like 
ts: grazie, ozio, Venezia, Abruzzi, altezza, Arezzo, mazzo, pozzo, 
alzo, calzoni, anzi, denunzia, Firenze, Monza, senza, forza, marzo, 
zampa, zio, zolfo; then pronounce the words in (a) under z on p. 4. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 99 

5. Pronounce: debbo, gabbarc, Lecco, pacco, addio, freddo, 
affare, goffo, bello, Donatello, commedia, somma, fanno, Ravenna, 
appena, troppo, arrivo, terra, essa, Messina, metto, otto, avvcnire. 

LESSON 3. ARTICLES 
Study 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15. 

EXERCISE 3 

1. State the gender and number of each of these combinations, 
as indicated by the form of the definite article: gii abiti, il balcone, 
i bambini, la barba, le immagini, gl' impeti, le scarpe, lo scherzo, 
gli zecchini; cogli affari, del campo, suUa faccia, ai ladri, dallo 
scoglio, negli stati, delle unioni. 

2. Place the proper form of the definite article before each of these 
nouns [those in (a) are masculine singidar, those in (b) mascidlne 
plural, those in (c) feminine singular, those in (d)^ feminine plural]: 

(a) albero, dente, fatto, impero, sguardo, spedale, uccello, zingaW.'^^ 

(b) alberi, denti, fatti, imperi, sguardi, spedali, uccelli, zingari, 

(c) aria, campana, evoluzione, mente, ombra, scena, zampa. '^ 

(d) arie, campane, evoluzioni, menti, ombre, scene, zampe. 

3. Translate into Italian the prepositions and articles in these 
combinations [the nouns in (a) are masculine singular, those in {b) 
masculine plural, those in {c) feminine singular, those in {d) femi- 
nine plural]: {a) fif the anno, by the effetto, to the gatto, in the 
gesto, with the idolo, on the leone, with the quadro, in the scudo, to 
the spirito, by the umore, of the zappatore. {b) of the anni, by the 
effetti, to the gatti, in the gesti, with the idoli, mi the leoni, with 
the quadri, in the scudi, to the spiriti, by the umori, of the zap- 
patori. {c) of the acqua, by the estate, to the notte, in the opera, 
mith the scala, on the tavola. {d) of the acque, by the estati, to 
the notti, in the opere, with the scale, 07i the tavole. 

4. Place the proper form of the indefinite article before each of 
these nouns [those in (a) are masculine, those in (b) are feminine]: 

(a) idilio, nome, oceano, ^peccHio, strido, teatro, uovo, zoccolo. 

(b) eta, maestra, pnda. spina, uva, valle. 



100 L t /^ ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

r4 5 

LESSON 4. NOUNS 

Stiidy 17-25 inclusive {omitting (a), (b) under 22, mid (a), (b), (c), 
(d) under 23]. 

EXERCISE 4 

1. State the gender and number of each of these combinations: gli 
animali, nei caffe, la canzone, colla fede, del fucile, gl' ingegni, i 
lupi, dagli onori, le parole, il poeta, sulle question!, lo scherzo, alio 
schioppo. 

2. Give the plural of each of these nouns [those in (a) are masculine, 
those in (b) are feminine]: {a) brindisi, cane, castello, despota, dolore, 
libro, lume, maestro, padrone, pericolo, podesta, problema, uomo. 
(b) bellezza, bonta, capitale, fonte, luna, moglie, origine, polvere, 
serie, sintesi, terra, vittoria. 

3. Give the plural of each of these combinations: V acqua, 
V artista (masculine), V anno, V azione (feminine), la barbaric, la 
bestia, il bue, il cavallo, la chiave, il cuore, la dama, il dono, 
r errore (m.), V estasi (/.), 1' eta, la fanciulla, la felicita, la 
festa, il frate, la gente, il giuri, la gravita, 1' idea, 1' inchiostro, 
r istante (m.), il lavoro, la lira, la mano, il mare, la metropoli, 
il ministro, la morale, della nazione, all' oggetto, nell' opinione 
(/.), della padrona, dal palazzo, sulla pelle, col prete, dal prof eta, 
della ragazza, al re, dal santo, sullo scaffale, della sete, nel 
sistema, nello stato, sulla superficie, dell' umore (w.), nella valla, 
sul vapore, della verita, colla virtu. 



LESSON 5. ESSERE 
Study 53 (a) [omitting the compound tenses] . 
EXERCISE 5 




sar^i 
saranno, s6no,TosCe, sarebbero, furono. 



LESSONS AND EXIJRCTSHS , : Wt 



2. Translate into Italian: we^ are, he will be, they were {past 
descriptive), they were (past absolute), I should be, she is, we were 
(desc.) , they would be, I was (abs.) , we shall be, we should be, being, 
it was (abs.), they will be, thou art, you are,2 thou wast (desc.), you 
were (desc), thou wast (abs.), you were (abs.), you will be, you would 
be, to be, been, let us be, be.^ 

1 English subject pronouns are to be omitted in translation, until other 
directions are given. 

2 English verbs which have 'you' as subject are to be translated by 
second person plural forms, until other directions are given. 

3 English imperatives without an expressed subject are to be translated 
by second person plural forms, until other directions are given. 

VOCABULARY 

giomale, m., newspaper. ragazza, girl. 

Giovanni, John. Roma, Rome. 

libro, book. scrivania, desk. 

padre, m., father. signora, lady. 

ragazzo, boy. tavola, table. 
signore, m., gentleman. 

• utmo, man. a,to,at,in.^ 

domani, tomorrow, 

casa, house, home. dove, ivhere. 

citta, city. gia, already. 

donna, woman. ieri, yesterday. 

Firenze, f., Florence. la, there. 

m^dre, f., mother. 6ggi, today. 

Maria, Mary. ora, now. 

Napoli, f., Naples. quando, when. 

p6rta, door. qui, here. 

1 English 'in' is ordinarily to be translated by in, but before the 
name of a city it is to be translated by a. 

3. Study these sentences: ^ i. II signore e il padre di Giovanni. 2. 
Dove siete ora? Sono qui. 3. Quando sara coi signori? 4. I libri 

^ The student should enable himself to translate the sentences, 
to read them aloud in Italian accurately and intelligently, and to trans- 
late them without reference to the book when they are read aloud 
by the instructor. 



102 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

dei ragazzi erano sulla tavola. 5. Domani saremo nella citta. 6. 
Sara qui oggi? 7. La donna e gia alia porta della casa. 8. 6ra e 
qui: domani ^'dove sara? 9. II giornale e la, sulla scrivania. 10. 
leri le signore erano a Napoli, oggi sono a Roma, domani saranno a 
Firenze. 

4. Translateinto Italian: i. The lady is Manx's mothe;:,,- 2. The 
girls wiU he Siere; tomorrow. 3. Tli^flBwspapers\ver? Cntfew^mes. 
^n\|ege^a^e^e^y%^|^ A^^^^&'^^T^'S- I ^}J^^ 
there \Mrtrierni^. 6. Wej^^^'^^reaHy^tmi^ door? 7.. Wouljn? 
-Dem tnefouse now? ^^^►^K's^atlfier is^^ 9. ^yhenwiir'' 

^ you l5e ^11 Naples? lor^^^^ay they a^nere, tomorrow meyllDi|^ 
there. ^ 

^ Use the past descriptive. 



LESSON 6. ADJECTIVES 

Study 26-34 inclusive. Learn the first twelve cardinal numerals, as 
given in 38. 

EXERCISE 6 

1. Give the feminine singular and the masculine and feminine 
plural of each of these adjectives: cattivo, fedele, forte, rosso, 
sempUce, vero. 

2. Insert the proper form of bello in each of these phrases: 
il — albero, il — cappello, il — fanciullo, il — ingegno, il — stato; 
i — alberi, i — cappelli, i — fanciulli, i — ingegni, i — stati. 

3. Place the proper form of Santo before each of these names: 
Agostino, Carlo, Elmo, Giovanni, Lorenzo. 

4. Insert the proper form of grande in each of these phrases: 
un — cappello, un — errore, un — fuoco, un — ingegno, un — 
stato. 

5. Insert the proper form of buono in each of these phrases: 
un — amico, un — cuore, un — fanciullo, un — ingegno, un -^ 
schioppo. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 



103 



VOCABULARY 



centro, centre. 
fi6re, m,, flower. 
fratello, brother. 
giardino, garden. 
tempo, time, weather. 

chiesa, church. 
lezione, f., lesson. 
sorella, sister. 
stanza, room. 
via, street. 

alto, high, tall. 

bello, beautiful, pretty, handsome, 

fine. 
facile, easy. 
felice, happy. 



francese, French. 

gentile, gentle, polite, kind. 

giovane, young. 

grande, great, large, big. 

interessante, interesting. 

italiano, Italian. 

molto, much; as adverb, 

much, very. 
piccolo, little, small. 
pdvero, poor. 
rosso, red. 
rotondo, round. 



ci, here, there.^ 
dopo, after, afterward. 
f6rse, perhaps. 
non,2 not. 



^ Ci is used when the * here ' or ' there ' is quite unemphatic, qui 
and la when the 'here' or 'there' bears some emphasis. Ci is called 
a conjunctive adverb, and its position is governed by special rules. 
Until other directions are given, it should be placed directly before 
the verb. 

2 Placed before the verb. 

6. Study these sentences:'^ i. Ci sono del bei fiori nel piccolo 
giardino. 2. Per i poveri non e facile essere felici. 3. La tavola 
rotonda era nel centro della stanza. 4. C e qualche giornale 
francese sulla scrivania. 5. Le vie di Napoli sono molto inte- 
ressanti. 6. Oggi siete piu felice che ieri. 7. Le tre signore 
francesi erano molto gentili. 8. La chiesa e piu alta della casa. 
9. II ragazzo piu giovane e il fratello di Maria. 10. Domani 
forse il tempo sara migliore. 

^ See the statement on p. 155. 

7. Translate into Italian: ^ i . The big red book is for John's brother. 
2. He is the happiest of the boys. 3. The lesson for tomorrow will 

^ See the statement on p. 171. 



104 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

be very easy. 4. The Italian newspaper was^ on the round table. 
5. The largest house is as high as the church. 6. Mary's four sisters 
will not be here after tomorrow. 7. The boys were^ more poHte 
when they were younger. 8. Yesterday the weather was fine. 9. 
The prettiest flowers are in the garden. 10. There are some interest- 
ing streets in the centre of the city. 2. \J^ ^hnJD AajB^ VxC 
/jr-wut/i-Ugg the past descriptive. 

2 Write this sentence in two ways, first using the partitive con- 
struction, then using qudlche. 



LESSON 7. AVERE 
Stidy 53 {h) {omitting the compound tenses] . 
EXERCISE 7 

1. Identify and translate: aveste, hanno, avreste, avremo, ebbi, 
avevi, avendo, avra, avuto, avrebbero, avevano, avrete, abbiamo, 
ebbero, hai, avranno. 

2. Translate into Italian: they will have, she had {past abs.), we 
should have, I had {past desc.), having, we have, thou wilt have, they 
have, let us have, you will have, we had {abs.), I should have. 

3. Translate: furono, ha, foste, avevate, sara, avete, essendo, 
ebbe, siate, avremmo, sarei, avemmo, sareste, aveva. 

4. Translate into Italian: I am, I have, you are, you have, he is, 
he has, we were {desc), we had {desc.), they were {desc), they had 
{desc), I was {abs.), I had {abs.), you were {abs.), you had {abs.), 
he was {abs.), he had {abs.), we shall be, we shall have, they would be, 
they would have. 

VOCABULARY ^ 

albero, tree. pranzo, dinner. 

anno, year. quadro, picture. 

giomo, day. salotto, parlor. 

invemo, winter. sole, m,, sun, sunlight. 

mese, m., month. teatro, theatre. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 105 

matita, pencil. scuro, dark. 

pazienza, patience. stretto, narrow. 

penna, pen. vero, true. 
rosa, rose. 

settimana, week. benche, although.^ 

stdria, history. e, and. 

ma, hut. 

caldo, hot, warm. o, or. 

freddo, cold. poi, then. 

importante, important. presto, soon, early. 

nu6vo, new. sempre, always. 

pieno, ftdl. soltanto, only. 

1 The verb of the clause introduced by benche is always in the 
subjunctive. 

5. Skidy these sentences: i. Avranno soltanto tre o quattro giomi 
a Firenze. 2. La chiesa piu interessante era in una via stretta e 
scura. 3. II giovane aveva sempre qualche libro italiano stilla scri- 
vania. 4. Benche le stanze non siano grandi, sono calde e piene di 
sole. 5. Abbiamo per domani delle lezioni molto facili. 6. Non ho 
una penna, ma Giovanni ha delle maitite. 7. Dopo pranzo le signore 
sarebbero nel salotto. 8. Poi avra delle tavole nuove. 9. II libro 
e una storia importante dei teatri di Napoli. 10. Oggi avro del 
giornali francesi e italiani. . ^ /j 

6. Translate into Italian: i. The trees are much higher than the 
houses. 2. A year has twelve months, a month has four weeks, and 
a week has seven days. 3. They have a large house with a beautiful 
garden. 4. Have patience, they will be here soon. 5. Although the 
room is small, it will not be cold in the winter. 6. The most beautiful 
flowers were large red roses. 7. He had ten books on the desk, and 
seven or eight on the round table. 8. Have you a pen or a good 
pencil? 9. It is a pretty theatre, it's true, but it isn't very large. 
10. The churches of the city were very beautiful; they had many 
interesting pictures. , 



106 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

LESSON 8. DEMONSTRATIVES AND INTERROGATIVES 

Study 42, 43. 

EXERCISE 8 

1. Place the proper form of quello before each of these nouns: albero, 
cappello, fanciullo, ingegno, stato, uccello; alberi, cappelli, fanciulli, 
ingegni, stati, uccelli. 

2. Translate into Italian: who is it? whom have you there? of 
whom are-you-speaking (parldte)? what is it? what have you? of 
what are you speaking? what book is that? which book is that? 
whose book is that? what a beautiful book! 

VOCABULARY 

biglietto, ticket. certo, certain. 

cappello, hat. corto, short. 

denaro, money. difficile, difficult. 

fanciullo, child. fortunate, fortunate. 

lavoro, work. necessario, necessary. 

numero, number. ogm,^ every. 

occhiali, m. pi., glasses. possibile, possible. 

studente, m., student. pronto, ready. 

verde, green. 
foglia, leaf. 

gita, trip, excursion. come, as, like. 

mano, f., hand. finalmente, finally, at last. 

mattina, morning. lunedi, Monday. 

Milano, f.,^ Milan. se, if.^ 

poesia, poem, poetry. si, yes. 

Venezia, Venice. trdppo, too, too much. 

1 Names of cities are regarded as feminine, whatever the ending. 

2 Invariable. 

^ The verb of the clause introduced by se is present indicative if 
the tense is present, past subjunctive if the tense is past. 

3. Study these sentences: i. Queste foglie sono piu belle di quel 
fiori. 2. Ho dei giornali e dei libri: questi sono per le signore, quelli 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 107 

per i signori. 3. Cio e possibile, ma non e certo. 4. Chi ha un padre 
come quelle e molto fortunate. 5. Chi e? £ quello studente fran- 
cese. 6. Che cosa avete in quella mano? Dei biglietti per una gita 
a Venezia. 7. Quale e il numero della casa di quel signore? 8. 
Quale lezione era la piu difficile? 9. Quanti quadri in quel salotto! 
10. Di chi e quel cappello verde? 

4. Translate into Italian: 1. What handsome children! Who are 
they? 2. Those poems are shorter than this one. 3. How much 
money would he have then? 4. At last he has what is necessary 
for the work. 5. These boys are here every morning. 6. Are 
you ready? Have you those tickets? 7. Which churches are more 
interesting, those of Venice or those of Milan? 8. That red is 
pretty. Yes, if it isn't too dark for the room. 9. How many 
will be here Monday? More than ten or twelve? 10. Whose 
glasses are these? Are they John's? 

LESSON 9. THE FIRST CONJUGATION 

Study 58, 59 [mnitting (a), (b)], 62,63 [omitting {a)-{d)\, the first 
sentence of 75, and the first sentence of 77 (a). 

EXERCISE 9 

1. Identify and translate: parlo, parlerete, parli, parlaste, parlate, 
parliamo, parlerei, parlerai, parlino, parlera, parlai, parlavano. 

2. Translate into Italian: I spoke, she would speak, we were 
speaking, I shall speak, they spoke, speak, let us speak, let him 
speak, speaking, they speak, we should speak, he spoke. 

VOCABULARY 

baule, m,, trunk. paniere, m., basket. 

esame, m., examination. poeta, m., pod. 
forestiere, m., foreigner. 

guanto, glove. chiave, f., key. 

momento, moment. galleria, gallery. 

palazzo, palace. stazione, f., station. 

pane, m., bread. iiniversita, university. 



108 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

amare, to love. guardare, to look, look at, watch. 

aspettare, to wait, wait for. lavorare, to work. 

cantare, to sing. passare, to pass. 

comprare, to huy. telefonare, to telephone. 

costare, to cost. tomare, to come hack, return. 

desiderare, to desire. trovare, to find. 

entrare, to enter, go in, come In. visitare, to visit. 

3. Translate: compriamo, costerebbe, entrava, tomera, deside- 
rate, trovaste, entreranno, amerebbero, torni, trovato, trovati, 
comprammo, guarda, guardai, amarono, trovando, telefono, 
lavorereste, aspettano, cantino. 

4. Translate ifito Italian: it will cost, I waited, buying, they 
would watch, she came in, they returned, I should telephone, 
he loved, sing, we found, let him work. 

5. Study these sentences: i. Comprero un baule, se non costa 
troppo. 2. Quando ci entrammo, guardavano quel bel quadro 
degli alberi. 3. Quanto costano questi guanti? 4. Se non 
lavorasse, non passerebbe gU esami. 5. Parlava delle poesie di 
quel poeta francese. 6. Lunedi visitammo 1' universita di Napoli. 
7. Che cosa cantavano quel ragazzi nella via? 8. Aspetti un 
momento: non sono pronto. 9. Non entro nel palazzo, benche 
avesse le chiavi. 10. Chi piu ha, piu desidera. 

6. Translate into Italian: i. Look at^ that girl with the basket 
full of roses. 2. They were waiting for that foreigner. 3. You 
will find some 2 interesting pictures in that gallery. 4. Did you 
telephone to that French gentleman? 5. With whom did you 
come back from the station? 6. I went in, although he was 
working. 7. Let's wait for^ John: he will be here soon. 8. Let 
him buy the bread, and then come back. 9. Where did she find 
those keys? 10. If I find the money, I'll telephone. 

1 Do not use a preposition after an Italian verb which may be in 
itself equivalent to an English verb and preposition. 

2 Use qiidlche. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 109 

LESSON 10. RELATIVES AND POSSESSIVES 

Study AA [^omitting (a), (b), (c)], 45 [omitting {a)-{e)], 59 (a). Read 
44(a),(5),(c) 5d{b),Q3{a),(b),{c). 

EXERCISE 10 

1. Insert the proper relative pronoun in each of these phrases: il 
ragazzo — e qui, i libri — trovai, i ragazzi con — tornai, il libro 
di — parlo, i libri — sono sulla tavola, il ragazzo — cercavamo. 

2. Translate into Italian: my garden, his house, our books, your 
pencils, their garden, my house, her books, our pencils, your 
garden, their house, my books, his pencils, our garden, your 
house, their books. 

VOCABULARY 

cugino, cousin. arrivare, to arrive. 

mercato, market. bisognare,^ to be necessary. 

ombrello, umbrella. cercare, to seek, search, look for, try, 

pittore, m., painter. cominciare, to begin. 

romanzo, 7iovel. mangiare, to eat. 

menare, to lead, take. 

finestra, window. pagare, to pay. 

fotograf la, photograph. portare, to carry, bring. 

mela, apple. studiare, to study. 
pera, pear. 

testa, head. bene, well. 

ecco, here is, here are, there isj 
giallo, yellow. there are? 

modemo, modern. perche, why, because. 

tutto, all. stamane, this morning. 

ultimo, last, latest. subito, at once. 

1 Impersonal. 

2 When 'there is,' 'there are,' are quite unemphatic (as in 'There 
are some pretty flowers in the garden'), or when the 'is' or 'are' is 
Emphatic (as in 'There are men who don't believe it'), they are to 
be translated by c' e or ci sono. When the ' there ' is emphatic (as 
in ' There is John') they are to be translated by ecco. ' Here is,' 
' here are,' are always to be translated by icco. C e and ci sono 
correspond to the French il y a; ecco to the French void and voild. 



110 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

3. Give all the forms of pagare in which an h is inserted. 

4. Translate into Italian: I search, we search, let him search, I 
shall search; I pay, we pay, let him pay, I shall pay; I begin, we 
begin, let him begin, I shall begin; I eat, we eat, let him eat, I 
shall eat; I study, we study, let him study, I shall study. 

5. Study these sentences: i. E un uomo che trova subito quel che 
cerca. 2. C erano all' ultima iinestra due signori, uno dei quali... 
era quel forestiere con cui parlai ieri. 3. II palazzo che v isitamm Q 
stamane e uno dei piii interessanti della citta. 4. La loro sorella 
portava sulla testa un gran paniere giallo pieno di mele e di pere. 

5. Mangeremo quel che troveremo, e pagheremo bene. 6. II quadro 
che guardavano nel salotto e di uno dei nostri migliori pittori italiani 
moderni. 7. Ecco quel signore. Perche desidera parlare ai vostri 
fratelli? 8. Che bei fiori! Sono tutti del vostro giardino? 9. La 
via piu stretta e quella che mena dalla chiesa di San Giovanni al 
mercato. 10. Bisognava aspettare Maria, che cercava 1' ombrello. 

6. Translate into Italian: i. Who is the tall gentleman who arrived 
this morning? 2. Which of the lessons that you studied yesterday 
is the easiest? 3. This novel is more interesting than the one that 
he brought from the city. 4. My glasses are larger and rounder 
than his. 5. What are you looking for? Those tickets that I 
bought this morning, 6. Here is the umbrella I found at the door 
the day that you were here. Is it yours? 7. Whose is that poem 
of which they were speaking? 8. There are the men they were 
waiting for: why don't they begin? 9. Which of those three 
trunks is yours? This one, the largest. 10. Here is what he 
brought, — what is it? It's the latest photograph of my 
cousin. 

LESSON 11. THE SECOND AND THIRD CONJUGATIONS 

Study 60. 

EXERCISE 11 

1. Identify and translate: crede, crederete, creda, credero, credeste, 
credete, credetti, crediamo, crederei, credettero, crederai, credei, 
credera, credevano, crederemo. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 



111 



2. Translate into Italian: I believed, she would believe, we were 
believing, believe, they believed, let us believe, let him believe, be- 
lieving, they believe, we should believe, he believed, you believe. 



VOCABULARY 



bottone, m., button. 
caffe, m., cofee. 
ferro, iron. 
lume, m., light. 
onore, m., honor. 
servitore, m., servant. 

battaglia, battle. 

cdsa, thing. 

frase, f., sentence. 

preghiera, prayer, entreaty. 

salute, f., health. 

torre, f., tower. 

villa, villa. 

vista, sight, view. 

vita, life. 

volta, time.'^ 



godere, to enjoy. 
temere, to fear, be afraid, 

bittere, to beat, strike. 
cedere, to yield. 
combattere, to fight. 
credere, to believe, think. 
perdere, to lose. 
premere, to press. 
ricevere, to receive, get. 
ripetere, to repeat. 

ancora, yet, still, again, even. 
che, conjunction, that. 
fuorche, except. 
meglio, better. 
mentre, while. 



' ^ ' Time ' is ordinarily to be translated by tempo; but when it has 
the sense of * occasion ' (as in ' three or four times ') it is to be trans- 
lated by volta. 

3. Translate: battiamo, temeva, perdera, godete, ricevei, cedet- 
tero, combatte, premendo, ripeta, cederebbe, riceveste, goderanno, 
perderebbero, temano, perduto, perduti, tememmo, combatte, 
perderono, ricevono. 

4. Translate into Italian: he will lose, I enjoyed, fearing, they 
would beat, she received, let them yield, they fought, repeat, 
they are pressing. 

5. Study these sentences: i. Oggi e feKce: ricevera il denaro per quel 
quadro della signora coi guanti. 2. Benche combattessero bene, per- 
dettero la battaglia, e molti perdettero la vita. 3. Avremo quel che 
bisogna, non temete. 4. Non ho ricevuto ancora le mie fotografie. 



112 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

5. Ripetevano ancora quel che avevano gia ripetuto molte volte. 6. 
Nonhostudiatolalezione: ieri perdei i miei libri. 7. Se non tornasse, 
perderebbe ogni cosa. 8. Credeva che fosse meglio essere temuto 
che amato. 9. Tutto e perduto fuorche 1' onore. 10. Bisogna 
battere il ferro mentre e caldo. 

6. Translate into Italian: i. She pressed a button, and the servant 
came in with the coffee. 2. The students had to {a) repeat the sentence 
three or four times. 3. The trees were losing the last red and yellow 
leaves. 4. If I receive the money, I'll telephone at once to my 
father. 5. Finally she came back and repeated that aria from the 
Trovatdre (m.). 6. Although she is still young, she does not enjoy 
good health. 7. That room has only one small window, but it gets 
light from the parlor. 8. From their villa they enjoy a beautiful 
view of the towers of the city. 9. If he doesn't yield to their 
entreaties, he won't yield to mine. 10. They think that he is^ 
even poorer than his cousin. 

^ Use the subjunctive. 



LESSON 12. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS 

Stmly 46, 47 [omitting 3 and (c)], 48 [omitting (a), (b), (d), (e), 
andff), but including (c)] . 

Sy EXERCISE 12 

1. Translate into Italian: he finds me, he finds thee, he finds him, 
he finds her, he finds it (m.), he finds it (/.), he finds us, he finds you, 
he finds them (m.), he finds them (/.); I find myself, thou findest thy- 
self, he finds himself, she finds herself, we find ourselves, you find 
yourself, you find yourselves, they (m.) find themselves, they (/.) 
find themselves; we find each other, you find each other, they find 
each other; to find him, finding him, let us find him, find him, do not 
find him, finding himself. 

2. Translate into Italian: he speaks to me, he speaks to thee, he 
speaks to him, he speaks to her, he speaks to us, he speaks to you, he 
speaks to them (w.), he speaks to them (/.); I speak to myself, thou 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 113 

speakest to thyself, he speaks to himself, she speaks to herself, we 
speak to ourselves, you speak to yourself, you speak to yourselves, 
they (m.) speak to themselves, they (/.) speak to themselves; we 
speak to each other, you speak to each other, they speak to each 
other; to speak to him, speaking to him, let us speak to him, let's not 
speak to him, speak to him, speaking to himself. 

3. Translate: lo trovai, le parlano, mi parlerebbe, ripetetelo, vi 
aspettavano, li compraste?, cediamo loro, la guardavano?, gli tele- 
fonero, si trovo, lo perdemmo, cercatela, le riceverono, lo perdette, 
trovarvi, ci visiteranno, ci visiteremo, temendoH, non le parlate, 
ci ceda, vi telefono, studiamolo, si cercano, compratolo, li 
portate. 

4. Study these sentences: i. Se non mi trovate qui, aspettatemi coi 
biglietti alia porta della stazione. 2. Che cosa cerca? Le chiavi di 
quel baule. Le trovo ieri, poi le perdette ancora. 3. Si ripetevano 
le frasi della lezione. 4. Che ragazzo! Comprare cinque mele, e 
mangiarle subito! 5. Quanto gli costerebbe un cappello come quello? 
6. Parlava come se ci fosse stato. 7. Quando ricevero il denaro, vi 
paghero. 8. Di che cosa le parlava nel salotto? 9. Dove ci mena? 
Alia chiesa di cui vi parlo quel pittore. 10. Ecco quell' ombrello: 
temeva che lo avesse perduto. 

5. Translate into Italian: i. When he came back from the 
market, he brought me some^ apples. 2. When will she begin to 
(a) sing to them? 3. If you study the lesson, you will find it 
easy. 4. If he had them, he would bring them to my father. 
5. When they came in, he was beginning to (a) eat it. 6. Here 
are the books I lost yesterday. Who found them? 7. We were 
here this morning, but she did not receive us. 8. I waited for 
them three days in Naples. 9, Now that you have it again, 
don't lose it. 10. Whose photograph is this? It's of my cousin. 
I received it yesterday. 

1 Use the partitive construction. 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



LESSON 13. CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS (continued) 



Shidy 46-50 inclusive. 



EXERCISE 13 



1. Translate each of these phrases in two ways: glielo porto, gliela 
porto, glieli porto, gliele porto, gliene parlo, portateglielo, 
parlategliene. 

» - l^ranslate into Italian: he leads him to me, he leads him to thee. 



heSeads himlonim, he leads him to her, he leads him to us, he leads 
him to you, he leads him to them; he leads her to me, he leads her to 
thee, he leads her to him, he leads her to her, he leads her to us, he 
leads her to you, he leads her to them; he leads them (m.) to me, 
he leads them to thee, he leads them to him, he leads them to 
her, he leads them to us, he leads them to you, he leads them to 
them; he leads them (/.) to me, he leads them to thee, he leads them 
to him, he leads them to her, he leads them to us, he leads them 
to you, he leads them to them. , n ^j- P 

3. Translate hUo Italian: h^ptdtksM^tXo i^e,h^^^Y)Q3k^tiAtto 
thee, ]\m^^ Ir^^T'^"'' ^P%sR'^*^^J^r, h^sp^a^^fe iKo 
us, he^^eais of il>(fio you; he speal^/ ot if^o^thenlL'^^ 



4. Translate into Italian: I repeat it to myself, thou repeatest 
it to thyself, he repeats it to himself, she repeats it to herself, we 
repeat it to ourselves, you repeat it to yourself, you repeat it to 
yourselves, they repeat it to themselves; we repeat it to each other, 
you repeat it to each other, they repeat it to each other. 

VOCABULARY 



automobile, m., automobile. 
complimento, compliment. 
ritardo, delay; in ritardo, late. 
treno, train. 

cortesia, courtesy. 



notte, f., night. 
occasione, f., occasion. 
6ra, hour. 

^tro, other. 
stesso, same. 



lira, lira, coin worth about 20 cents. venti, twenty. 



yw'. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 115 

chiitmare, to call; c6mje si chiama? mostrare, to show. 

what is the name of? presentare, to present. 

domandare, to ask.^ prestare, to lend. 

incontrare, to meet. raccontare, to narrate, tell, tell 
insegnare, to teach. ahout.^ 

lasciare, to leave, let.^ ringraziare, to thank. 

oiandare, to send. spiegare, to explain. 

^ The personal object of domandare or raccontare is indirect: gW 
do7tianddi, 'I asked him'; le raccontdi, 'l told her.' 

2 Lasciare is to be used in translating ' let ' only when the idea is 
one of permission rather than one of command. For example, if 
'let him speak' really means 'l command that he speak,' it is to be 
translated pdrli; if it really means 'allow him to speak,' it is to 
be translated lascidtelo parldre. 

5. Translate: vi aspetto, ne cercava, ce lo cantarono, ne parlaste, 
non ne avrebbe, eccoli, ,portandoglielo, ripeteteglielo, gllene parlero, 
bisogna portarglielo, eccola, ce li cedette, portiamogliene, me le 
mando?, glielo prestai, ve lo spiegheranno, mandatemeli, glielo 
prestino, mi si presenta, gli si presentano, se lo presentano, lo 
mostrai loro, ve ne mandarono?, me lo spieghi, glielo presterete? 

6. Study these sentences: i. Quell' ombrello era il suo, e stamane 
glielo mandai. 2. Se non credesse quel che gli raccontammo, non 
glielo ripeterebbe. 3. Cominciava a domandargli perche ne avesse 
parlato agli altri. 4. Ve lo spieghera quando gli si presentera una 
buona occasione. 5. Lo ringraziai della cortesia, e gli raccontai 
tutto. 6. Ogni volta che s' incontrano, si ripetono gli stessi compli- 
menti. 7. Come si chiama quel giovane che v' insegna il francese? 
8. II treno era in ritardo, e 1' aspettarono un' ora e piu. 9. Ora 
lasciateli studiare; parleremo dopo. 10. Ho a pagare subito, e non 

ho una lira: Giovanni ha ricevuto oggi venti lire, non e vero| ^ ^Me - 
ne presterebbe dieci? OA^l ^ui^ C^ I 

1 non e vera? 'hasn't he?' >^ , f^ /rt \ k r "ftLi. .^a/ 

7. /Translate into Italian: i.jle is myjihe garckn. Call Jiirn 7-^, . 
they^^e .tobkWlirr Hi^^ 2. Hebr^nfSl lii^iself to me^yest^day.^ "? 
l^Vehe^ie, hini 6:ph .v^ungtr trian the^Others. 3'. Where are my 

■penl^its?^ cMn't'l fe^ve 'tlienTon'tlie desk? 4. If he loses it, it will 



y^l-ccti^ MA^M^pCU. %^ ^ (^-x^^ 




on too d^Ea3t, he 



1 No preposition is used between hisogndre and a dependent infinitive. 



LESSON 14. 
Study 61. 



THE FOURTH CONJUGATION 



EXERCISE 14 



1. Identify and translate: fiini, finirete, finiscono, finiro, finiste, 
finivano, finii, finiranno, finirei, finisci, fimrono, finirai, finite, finiremo, 
finisca, finivo. 

2. Translate into Italian: I finished, she would finish, we were 
finishing, he is finishing, finish, they finished, let us finish, finishing, 
they finish, we should finish, he finished, you finish, let him finish. 



VOCABULARY 



autunno, autumn. 
colore, m., color. 
pericolo, danger. 
spedale, m., hospital. 
vento, wind. 
vestito, dress. 

cura, care. 
stofifa, stuf, goods. 



applaudire, to applaud. 
awertire, to warn. 
capire, to understand. 
divertire, to amuse. 
dormire, to sleep. 
ferire, to wound. 
fuggirC; to flee. 
garantire, to guarantee. 
partire, to depart, leave.^ 
preferire, to prefer. 
restituire, to give back. 
sentire, to feel, hear. 
servire, to serve. 



cattivo, bad. 
chiaro, clear, bright. 
tanto, so much.^ 

1 ' So much ' is to be translated by tanto; not by the separate words 
for 'so' and 'much.' 

2 When 'leave' is transitive, it is to be translated by lascidre; when 
intransitive, by partire. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 117 

almeno, at least. senza, without. 

invece, instead. stanotte, last night. 

nondimeno, nevertheless. stasera, this evening. 

prima di, before. subito che, as soon as.^ 

^ 'As soon asfMs to be translated by subito che; not by the sepa- 
rate words for 'as' and *soon.' 

N 

3. Give the present indicative of each of these verbs: capire, divertire, 
dormire, fuggire, garantire, preferire. 

4. Translate: -'dormiamp^ capirebbe, serviva, avvertira, applau- 
dite, garantiscano, diverte, fuggirono, ferisce, servendo, preferimmo, 
fuggii, avvertito, ferite, preferirebbero, divertono, sentiste, servi- 
ranno, senta, capiscono. 

5. Translate into Italian: he will amuse, I was sleeping, fleeing, 
they prefer, we understood, she served, they will applaud, you fled, 

I should guarantee, sleep. 

y. '■ 

6. Study these sentences: i. SubitD che me ne parlo, capii che 
r aveva perduto. 2. Se ci serve belie, le pagheremo venti lire la set-' 
timana. 3. Glielo restituiranno subito che torna. 4. L' avvertii 
che c' era pericolo, ma parti nondimeno. 5. Se si divertono ora 
invece di lavorare, domani avranno a lavorare invece di divertirsi. 
6. Aveva cantato m61to bene, e tutti 1' applaudivano. 7. Che vento 
stanotte! Lo sentiste? Si, non dormii un' ora in tutta la notte. 
8. II ferito fu portato alio spedale. 9. Partirono senza ringraziarci, 
benche avessimo cercato tanto di divertirli. 10. II mese comincio 
con una settimana di bel tempo — giorni chiari e caldi — ma fini 
con dieci giorni f reddi e scuri. r c^ 

7. Translate into Italian: i. tf he doesn't guarantiee it for, a year 
at least, we won't buy it. 2. Although he heard thenl 'speak,"lie ; 
fled like the' wind. 3. I explained it to him with much care," 
but he doesn't understand it yet. 4. If he is still sleeping, he 
won't finish that lesson. 5. The trees are losing the last leaves: the 
autumn is ending, and the winter is beginning. 6. Did you hear 
what he told them? 7. This room is warm, but in the parlor we 
felt the cold. 8. We shall leave this evening if the weather isn't . 



118 



ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



too bad. 9. What goods and what color does she prefer for the 
dress? 10. When will you finish that work? I shall not have the 
time to (di) finish it before Monday. 



Study 61. 



LESSON 15. DISJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS 



EXERCISE 15 



1. Translate into Italian, expressing the subject pronouns (use 
lui, lei, and loro for the third person) : I am, thou hast, he speaks, 
she fears, we finish, you feel, they are, I had, thou didst enter, he 
yielded, she understood, we slept, you were, they had, I shall pay, 
thou wilt receive, he will guarantee, she will depart, we shall be, 
you will have, they will enter. 

VOCABULARY 



awocato, lawyer. 
bicchiere, m., glass. 
facchino, porter. 
latte, m., milk. 
mezzogiomo, noon. 



accanto a, beside. 
contro, contro di,i against. 
davanti a, in front of. 
dietro, dietro a,^ behind. 
secondo, according to. 



ana, air. 
lettera, letter. 
liberta, liberty, freedom. 
moglie, f., wife. 
seggiola, chair. 
valigia, valise, bag. 

aiutare, to help. 
rest^e, to stay. 



avanti, forward; come in.^ 

cosi, so. 

eh, eh. 

mai, ever, never; non . . . mai,' 

never. 
nemmeno, non . . . nemmeno,' 

not even. 
perfettamente, perfectly. 
prima, first. 



1 The compound form is used before a disjunctive pronoun, the 
simple form in other cases. 

2 As an exclamation. 

3 When mdi (meaning ' never ') or tiemmeno follows the verb, non is 
placed before the verb. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 



119 



2. Study these sentences: i. Portate a questo signore un caffe, e a 
me un bicchiere di latte. 2. Se loro ce V hanno raccontato a noi, 
perche non glielo racconteremmo noi a lui? 3. Felici voi, che godete 
quell' aria e quella liberta, mentre 10 resto qui in citta a lavorare 
come un facchino! 4. Chi e? Sono 10. Chi, 10? lo, Giovanni. 
Siete voi, eh? avanti. 5. Se non glielo spiega bene, gli e^^ che non lo 
capisce bene nemmeno lui. 6. A quel teatro me non mi ci troverete 
mai piu. 7. Porta sempre con se una valigia tutta plena di libri, ma 
poi non ne guarda nemmeno uno. 8. Lui le parlava contro di me 
— e 10 avevo lavorato tanto per lui! 9. Quando entrai, lei era qui; 
accanto a lei, Giovanni, che le parlava di se stesso, come sempre; e 
davanti a lui, in questa seggiola, la piccola sorella di lei, che guardava 
ora r uno ora 1' altra. 10. Quando lo perdei, loro mi aiutarono a 

3. Trq^^la'^ ...'--- -.- 
him/ 



2 



(mm 



Han: ^ . . They^ 
s n4 caU him, and show . 
" sked vou jf he 



telefilione^'to yoif, and a^ed you ai he, woma arrive 
tho^ij: X / tninK tljat you wilier e^ive it tomorro 



"•^itinE; ■'^'''-^ 



oke of it tQ us, to ro,u, and to / 
iny that letter. 3* /X myself^ 
uld arrive thera., before 
, Ii yp^t we 



Jiere with 



'tney will leave. 7. He was speakmg to us, out. we 
- wks^spHking^aJiem. 



tomorrow. 5^, it ymc weri 
appy. jq. IF he.sta 



arrivea tnere an 



em, t'KL^wmiftrbeApenectlyn^ 

wa^ speaking^ojis, out we. thought thj^n^^ 

8.^He*an& his cmMiTleltSefore'us, but w©- ' 
' ... ^ . . ■\>^^JLi^ 

md her, ^the two girMq pehijid — 



hour before, 
stayineat aome because the 
wi^e^'cSfhesTlii^Srst; HHeh^ 
them. 



them. ,9. According to him, she W^jjV 
/eaj^ry(was*'so l^d^^- 1^0^ T^^Ia^^^^^ ^ 

her, vjthe 

M mail} 



•1 ^ters with flie^mnfe; aim ^afly'tlie lawyer liimseu. 



LESSON 16. COMPOUND TENSES 
Study the compound tenses in 53 (a) and 53 (6), 54 [omitting (c)-(h)l^ 



w 



the second sentence in 75. 



EXERCISE 16 



1. Identify and translate: ho trovato, aveva trovato, ebbe trovato, 
avremo trovato, avreste trovato; sono trovato, era trovato, fu tro- 
vato, saremo trovati, sarebbero trovati; sono stato trovato,^ era state 
trovato, saremo stati trovati, sareste stato trovato; sono tomato, era 



120 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

tomato, fu tornato, saremo tornati, sareste tornati; mi sono divertito, 
si era divertito, ci saremo divertiti, si sarebbero divertiti. 

2. Translate each of these phrases in six ways {as true reflexive, mas- 
culine and Jeminine; as substitute for the passive, masculine, feminine, 
and neuter; a?td as indefinite) : si presenta, si trova, si servi, si perdera. 

3. Translate each of these phrases in three ways: (as true reflexive, 
as reciprocal, and as substitute for the passive) : si capiscono, si chia- 
mano, si trovarono. 

4. Translate: V hanno avuto, c' era stato, V avro cominciato, mi 
avrebbe telefonato, siete ferito, vi siete ferito, vi furono trovati, gli 
saranno restituiti, gli si restituiranno, saremmo presentati loro, gli 
e spiegato, gli si spiega, gli e stato spiegato, gli si e spiegato, ci siamo 
spiegati, ce lo siamo spiegati, si erano incontrati, siamo arrivati, vi 
fu mostrato, gli si presentera, le era stato raccontato, le si era rac- 
contato, si e presentata, si sono presentate, li avrebbe aspettati, 
ci ha capito, ci avevano ringraziati, si era perduto, erano fuggiti, 
si e ferito, vi sono arrivati, ci erano stati mandati, ci si erano man- 
dati, vi aveva aiutato, essendo temuto, ci si spiega, glielo avevano 
raccontato, vi avremmo ringraziato. 

5. Translate into Italian: we have found you, we have been there, 
they had had it, he will have eaten it, we should have sent it to 
you, he had ^ arrived, they are received,^ they would have presented 
themselves to us, you would have found each other, they had^ 
come in, he had left them, they would have ^ fled, it has been told 
to me.^ 

^ Translate by the proper form of essere. 
2 Translate this phrase in two ways. 

6. Sttcdy these sentences: i. Sono certo che se ci fosse stato cogli 
altri, ce ne avrebbe parlato. 2. Perche non ha cominciato a cercare 
quel che perdette? 3. Quando loro saranno tornati, noi saremo gia 
partiti. 4. Non li avra finiti prima di domani. 5. Non ha mai 
visitato quel giardino? Gliene abbiamo parlato tante volte. 6. Le 
seggiole che mi si mostravano erano molto belle, e le avrei com- 
prate se avessi avuto il denaro. 7. Mi si era raccontato che lui ci 
fosse stato, ma non 1' avevo creduto. 8. Se hanno ricevuto la sua 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 121 

lettera, saranno gia partiti per la citta. 9. Lui aveva temuto che 
cedessero alle nostre preghiere. 10. Si mangia a mezzogiorno, e 
un' ora dopo si torna al lavoro. 

7. Translate into lialim: i. If he had had any, he would have sent 
us some. 2. Being called, I entered, and found myself, where I had 
been t he day be fore. 3. Thar fe^'f'hat he had lost has been given 
back to him. 4 . Let him explain to her why they hadn't telephoned 
to her. 5. I would have sent it to you if I had found it. 6. As soon 
as he had called them, he came back into the house. 7. When I 
arrived, they had ^ already left. 8. If they had begun them, they 
would have finished two or three of them. 9. He told me that he 
had ^ arrived there before the others. 10. 1 should have preferred 
a room with at least two windows. 

1 Translate by the proper form of essere. 



LESSON 17. REVIEW 

EXERCISE 17 

1. Pronounce Exercise A on p. 150. 

2. Give the plural of each of these cdmhinations: all' awocato 
gentile, che bel salotto!, col 16 ro fratello, dalla sua bella mano, 
dell' uomo felice, il gran baule, il mio cugino, il poeta francese, il 
suo bell' ombrello, la citta moderna, la giovane moglie, 1' altra fi- 
nestra, lo stesso ragazzo, nell' universita nuova, quale stanza?, quel 
buon padre, quello studente italiano, quel piccolo caffe, quel ser- 
vitore fedele, questa lezione difficile, sulla torre alta. 

3. Translate: se lui ci aiutasse, erano stati amati, aspettandole,^ 
1' avevamo, ne avrai, li hanno battuti, si capisce, lo cedemmo lore,' 
lo comprano, si erano divertiti, ci entrkrono, se loro non ci fossero, 
s' incontrarono, glielo mandai, lui lo mangera, ve ne avevo parlato, 
chi li perdette?, che cosa preferirebbe lei?, se lo premesse, ci sarei 
rcstato, le telefonavo, lasciatolo, benche ci capisca, ve lo restituira, 
non r hanno ricevuta, ripeteteglielo, vi sareste, glielo restituii, non 
gli cedano, siete chiamato, se lo spiegheranno, sono stati ricevuti, gli 
si e restituito, le sara spiegato, si e perduto, ve lo manderanno, 



122 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

glieli avrebbero mostrati, se vi avessero sentito, la servano, benche 
lo temano, lui li awerti, non gliene parlate, ce lo spiegarono, gli si 
erano presentati. 

4. Translate into Italian: there they are, we shall be there, if 
they should buy it, they would carry it to him, he will applaud 
them, / feared it, are they fighting there?, they are not fleeing, we 
should have gone in, they would have had it, did he have any?, 
although they had lost it, will they pay me?, I should prefer it, 
what has he received?, wait for us. 

5. Study these proverbs: ^ i. A ogni uccello suo nido e bello. 2. 
Buona compagnia, mezza la via. 3. Chi cerca, trova. 4. Chi 
dorme non piglia pesci. 5. Chi ha fiorini trova cugini. 6. Chi non 
lavora non mangia. 7. Chi s' aiuta, il ciel 1' aiuta. 8. Chi tardi 
arriva, male alloggia. 9. Gli assenti han sempre torto. 10. II buon 
vino non ha bisogno di frasca. 11. II passo piu duro e quello del- 
r uscio. 12. La fame non ha legge. 13. La fine corona 1' opera. 
14. La notte porta consiglio. 15. L' aurora indora. 16. L' eta porta 
senno. 17. Meglio tardi che mai. 18. Non v' e rosa senza spine. 
19. Oggi a me, domani a te. 20. Scopa nuova scopa bene. 

^ Many of the sentences from this point on contain words not given 
in the preceding vocabularies. See the statements on pp. 155 and 171. 

6. Translate into Italian: i. ^ Whose ideas are those? They/^re 
not vours, Lhope. 2. IfyoiThacm't toft it to me yourself JTs^^oulanr 
havpt^ig^d it. 3. If you haven't the money, I'U *lSiiu it to you 

"wim pl^sure. 4. I was afraid that you were ^ wrong, but according 
to my cousin's letter you are right. 5. How many times has he 
repeated it to you? 6. Whom are they calling? I thought that they 
were^ all here. 7. He was studying there at the desk, and didn't 
even look at them when they came in. 8. Although there are not so 
many churches here, they are more interesting than those we visited 
yesterday. 9. Why didn't he let us go in? Probably because it 
was too early. 10. Who was it that telephoned to you? That 
gentleman to whom I telephoned this morning. He is going back 
tomorrow to Venice. 

^ Use the subjunctive. 



a<!Yv_ 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 123 

LESSON 18. THE MODERN POLITE FORM OF DIRECT 
ADDRESS 

Study 52. 

EXERCISE 18 

1. Translate in two ways {as third person feminine, and as used in 
direct address) : lei e qui, con lei, la chiamavano, chiamo lei, le par- 
lero, e certa, e restata, lei cantava, dopo di lei, la ringrazio, guar- 
davano lei, le telefonerei, sara fortunata, si e divertita. 

2. Translate in three ways (as third person masculiite, as third 
person feminine, and as used in direct address) : era la, 1' aiutero, 
glielo mandai, si trova, se lo ripete, parli, mi parli, e gentile, il suo 
libro, studiava, 1' incontrai, gliene ha parlato, si diverte, ceda, si 
spieghi, era giovane, i suoi occhiali. 

3. Translate in two ways {as third person, and as used in direct 
address): sono qui, loro erano pronti, contro di loro, li chiamava, 
le incontrai, ricevero loro, parlero loro, si trovano, se lo ripetono, 
parlino, mi parlino, sono certi, erario entrate, il loro treno. 

4. Replace these phrases by the corresponding phrases in modern 
polite usage, supposing one person to he addressed: sarete qui, voi ci 
capite, secondo voi, vi trovero, cercavo voi, vi applaudivano, ve lo 
presto, vi siete ferito, ve lo ripeteste, guardate, sentitemi, il vostro 
ombrello. 

5. Replace the phrases in section 4 by the corresponding phrases 
in modern polite usage, supposing two men to be addressed. 

Note. — In the remainder of this exercise, and in all the following 
exercises, use only the modern polite form of direct address, and sup- 
pose the EngHsh ' you ' to be singular, unless there is some indication 
that it refers to more than one person. 

6. Translate into Italian: you are working, you will sing, for you, 
I'm waiting for you, I will serve you, he will telephone to you, I was 
speaking to you, did he send it to you?, you were explaining yourself, 
did you repeat it to yourself?, stay, thank him, you are happy, you 
have returned, your brother. 



124 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

7. Translate the first five sentences in Ex. 14, section 6, and the 
fi^rst five in Ex. 16, section 6, supposing them to he used in direct 
address. 

8. Translate into Italian the first five sentences in Ex. 15, section 3, 
and the first five wTEi^ 17, section 6, using the modern polite form oj 
direct address. 




LESSOir im ANDARE AND FARE 

Study 92 through'^^^Eau^;\lso 48 (a), (5),(e), 54 (h),56{b), 78(J), 

EXERCISE 19 

1. Translate: ando, andrete, vanno, andaste, va', era andato, ci 
andrei, vada, andavano, sono andati, vi andai, andavo, sarebbe 
andata, vattene, si va. 

2. Translate into Italian: we went, you ^ go, they will go, you went 
there, he will go, he has gone there, they are going away, it goes, we 
should have gone, go, she went away, let them go. 

^ Remember the directions given in the Note on p. 123. 

3. Translate: faccia, faceste, fatto, facciamo, fecero, aveva fatto, 
faresti, fo, li fece, fara, lo facciano, si fa, e fatto, lo si fa, fateli entrare, 
la fa leggere,! le fa leggere la lettera, gliela fa leggere, me lo fece trovare. 

^ Translate this phrase in two ways. X u 

4. Translate into Italian: I did, he will do, they are making, doing, 
they would make, make, you made, we,,ha,ye,made, let them make, 
they will do it, we made them, they axo^aafe, I'll have him sing, I'll 

^av^it sung, I'll have him sing it. 

/^5. Study these sentences: i. Mi faccia il favore di chiamarlo subito. 
2, Chi va piano va sano^ e va lontano. 3. Facciamo una partita al 
biliardo? Oggi no, ho troppo da fare, 10. 4. Se lo perde, glielo fa- 
ranno cercare. 5. I suoi affari andrebbero meglio se non amasse 
tanto il dolce far niente. 6. Quando lui torno da fare il soldato, lei 

* saiio, 'safely,' Predicate adjectives are often adverbial in force. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 125 

si era fatta sposa con un altro. 7. "Ah si?" fece lui, "lasci fare a 
mc." 8. Fafreddo: pcrche non fanno un p6' di fuoco qui? 9. Dopo 
faranno molte nuove conoscenze, che si chiameranno anche amicizie, 
ma le piu vere saranno sempre le amicizie fatte in giovinezza. 10. Se 
n' ando in America, e subito si fece ricco, ma poi perdette ogni cosa^ 
e se ne torno povero povero ^ com' era andato. 

V^he repetition of a word serves to emphasize it. i 

and seMfTncy are here. 3^<'ha(mhim makk it so becaifse une other 
OTie'wa^'m^e so. 4. If they 'had gone thpreyesterday,^ Lhey would 
have found him there. '^. We had him carry 1^ to the^vlll^S'^^ 6. 
If they do as hejhas done,.thev will do.moi^^honor to hiin tii|Ln to j 
themselves. 7. \\^malfe^m^ of it ^Enan Wey, ana ours'^s better 3 
t!ian the&. §. ,.;^"wSh.X .awa;3H^his.inorniiig. but he'll come back 
soon. g.^^^Tum go and find it and bring U to me her4. 10. Its 
=1^ a pretty place: we go there every Sunday. 

LESSON 20. DARE AND STARE 

Study 92, 3 and 4; also 54 (c), {d). ^ 

EXERCISE 20 \,^^h 

1. Translate: diede, darete, 3^a7 danno, dette, darai, deste, diamo, 
diedero\ dai, hanno dato, me lo davano, glielo darebbe?, ce lo dia, 
diamogliene, ve ne daranno, se ne da, 1' aveva dato loro, dammene, 
gli si e dato. 

2. Translate into Italian: I should give, I gave, you are giving, 
give, we have given, I was giving, they gave them to me, he gives 
himself to us,^^g^^^^^ffiie, I had given it to her, will you give 
me some?, we sTTould nave given th'em to you. 

3. Translate: stareste, stavano, stette, stia) steste, stanno, stet- 
tero, starebbe, state, sta'," stemmo, stai, stiano, stiamo, stara, sto 
lavorando, stava parlando, stava per dirmelo. 



126 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

,, 4. Translate into Itgllan: he was -standing, they would .stand, I 
Lf S'CJPdj let t^m'^nd, we sf^^ you ^re'standingj.^tand, let us^stand, 
V^^od, ^fifey-^fr^t'iling, I w^^^\o-'toi*^'y#^'^^ 

5. Study these sentences: i. Cos' hai in quella mano? Dammelo 
subito. 2. Come sta? Benissimo, grazie, e Lei? 3. Stava per 
domandargli perche non se ne fosse andato. 4. Per il Natale gli 
si diedero dei libri italiani. 5. Chi da presto, e come se desse due 
volte. 6. Stiaattento: non si faccia male. 7. Daranno il voto a chi 
meglio li paga. 8. Poveretta! Sta sempre li a cucire. 9. Prima faceva 

Y ^r ingegnere, ma poi si diede alio studio della filosofia. 10. Tutti gli 
facevano degP inchini profondi, e gli davano deU' illustrissimo. 

6. Translate into. Italian:, i. ^^gave you two^ them, 



t>. iransmte tnta^itaLian.]i. rj^gave you two or tnem, ai^i gave , 

VQU tfe.. 2^h^V^^ffl^^^aGk,^^^^^^^^^ 

, ^^ if It s ms^^vh ifio him. 4. Imywere^^^^mng'it to hirai when^ 
^^^^^^e in. q! He^eH%u amMjasl': I was^Dout^wg^^ana caffySu. 
Bst^. tJSs>^ mucrtiwoulaj^CM nave given hifn^ Not a cent. y.JThey are 
"^ giviiig .a[ainn|r this evening fOT^nmt^E];i^^wfi^r. 8. Yesterday 
hOfWasa^ little^peirar^but today ne's \vor| d^^. I thank you, sir^j your 
^^W^^fe^t^e^g^ll tt^'lfhey^u^®^ ((/i) continue. 10. Gh)^ the?ii 
^^^Se^one]^^t doMWfeeM'come^"'^'-'^ ^<u:^t,C 

1 Translate by the proper form of essere. 

2 Use the partitive construction. 



LESSON 21. ARTICLES 

Study 10-16 inclusive, 45 {a)-{e) inclusive. 

EXERCISE 21 

1. Review Exercise 3, sections 2, 3, 4. 

2. Study these sentences: i. Nell' unita sta la forza. 2. Preferisce 
]' Ariosto alio Spenser e Dante alio Shakespeare. 3. Andammo in 
Inghilterra colla madre, e quando noi tornammo lei ci resto con una 
sua cugina. 4. Era orfano, ma un suo zio gli faceva da padre. 5. 
Aveva i capelli neri e folti; neri anche gh occhi; nero 1' abito, neri 



" J LESSONS AND EXERCISES 127 

i guanti. 6. II medico gli toccava il polso: la'febbre montava. 7. 
Si e fatto molto male; avra a restare a casa una settimana aimeno. 

8. Gli uomini piu grandi hanno quasi scmpre le maniere semplici.. 

9. £ un gran poeta; chi lo nega parla da scioccS. 10. Ha vendiito 
la casa e ogni cosa, ed e partito per gli St^ti Uniti d' America. 

Translate mta Italian: i. Habitsimajie.us \^at \^ are. 2. We 
France^ ]DutVemx)pe'*' to ^(^ifT^o'^LO Itajy.this supimer. 

u he isn''bSvell,"il's nif'&iftff. 4. Poor Ghedini was a 
friend of mine. 5. Last year Queen Mlargherita travelled through 
France. 6. He took off his hat and made us a low bow. 7. Venice 





'*^'^^!iick^he has cut Jiis.hand. 



LESSON 22. !lKREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND 
CONJUGATION 

I Read 64-67 ;^ stidy 92, 6-10. 

Wi!&Yr 1^ EXERCISE 22 

l\ Translate: sapro, seppe, sai, sapremmo, sanno, sapevo, cd- 

dono, cadro, caddi, caduto, cadde, cadrebbe, dobbiamo, dovetti, 

devi, dovemmo, doverono, dovrete, sedei, siedono, sedendo, sedete, 

sedette, sedeva, veda, vide, vedrai, visto, vedano, videro; 1' avremo 

saputo, vi cadde, me lo deve, vi sedeva?, ce lo vedemmo, lo seppero, 

ci sarebbe caduto, glielo dobbiamo, ci sedetti, li vedra. 

('(^ 
2, Translate into Italian: we know, they knew, you had 

known, know, they fell, I was falling, we shall fall, you fell, he 

owes, we should owe, they owe, owing, he is sitting, they will sit, 

you were sitting, seated, we should see, let him see, I saw, let us 

see; did he know it?, they had fallen there, they owe it to her, 

they are sitting there, did they see us? 



128 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

3. Study these sentences: i. Stavano insieme alia finestra a guardare 
la neve che cadeva lenta lenta. 2. Che buio! Non ci si vede^ punto! 
3. II povero vecchio stava seduto al canto del camino. 4. Videro il 
loro bambino che giocava ^ colle pistole dello zio. 5. Non so se Lei 
sappia la triste notizia. 6. Si vedeva neUe sue maniere un non so 
che di nuovo e di strano. 7. Mi hanno dato tutto; non mi si deve 
piu nulla. 8. Coi pensieri che gH giravano per la testa non sapeva 
piu in che mondo si fosse. 9. II poco che si sa, si sam)ia bene. 10. 
Non dimenticate i(c^duti per la patri^y--^v-< ^^^^^j^XZ 

^^~~—>'-~-~—^ /J s , - J 

1 Non ci si vede, ' One canx'see7''rhere are several verbs that may 
assume the idea of possibility in the present and past descriptive 
tenses. 

^ che giocava, 'playing.' An Italian relative clause is often equiva- 
lent to an English participle. | J / *" 



4. Translate into Italian: i.l^etTseewnere they are going. 2. He ,, 

t ^ was sta&^g there talking with his brother, when a'bnc^iefr on fes*^ 

'^ Head. 3. Did you see them speak to him? Do 3'ou knoW"^tte?[*^ 

names? 4. The}^ will not know what we are doing. 5. See: they 

have given me some"*(]|f^es Uke'^^rs. 6. I hope that tomorrow you 



will all know the lesson. 7. If I see him I'lJ give hinx the ten lire I 

lim sit ^wnnDesi3^l|3£i aesKl''^o.^W 
not standing there\vhen you saw them? 10. Ht^\9^nmi everything, 



owe him. 8. He had him sit down nBesideilaaae^.'' O-^Wqec they 



y|t^e*^ent Itmf^aving him a3pne and sT^:^ 
^ Use the partitive ronstructioh. '^^ 

LESSON 23. NOUNS 
Study 22, 23, 24, 25. 

EXERCISE 23 

1. Review Exercise 4, sections 2 and 3. 

2. Give the plural of each of these masculine nouns: ago, amico, 
bacio, bosco, braccio, cantico, collega, dito, duca, equivoco, figlio, 
fuoco, ginocchio, guaio, lucgo, migUo, monaco, nemico, obbligo, 
occhio, paio, patriarca, studio, turco, uovo. 

3. Give the plural of each of these feminine nouns: biblioteca, coscia, 
fabbrica, faccia, frangia, fuga, giacca, lega, valanga, valigia. 



/ 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 129 

4. Give the masculine and feminine plural of each of these adjectives: 
artistico, buio, carico, cieco, classico, doppio, fresco, grigio, largo, 
lungo, poco, proprio, simpatico, vago, vecchio. 

5. Study these sentences: i. La ricchezza dei contadini sta nelle 
braccia. 2. Tornarono tutti carichi di frutta e di confetti. 3. Si 
senti tremare le ginocchia per la paura. 4. E i medici, noii^ gli , 
danno piu speranza? 5. In quel villaggi ci sono moltissimi crectt?^ 

6. I suoi^ lo credono un buon ragazzo; ma ha molti vizi e pochis- 
sime virtu. 7. Che c' e di nuovo? Gli operai hanno fat to sciopero. 

8. Ha studiato il tedesco due anni, ed ora lo parla assai bene. 

9. II suo aspetto aveva qualche cosa di misterioso, quasi di divino. 

10. Le loro facce e maniere hanno un n on so _che di semplice e di 
umano che fa vedere che la loro vita si fonda sul vero e non sul 
falso. 

1 / sudi, 'His family.' The masculine plural possessives are often 
used in this way. 

■ - 6. Translate into Italian: i. Yesterday morning they walked more 
thaff ifen'milbs. ^.' They hope that their old friends will arrive this 
evening. 3. We saw them with our own eyes. 4. The lakes are 
longer than they ^ are ^ broad. 5. He has finished his studies on 
the libraries of ancient times. 6. Give me two pairs of stockings. 

7. They are very agreeable young men. 8. Her eyes were black ^as 
night, and her cheeks were white as snow. 9. He has lost two fingers 
of his right hand. 10. The monarchs of Milan were called dukes; 
those of Venice, doges; those of Rome, popes; and those of Naples, 
kings. ' * L ^. 

1 Omit these words in translating. t fst^ IMr*' ^"^ 



w^ :c.ov 



LESSON 24. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND 
CONJUGATION (continued) 

Study 92, 11-17. 

EXERCISE 24 

1. Translate: giaccionp, giacque, giacendo, piacerei, piace, piac- 
quero, taccia, taci^^Hacqui, suole, solito, solevano, dorra, dolse, 
rimasero, rimanga, rimarreste, tiene, terrete, tenne, tenuti, tengano. 



130 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

teniamo; gli piace,i gli piaccio, le piacciono, vi piaceva?, piacque 
loro, gli du61e,i vi rimangano, c' e rimasta, vi saraiino rimasti, li 
teneva, teniamolo, V aveva tenuto. 
"^""^ The personal object of piacSre or dolere is indirect. 

2. Translate into Italian: he was lying, it lay, they please, you 
will please, they were silent, we shall be silent, they were wont, it 
grieves, remain, they remain, thou boldest, they would ho ld; it 
pleases me, I like it,i they please me, I like tliem^^leased hini^ 
Ixe -lakfi daK.it, she liked it, we liked it, they'^ilCd it, they have 
remainedslhere, they are held, we should have held them. 

*~^ 1 WEen like ' has a noun or a pronoun as object, the sentence should 
be recast for translation into Italian by substituting ' please ' for ' hke,' 
and making the original object the subject and the original subject the 
object: 'I like it'= 'it pleases me.' 

3. Study these sentences: i. Gli piacerebbe molto se Lei glielo desse. 
2. Arrivarono lunedi, e ci rimarranno almeno fino a domenica. 3. 
Non credo che quel posto gli piaccia: ^ non c' e niente da fare. 4. leri 
m' entro una spina nel piede, e ancora mi duole. 5. Tengo per fermo 
che un^ale dono non gli piacera. 6. Faceva un gran freddo; ma si 
teneva vivo il fuoco, e si stava al caminetto. 7. E difficile piacergli, 
e lui non cerca mai di piacere a nessuno. 8. jjajajite buone qualita^ 
peccato che non sappia tener la lingua. 9. Mi faccia il piacere di 
farmelo vedere. 10. I^a notte taceva: non un suono, non una voce; 
solo si sentiva, da lontano, il mormorio del fiume. 

~^ ^ piaccia, 'will please.' The present subjunctive often has a future 
tense-value. 

4. Translate into Italian: i. It fell and lay three days on the ground. 
2. He was sitting in the room where his brother lay sick. 3. Have you 
seen my new coat? how do you like it? 4. If they keep still, we shall 
not know where they have been. 5. I have been studying too much; 
my eyes are paining me. 6. If you don't like this one, I will give 
you another. 7. It would grieve him very much if they should go * 
away now. 8. The village lies at the foot of the mountain, near the 
river. 9. Don't go now: stay to dinner, and then let's go to the 
theatre. 10. He kept us in doubt up to the last moment. 

1 'should go': use the past subjunctive. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 131 

LESSON 25. AUGMENTATIVES, DIMINUTIVES, AND 
NUMERALS 

Study 35-40 inclusive. 

EXERCISE 25 

1. Pronounce and translate: cinquantatre, settantasei, novantadue, 
centodiciassette, dugentoquarantotto, quattrocentottantuno, seicento- 
trentanove, novecentosessantasette, milletrecentoventidue, milleno- 
vecentoquindici, tremilaquarantacinque. 

2. Read in Italian: 31, 77, 243, 854, 1265, 1321, 1492, 1621, 1775, 
191 5; Sisto IV, Innocenzo VIII, Alessandro VI, Pio III, Giulio II, 
Leone X, Adriano VI, Clemente VII, Pio IX, Leone XIII, Pio X, 
Benedetto XV. 

3. Translate: sono le tre, sono le cinque e died, sono le died e un 
quarto, sono le sei e mezzo, sono le n6ve meno venti, sono le otto 
meno un quarto, sono le due meno dodid. 

4. Translate into Italian: it's four o'dock, it's 6:12, it's half past 
eight, it's 25 minutes of nine, it's six minutes of five; April i, April 2, 
April 3, April 22. 

5. Translate in terms of American money: ^ dieci centesimi, cin- 
quanta centesimi, una Hra e venti centesimi, trentun soldo, due 
lire e quaranta, cinque lire e mezzo, sette lire e cinquanta, 
venti lire, sessantadue lire e quarantacinque centesimi, mille lire. 

^100 centesimi = i lira = 20 cents; 5 centesimi = i soldo. 

6. Translate in terms of Italian money: $.05, $.18, $.25, $.42, $1.00, 
$1.50, $6.38, $100.00. 

7. Study these sentences: 1. La lettera fu datata "Roma, venerdi 
15 febbraio 1823." 2. Lo forni di una ventina di lire, troppe per chi 
le dava, troppo poche per chi le riceveva. 3. II costo totale sarebbe 
di lire cinquantasei e centesimi settantacinque. 4. Lui allora aveva 
ventiquattro anni, e lei soltanto diciotto. 5. Erano in tutto quindici 
biglietti da died lire. 6. Nel quarantotto comb'atte a Milano contro 
gli Austriaci. 7. Ha pubblicato or ora un volume sulla pittura del 



132 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

Trecento. 8. Vi ando nei primi giorni del 1612, e vi rimase fino a 
^ mezzo il 1614. 9. A che ora parte il treno? Alle quindici e mezzo, 
^4"feioe alle tre e mezzo dopo mezzogiorno. 10, La raccolta piu impor- 
tante delle poesie italiane piu antiche e il codice yaticano 3^93. 
/ 8. ^Translate into Italian: 1. Th^w^e iJie^i^veq^^ck. Itwaaf. 
IdarK arig cola; and it ivas snowirfg nard. 2. The sonnet .consisis^ 

^-^*-^nti tfie^iotlia^£t^eOtw'o ^celi^uries^pi me' Kenaissancem^ 
4. He made him "^^fer it n2^e tnnes. 5. The work of Manzoni 
falls in the first half of the 19th century. 6. I gave him 30 lire. 
and he bought two pairs of shoes. 7. Seven months have 31 days, 
four 30, and one 28 or 29. 8. Would you do me the favor to 
(di) lend me ten lire or so until Monday? 9. From the tower 
one saw thousands ^ and thousands of persons crowded in the streets 
and the squares. 10. Victor Emmanuel II was the first king of 
the Third Italy. 
1 Use miglidio. 

\ 
LESSON 26. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND 

CONJUGATION (continued) 
Stud^^2, 18-22; also 79 {h) i. 





EXERCISE 26 

1. Translate: varro, valse, valgqno, valemmo, valevano, valsero, 
vogliono, vuoi, vorra, volevo, vuole, vorrei, paiamo, parvi, pari, 
parremmo, parvero, parrete, potei, possono, potendo, potete, pote, 
pud, persuada, persuase, persuadevano, persuadiamo, persuaso, 
persuadi; lo varranno, 1' hanno voluto, ci era parso, non avreste 
potuto, persuadeteli, non lo valeva, vorranno farlo?, gU parve 
non si puo, sono stati persuasi. 

2. Translate into Italian: it would be worth, we are worth, it 
was worth, you were worth, they wished, I was wishing, we shall 
wish, you wished, it seems, we should seem, they seem, seeming, 
he can, they will be able, you were able, they can, we should 
persuade, let him persuade, I persuaded, let us persuade; will it 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 133 



be worth it?, did they wish it?, it seemed to us, wejbave not been 
able, haven't they persuaded him? 

3. Study these sentences: iT'^imanga se puo, ma vada se ha da 
studiare. 2. Quanto crede che valgano quegH anelli? 3. £ difficile, 
lo so, ma cosa vuole? faccia tutto quello che potra. 4. Aveva fatto 
come pareva meglio a lui. 5. La chiesa sta piu in alto: ci vuole 
un' ora per arrivarci. Oh allora non vale la pena. 6. Chi non 
pud fare come vuole, faccia come pud. 7. Non si puo contentarlo: 
piu ne ha e piu ne vuole. 8. Due non basteranno: ce ne vogliono 
almeno quattro. 9. Se potesse farmi questo piacere Le sarei mille 
volte obbligato. 10. Volere e potere. 

4. Translate into Italian: i. We shall not be able to persuade 
him. 2. They seem large, but they cannot be good. 3. If you wish 
it, they will stay with you. 4. I should not have thought that they 
were worth ^ so much. 5. They owe me 20 lire, and they are not willing 
toim^ me. 6. I wanted to give it to you, but I couldn't. 7. My 

lieaa aches so much that I can't study. 8. He's going away tomor- 
row, although he wants ^ to stay here. 9. I should like to speak to 
you about it; could you stay ten minutes or so? 10. It takes a brave 
man to {a) do a thing like that. 

1 Use the subjunctive. 



V^ ^t'^^^^ LjfsSO]^ 27. AT 



AUXILIARY VERBS 

Study 54, 57. 

EXERCISE 27 

1. Translate: devo parlare, dovevo parlare, dovei parlare, dovro 
parlare, dovrei parlare, ho dovuto parlare, avevo dovuto parlare, 
avro dovuto parlare, avrei dovuto parlare; posso parlare, potevo 
parlare, potei parlare, potro parlare, potrei parlare, ho potuto 
parlare, avevo potuto parlare, avro potuto parlare, avrei potuto 
parlare; voglio parlare, volevo parlare, volli parlare, vorro parlare, 
vorrei parlare, ho voluto parlare, avevo voluto parlare, avro voluto 
parlare, avrei voluto parlare; glielo avevano dovuto dare, non 
avremmo potuto persuaderlo, avreste voluto vederli?, non era 



134 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

potuto entrare, avrebbe dovuto finirlo, avevamp voluto comprame: 
stiamo per andarcene, rimase traditd, ^a^ ^udiato cosi, lo fecero 
portare, bisognerebbe prestarglieli, hanno da cercarlo, non saprei 
spiegarlo, non potemmo q, mpno , di non tacere. 

2. Translate into Italian: they are to speak, we must speak, 
vou . were ^o speak, he had to speak, we shall have to speak, I 
ought- to ^speak, he would have to speak, they have been obliged 
to speak, he must have spoken, she had had to speak, we shall 
have had to speak, he ought to have spoken, they were not able 
to speak, he may have spoken, they could have spoken, I should 
not have been able to speak, I might have spoken, will they be 
willing to speak?, he had been wUHng to speak. 

3. Study these sentences: i. Avendo tanto da fare in citta, avreste 
dovuto partire col treno delle sette e mezzo. 2. Voile fare una visita a 
casa sua per vedere i suoi, che non aveva visti da tanto tempo. 

3. A quel tempo non si poteva vedere tutto cio che s' e veduto dope. 

4. Lasciano la scuola con 1' odio per le cose di cui si sono dovuti occu- 
pare e per gli autori di cui hanno dovuto studiare le opere. 5. Non 
capisco come una cosa simile abbia potuto accadere. 6. Dopo aver 
fatto tutti gli sforzi possibili, si e dovuto capitolare. 7. Non 
sarebbe potuto arrivare a Firenze neanche la sera. 8. Ti 
chiamero presto perche dovrai andare alia stazione a piedi. 
9. Aveva sperato che nella casa paterna avrebbe potuto godere almeno 
un p6' d' affetto. 10. Molto sa chi poco sa, se tacer sa. 

4. Study these sentences: i. If I saw him, I should have to speak 
to him. 2. You pvi^hL to Im^w. when you will be able to bring it to 
us. 3. Hd'^^manavehaaift keep still: he didn't^now meir names. 
4. You must work if you want to please him. 5. They may find it, 
but I'm afraid that they have ^ left it in the city. 6. It grieves me, 
but I shall have to do it. 7. We ought to have kept still, but we 
couldn't help laughing. 8. He would like to know why they had to 
go away. 9. In what might I have the honor of serving you? 10. 
He always wanted to do what seemed best to him. 

^ Use the subjunctive. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 135 

LESSON 28. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION 

Study 92 (e), (/), {g) (on p. 85), 24-73 [omitting verbs marked 
Rare, afid forms in parentheses]. 

EXERCISE 28 

1. Inflect the present tenses of affliggere, conoscere, crescere, and 
leggere. 

2. Translate: accendendo, accese, afflitto, alludono, ardeva, ardera, 
risolvette, chiude, chiuderemo, conosciuto, conosca, conobbero, 
corriamo, correvano, corse, cresce, crescera, cuoce, decida, decisi, 
difeso, diresse, dirigcro, discussero, distinti, divisero, esistito, esistono, 
esprmiano, espresse, fitto, finga, fingiamo, frigge, fuso, invasero, 
leggano, lessero, mettiamo, misi. 

3. Translate into Italian: I light, he alluded, I will shut, he 
knew, run, grown, cooking, they decided, let us divide, it exists, he 
will express, fried, they will invade, let him read, they put. 

4. Study these sentences: i. Gli espresse il suo rincrescimento per 
quel che si era fatto. 2. Gli si leggeva la gioia nel viso. 3. Ci 
mise davanti^ un mucchio di carte. 4. Mi lasci parlare; non chiuda 
il cuore alia pieta. 5. Lo conobbi a Firenze F anno scorso, 6. 11 
fondo del romanzo e storico, ma vi e mescolato il finto col vero. 7. 
Piu li conosce e piu gli cresce 1' amicizia per loro. 8. Le opinioni si 
divisero: alcuni applaudirono la sua azione, altri la biasimarono. 

9. Nel Cinquecento Francesi e Spagnuoli corsero tutta 1' Italia. 

10. Distinguiamo nel suo carattere quel che vi e di sincere^ e quel 
che vi e di falso. 

^ Ci mise davdnti, 'He put before us.' When the logical object of 
an Italian preposition is an unemphatic personal pronoun, the use of 
a disjunctive pronoun is often avoided by putting a conjunctive 
pronoun before the verb and treating the preposition as an adverb. 

2 quel che vi e di sincere, 'its elements of sincerity.' 

5. Translate into Italian: i. It's the third time she has read that 
book. 2. Do you know my friend Mr. Ghedini? 3. He went to the 
door, shut it, and put the key in his pocket. 4. I lighted the other 

\ 



136 ITALIAN" GRAMMAR 

light and ran into the room. 5. Do you want fried eggs? 6. What 
is she cooking now? 7. Do me the favor to (di) shut the door. Have 
those windows been shut? 8. Where did you put my hat? I have 
to go now, and I can't find it. 9. To whom was he alluding when he 
spoke of his enemies? 10. The schools will be closed from June to 
September. 

LESSON 29. MOODS AND TENSES 

Study 69-76 inclusive. 

EXERCISE 29 ;tU ^^^"^ "^ 

1. Study these sentences: i. tl lasciar'le mura della citta e il rivedere 
la casa paterna nel piccolo villaggio,furono serisazioni piene di gioia. 
2. Vedendolo venire con quei libri in mano, n' era molto lieta, sperando 
che glieli avrebbe regalati. 3. Partirono poco dopo il levar del sole, 
e tornarono sul far della sera. 4. Non sapeva ne come fare ne dove 
andare. 5. A continuare cosi si corre il pericolo di perdere tutto cid 
che si e guadagnato. 6. Crede di aver trovato quel che cercava da 
tant'o tempo. 7. Quando avrai gli anni che ho 10, non sarai mica si 
pronto a giudicare gli altri. 8. Finita la lezione, tornarono a casa, 
e trovarono il cugino che li aspettava. 9. Non ci avrebbe nullaN. da 
dare a un povero cieco? 10. Torno pi an piano alia casa; picchio; 
n^sjina' risponde; entro; e ci trdvo*:^ cosa crede? 11. Inutile 
illudersi; non c e piu speranza. 12. L esser simpatici non basta, no; 
bisogna essere utili a qualche cosa. 13. Rimarrai fino alle cinque, non 
e vero? Non mi dire di no. 14. Quando arrival a casa, mio padre 
non c' era. Mia madre si spaven0,r^erche vedendomi cosi pallido 
mi credette malato. i5^''Augiirata 'm Duona notte al padrone, se 
n' ando in fretta. 16. Lui gli vende 1' anima, e il diavolo gli promise 
che per un certo tempo gli avrebbe ubbidito come a suo signore. 17. 
Tornati (che furonoj domandarono subito da mangiare. 18. In quel 
Qagone e proibito fumare. 19. Appena mi vide, la sua espressione, da 
irrequieta che era,^ si fece minacciosa. 20. La stradagj.che mena a 
Sorrento c un succedersi continuo di punti di vista stupendi. 

1 Non ci avrebbe nulla, ' Haven't you anything ? ' Tjj^e use of the 
past future gives the sentence an apologetic tone. 

2 da irrequieta che era, 'instead of anxious.' 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 137 

2. Translate into Italian: i. Do you prefer traveling to studying? 
2. I'll have it given back at once. 3. Their manners may be crude, 
but they are sincere. 4. Gratitude is to be praised. 5. Y ou k now, 
doubtless,^ that my brother has returned. 6. When you arrive mj^*) 
Florence, you will find at the hotel a letter from {di) my agent. "^""^ 
7. Have you not heard him^s]^oke|i.,of? 8, I have been here iit two 
months, working ^ in the^braries. 9. "^^ere a^e^they?, ,They arevy 
there outside, waiting for ^ you. 10. I^ought ^(0 Tiave ^podlen to 
you about it himself, instead of writing. u-^^Qi; ^ti jocl Wc<'i_: 

1 Express this idea in the verb. 

2 Translate by a with the infinitive. 

^ Use a relative clause instead of a participle. 



LESSON 30. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION (continued) 

Study 92, 75-124 [omitting verbs marked Rare or Poetical, and forms 
in parentheses]. 

, EXERCISE 30 

1. Inflect the present tenses^ of muovere and sorgere, 

V) cle^ k^ IV^ VV-Cor^ \:>ti^' . . 

> 9;, Tmnslatei'^. Vmdrdono,^ - wsse, movera, ^iv^^p^ ^acoiie^g,) 
nascosio, nascomevo, ' n^etto, offenteidoli i^fci, .4)CTso,I^per-!^ 



Dndevo, 
rederitj, .raSoV rendevano, ndi. - hsero,'* risponda, TS-isposi, rotti, 



to, nascondevo, ncgletto, ottenaenaov. aiit^i, .^eiso,.^ per-'' 
ic, piovevS) pipvera, PCgflda^ l^^^^A Protejgpno, proteapefA 



( 




3. Translate into Italian: they were moving, he was born, hide, 
we are losing, it is raining, let them take, he laughed, they an- 
swered, broken, write, he shook, they rise, she spent, it happens, it 
would kill, I shall conquer, let him live, they turned. 

4. Study these sentences: i. Se^e li presto, quando me li renderai? 
2. La scod^la gli cadde per terra e si ruppe in tre pezzi. 3. Soli 
quelli ch^gii vivono da presso sanno che egli e anche piu buono che 



138 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

grande. 4. Scriva un p6' meglio; altrimenti non potranno leggere 
niente. 5. Successe una pausa, rotta finalmente da un grido di 
terrore. 6. Non si lasci vincere dall' Ira. 7. II codice fu scritto, 
pare, verso la fine del Trecento. 8. E successo quello che pur troppo 
non poteva non succedere. 9. L' Italia nacque come nascono ttitte 
le nazioni nuove, dall' energia dei meno che porta al destino 1' inerzia 
dei piu. 10. Ben perduto e conosciuto. 

5. Translate into Italian: i. He put it on the table, but someone 
has moved it. 2. Let's stand under that tree while it rains. 3. If 
he had moved it, it would have fallen. 4. There the mountains rise 
from the waters of the lake. 5. Goldcni and Alfieri lived in the 
1 8th century. 6. They are all running: what has^ happened? 7. 
He shook his head, smiling, and turned ^ toward the door. 8. When 
I spoke to him about it, he laughed, and did not answer me. 9. In 
what year was Dante born? 10. They don't think he will live ^ if 
he remains here. 

1 Translate by the proper form of essere. 

2 Put the proper reflexive pronoun before the verb. 

3 Use the subjunctive. 



LESSON 31. CONJUNCTIONS 

Study 78. 

EXERCISE 31 

r , 

"t) 1. Give the meanings of these conjunctions: a meno che non, accioche, 

■' 'afhnche, anzi, avanti che, benche, che, dacche, dato che, donde, 

dovunque, finche, finche non, mentre, neanche, ossia, perche (with 

indicative), perche {■with subjunctive), per quanto, poiche, prima che, 

purche, pure, qualunque, quasi, sebbene, se non che, siccome. 

2. Study these sentences: i. Seguito a filare finche il figlio del re 
non se ne fu andato. 2. L' avrebbe potuto fare, purche 1' avesse 
voluto. 3. Molti sono e i difetti e i pericoli di una tale decisions 
4. I giorni passavano senza che il padre gliene parlasse. 5. Non 
V avrebbe mai saputo, se non che le si sped! da Milano un giornale 
colla notizia. 6. Lo conoscevo nei giorni che era qui a visitare 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 139 

la nonna. 7. Non ci aluta punto, anzi c' impedisce. 8. Le sue 
espressioni, per quanto fossero forti, non erano esagerate. 9. Mi 
dispiacquc di non averla veduta prima che partisse. 10. Non voleva 
nemmeno vederlo, non che parlargli. 

3. Translate into Italian: i. They were sitting in the parlor while 
I was writing the letters. 2. Who is going there today? Either he 
or I. 3. They received them as if they were old friends. 4. He re- 
mained at the window until he heard them knock, 5. We will pardon 
him provided he will promise to {di) give it back to us at once. 6. I 'U^' 
found it without difficulty, although he had hidden it with the greatest 
care. 7. When you see him, do me the favor to {di) give him these 
tickets. 8. I should like to speak to him before he goes. 9. Since p^it 
they are worth what they cost, why don't you buy them? 10. I sent ' 
you^ here in order that you should study, not in order that you 
should waste my money. 

1 Use the second person singular in translating this sentence. 

LESSON 32. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION (continued) 

Study 92, 127-133. 

EXERCISE 32 

1. Translate: bevano, bevve, bera, avrebbe bevuto, beviamo, 
bee, chiesto, chiesi, chiedete, chiederanno, chieda, chiedevano, 
condurrei, condotto, condussero, conduca, conduci, sono condotti,* 
noceva, nuoce, nocque, ponga, posto, posi, poniamo, porra, pone, 
traevano, trassero, traggono, trarremo, avevano tratto, tragga. 

2. Translate into Italian: they would drink, he was drinking, 
I drank, let him drink, let us ask, he will have asked, they asked, 
we were asking, I conducted, let them conduct, he has conducted, 
I was conducting, it will harm, they harmed, we put, put, they are 
putting, they will put, he dragged, we should drag, I have dragged. 

3. Stiidy these sentences: i. Quando avra sci anni lo porremo a 
scuola. 2. Se bevesse un p6' di quel vino, gli farebbe bene. 3. II 
fumare troppo gU ha nociuto gravemente. 4. Non le sa negare quel 



140 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

che gli chiede.i 5. SofTri lunghi anni di una malattia di cuore cbi 
finalmente lo trasse alia morte. 6. Ho sete: dammi da here. 7. 
\'orrei chiederle una vacanza di pochi giorni, finche mi rimetta un 
p6' in salute. 8. Fini col darsi per vinto, e col concedere tutto quanto 
gli era richiesto. 9. Questo mi ha indotto a riconoscere in lui 
r autore delle mie disgrazie. 10. Tutte le strade conducono a Roma. 
1 The personal object of chiedere is indirect. 

4. Translate into Italian: i. Drink a little water. 2. They are 
putting it in the other corner of the room. 3. Clouds of smoke were 
rising, and they were dragging everything out of the house. 4. I put 
it there because I found it there: don't move it. 5. Go and ask him 
why he didn't read what I wrote. 6. If you stay to dinner, we'll 
take ^ you to the theatre this evening. 7. The house was placed so 
that one could see between the hills as far as the river. 8. If you 
had asked me for ^ it, I should have given it to you. 9. Then he 
drew his sword and took ^ his place at the head of his company. 10. 
He put his hands on my shoulders and asked me if I had been a 
good boy. 

1 Use mendre. ^ Chiedere means 'to ask for.' ^ Use prendere. 



LESSON 33. THE SUBJUNCTIVE 

Study n thraugh (/). 

EXERCISE 33 

1. Study these sentences: i. Senta: potrebbe prestarmi per qualche 
giorno una ventina di lire? 2. Bisognava che ne trovassero un altro 
perfettamente simile a quello che si era perduto. 3. Ci faccia sapere 
quale difTicolta ci sia. 4. E il poeta piu classico e nondimeno il piu 
moderno che abbia 1' Italia. 5. Quanto male ci ha fatto! Non 
r avessimo mai visto! 6. Se avesse uno che si prendesse cura di lui, 
anche lui potrebbe far meglio. 7. Legga, scriva, non sia mai ozioso, 
non chieda mai a nessuno, non speri che nel suo lavoro. 8.' Non vi e 
piu alcuno che creda alle loro storie. 9. Ti sia sempre nella mente 
che il compiacersi dei mali degli altri e crudelta. 10. Se vuole andare, 

? 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 141 

se ne vada; per me, ci avrei piacere. ii. ]Era un' idea di cui parlava 
in ogni conversazione che riguardasse il suo av venire. 12. Fossi tu 
qui con me! Pur troppo bisogna ora che tu rimanga in citta. 13. 
Badi di non parlarmi piu cosi; e basti 1' avviso per questa volta 

14. Si mostro pronto a ttitto cio che potesse piacere ai superiori, 

15. Domando alia serva se si potesse parlare al padrone. 16. Divi- 
sero la citta in sei parti, ed elessero dodici cittadini che la governassero. 

^17. Nessuno se ne meravigli: era da aspettarsi. 18. Benche non vi 
sia niente che abbia 1' aria di essere esagerato, tutto il libro e una 
terribile accusa. 19. Se ci va spesso, e perche ci si mangia bene. 
20. Parrebbe impossibile a chi non lo conoscesse per quell' uomo che e. 

2. Translate into Italian: i. li he were here, perhaps he would be 
able to give us a little light. 2. He asked me if I were really a count. 
3. This is the first and only pleasure I have had since I have been 
here. 4. It would be enough to {per) convince one who had not 
sworn to remain in the dark. 5. They wanted to give her a name 
that should recall her aunt's affection. 6. Russia is the only 
country in {di) Europe that he hasn't visited. 7. They are things 
that happen often, although they seem impossible. 8. Did they 
ask you if you had read his last novel? 9. Wherever I go, that 
scene is ever before my eyes. 10. They had placed a guard at the 
only door by which he could have escaped. 

LESSON 34. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION (continued) 

Study 92, 134-148. 

EXERCISE 34 

1. Translate: coglie, colse, coglieremo, scelga, scelto, sceglievi, 
sciogliemmo, sciogliendo, avrebbe sciolto, tolgono, torra, torrei, 
giungete, giunsero, sono giunti, piangi, pianse, piangero, pinge/ 
pingano, pingeranno, spegne, spense, spegneva, spinga, aveva 
spinto, spinsero, stretto, stringono, stringemmo. 

2. Translate into Italian: they gather, we gathered, I was 
choosing, let them choose, we have taken, I shall take, you are 



142 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

weeping, I wept, they extinguish, we shall extinguish, you were 
pushing, I had pushed, we are bound, bind. 

3. Study these sentences: i. II sole che calava tingeva di rosso le 
acque del lago. 2. La Cappella Sistina fu dipinta da Michelangelo 
tra il 1508 e il 1512. 3. Gh afferro la destra e gliela strinse con forza, 
ma al ritirare la mano la vide tinta di sangue. 4. Tutti quelli con ctii 
era stretto d' amicizia se n' andarono, lasciandolo solo solo. 5. Non 
si sapeva se riderne o piangerne; infatti alcuni giansero, sorridendo 
pero fra le lagrime. 6. Se si potessero parlare una volta, le difficolta 
sarebbero subito sciolte. 7. Erano giunti a un tal punto che biso- 
gnava o vincere o perder ogni cosa. 8. Stava inginocchioni colle 
mani giunte in atto di preghiera. 9. Gli tolse di mano il denaro 
senza nemmeno ringraziarlo. 10. L' imperatore, poeta egli stesso, 
protesse i poeti e li accolse e onoro nella sua corte. 

4. Translate into Italian: i. Among all the employees they chose 
him as the most industrious. 2. Then they looked at each other, 
and began to weep. 3. Go and gather some^ flowers for the vases in 
the parlor. 4. When we arrived, the sacristan was putting out the 
lights. 5. Take 2 those papers from the table and put them on the 
desk. 6. In ancient times cities were surrounded by walls and ditches. 

7. He pushed me into {a) this business, and now he ought to help me. 

8. They were crying like children; she was going from one to the other, 
trying to {di) comfort them. 9. We found ourselves compelled to {a) 
ask him for it. 10. He might have surrendered: he chose to {di) die. 

^ Use the partitive construction. ^ Use togliere. 



LESSON 35. PREPOSITIONS 

Study 79. 

EXERCISE 35 

1. Give the meaning of these prepositions: accanto a, al di la di, 
attorno a, circa, contro, dentro di, dietro, dirimpetto a, dopo, eccetto, 
fin da, fino a, fuori di, innanzi, intorno a, lungo, oltre, quanto a, 
rispetto a, secondo, sino a, sotto, su, tra, tranne. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 143 

2. Study these sentences: i, Se vuol rimanere con noi, ha da fare 
quel che voglio lo. 2. (3ra le ha comprato una macchina da cucirc. 

-^3. Ce lo giuro per quanto aveva di piu caro. 4. Da allora in poi 
visse da buon cristiano. 5. Lo so per certo che oggi non gli hanno 
dato da mangiare. 6. Al di la del fiume si vedevano delle vecchie 
torri medioevali. 7. Ci si ammalavano a centinaia per giorno. 
8. C era una volta un bel fanciullo dai capelli biondi e dagli occhi 
azzurri, che aveva fra i dieci e i dodici anni. 9. Lui, poveretto, 
stava zitto a guardarmi, ed 10 gli parlai con un tono da fargli 
coraggio. 10. Alia porta della chiesa c' era una vecchia che 
accattava da chi entrava; il ragazzo ando da lei, e le diede meta 
del suo pane. 

3. Translate into Italian: i. They want to have {fare) lunch be- 
fore the others. 2. You can't persuade him to vote against the 
government. 3. We'll be at your house in an hour and a half. 4. 
They will arrive on {con) the 5.20 train. 5. He went to France in 
1872, and remained there for three or four years. 6. Go tell^ them 
they'll have to do without me. 7. His arrival was greeted by all with 
an exclamation of surprise. 8. I begged my father to take 2 me to 
the city to see my cousins. 9. They have been living in Venice 
for six months. 10. You ought to do something for him instead of 
letting him suffer so. 

^ Use dire, the personal object of which is indirect. 
2 Use mendre. 



LESSON 36. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH 
CONJUGATION 

Study 92, 149-163. 

EXERCISE 36 

1. Translate: aprono, apri, sono aperti, copra, coperse, co- 
prite, offrimmo, offrira, offersi, soffrii, hanno sofferto, soffrirei, 
costruivano, digerisce, esaurito, e stato sepolto, cucivo, empiono, 
empi, empiere, muoia, morranno, e morto, segui, segui, seguirei, 
sparve, spariscono, sparira. 



144 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 



u^:.}) 'h 



2. Translate into Italian: we opened, they would open, cover, I 
covered, let us offer, he has offered, he is suffering, you will suffer, 
she was sewing, he died, I shall die, following, let us follow, it 
would disappear, they disappeared. 

3. Stiidy these sentences: i. Se la tua patria avra bisogno di te, 
offrile te stesso. 2. Le finestre dello studio si aprono all' est. 3. 
Possa tu godere quant' 10 ho sofferto e soffro. 4. Tutti i figli le 
erano m6rti, 1' tino dopo 1' altro, ed era rimasta sola sola al mondo. 

5. Gli apparve in sogno un fantasma che lo minacciava di morte. 

6. Lui proseguiva il lavoro senza badare a cio che facevano gli altri. 

7. Di questo si trattera nel capitolo seguente. 8. Ha la sposa ricca, 
ma morrebbe piuttosto che chiederle un soldo. 9. Compiuti gli 
studi, fece un lungo viaggio per 1' Europa. 10. Muor giovane coltii 
che al cielo e caro. _ "' L c 

4. Translate into Italian: i. If the window isn't open, do me the 
favor to open it. 2. He died last night at half past eleven. 3. Those 
are old customs that now are disappearing. 4. Let's offer them to 
her, and if she doesn't want them we'll keep them for ourselves. 
5. The king is dead: long^ live the king! 6. She covered her face 
with her hands and wept. 7. You have written a song that will 
not die. 8. I opened the window and called them, but they didn't 
hear me. 9. If I suffered as they have suffered, I should die. 
10. They are building a theatre on the site of those old shops. 

1 Omit this word in translating. 

LESSON 37. THE SUBJUNCTIVE (continued) 

Study 77 (g), (h), ({). 

EXERCISE 37 

1. Study these sentences:^ i. Pare che se ne siano scordati affatto. 
2. Badi che non gli facciano male! 3. Se le displace che lo facciano 
gli altri, non lo faccia lei stesso. 4. Mi rincresce che Lei abbia dovtito 
partire senza vederH. 5. Non permise pero che finisse cosi. 6. Cosa 

^ In several of these sentences the che clause should be replaced, in 
translation, by an infinitive construction. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 145 

pensi tu che ci sia da fare? 7. Non sapeva che s' era proibito che 
i forestieri visitassero la fortezza? 8. Non potrai venire domani? 
Avrei bisogno che tu mi aiutassi. 9. II ponte par che segni il punto 
in cui il fiume entra nel lago. 10. Non si pud non sospettare che 
r abbiano saputo. 11. Pareva ci fossero degli spiriti invisibili. 12. 
Teme che gli si possa togliere quel che ha guadagnato. 13. Voglia 
il cielo che non venga un giorno in cui si penta di non avermi ascoltato. 

14. Lascino ch' 10 gli parli ancora una volta prima che se ne vada! 

15. Chi vuoi che le compri, delle scarpe cosi? 16. Ho letto quelle 
pagine col piu vivo interesse, e vorrei che le potessero legger tutti. 
17. Se vuole che gli si porti rispetto, deve imparare a rispettare gli 
altri. 18. L' ho sentito negare che la vita per se stessa sia desiderabile. 

19. Pagare e poi pagare, perche i nostri soldati vadano a morire 
neir Africa, non si pud pretendere che piaccia al popolo italiano. 

20. Non possiamo permettere che certi punti del Mediterraneo siano 
presi ed occupati da coloro che un giorno potrebbero esserci nemaci. 

2. Translate into Italian: i. I am surprised that you do not under- 
stand it. 2. I know they wanted me to stay^ until tomorrow. 3. It 
seemed to us that they were afraid that someone would recognize 
them. 4. He begged them to give^ him a little bread. 5. It may be 
believed that he has earned in this way more than 2000 lire. 6. He 
was ashamed that they should think that he had not been content. 
7. Yesterday I heard that he was a Httle better. 8. Doesn't it seem 
to you that he is asking too much? 9. He ordered them all to be^ 
silent. 10. I hope he'll give you all you want. 

1 Use a che clause, turning the preceding personal pronoun into a 
subject. 

LESSON 38. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH 
CONJUGATION (continued) 

Study 92, 164-168. 

EXERCISE 38 

1. Translate: dissero, diceva, e stato detto, di', dicano, diresti, 
sail, saiga, salite, salivano, salgo, salira, vieni, verra, venne, sono 
venuti, venga, verrei, udirono, ode, udiranno, esca, usciamo. 



146 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

2. Translate into Italian: you say, he said, say, they are ascending, 
I ascended, let us ascend, they came, I shall come, she has come, they 
hear, hearing, we had heard, he is going out, they went out, I should 
go out. 

, 3. Study these sentences: i. Quando uscii di camera, mia madre, 
gia alzata, mi aspettava per dirmi addio. 2. Che cosa vuol dire 
questa parola? 3. Ci dice che sono venuti tutti, e che rimarranno 
fino alle dieci. 4. I prezzi delle carni sono gia saliti assai. 5. Mon 
benedicendo i figli e i figli de' figli suoi. 6. Rifiuto nondimeno 
r aiuto che gli veniva offerto. 7. Erano sempre severi con lui, senza 
mai dirne il perche. 8. Poi le venne in mente che aveva promesso di 
restituirglieli il giorno dopo. 9. I fatti che siamo venuti narrando 
bastano a dimostrare la falsita dell^ acctisa. 10. Dimmi con chi 
pratichi e ti diro chi sei. 

4. Translate into Italian: i. They come and they disappear. 
Where do they all go? Tell me, do they all die? 2. I'm afraid they 
won't come if it rains. 3. If it's he, call him, and tell him I should 
Hke to speak to him. 4. He is much better now; he goes out almost 
every day. 5. Let them tell him to come at once. 6. They told 
me that he had arrived Monday. 7. They came; I heard them open 
the door; they went up; and then they disappeared. I went out, 
but they had gone away. 8. Did they tell you when they would 
come? 9. If he had told you that, what would you have done? 
10. I came, I saw, I conquered. 



LESSON 39. ADVERBS AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 

Study 80-91 inclusive. 

EXERCISE 39 

1. Give the meanings of these indefinite prottouns and adjectives: 
alcuno, altri, altriii, ambedue, certo, chi, chicchessia, ciascheduno, 
ciascuno, meno, nessuno, nulla, ognuno, parecchi, per quanto, qual- 
checosa, qualcuno, qualunque, si, un tale. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 147 

2. Study these sentences: i. Senti qualcheduno che piangeva li 
dentro. 2. Se fossi Lei, gli scriverei un' altra volta, benche non Le 
abbia mai risposto. 3. Sentiva un gran desiderio di fare qualcosa di 
strano e di terribile. 4. L' uno e 1' altro me n' hanno dato parola. 

5. Ci andremo insieme, non e vero? Non mi dica di no. 6. Cosa 
fai li? O che vuoi bruciar la casa? 7. Ed ecco che le appari sulla 
soglia un non so che di bianco. 8. L' ha cambiato tutto, ed ora si 
che mi piace! 9. Non si va in quel luogo se non per vedere la fontana. 
10. Questo mondo e fatto a scale, chi le scende e chi le sale. 

3. Translate into Italian: i. Do you go there oftener now? What? 
Yes, every eight or ten days. 2. I shall be there too, day after to- 
morrow, and I shall stay the whole week. 3. We saw certain things 
there that we didn't like at all. 4. I should never have believed that 
they would both leave me. 5. Take care that no one sees you start. 

6. Each of you ought to give him something. 7. One must respect 
the rights of others. 8. One can't say, though, that such a work 
isn't worth anything, 9. I have but two, but if you want one of 
them, here it is. 10. He must have known them well; he has lived 
there for several years. 

LESSON 40. REVIEW 
EXERCISE 40 

1. Give the plural of each of the following combinations: V ani- 
male grigio, il mio braccio, del caffe nuovo, nell' estasi {fern.), 
poca facolta, dalla tua famiglia, la mano bianca, 1' operaio eroico, 
r origine mistica, quel paio, il gran palco, col vecchio porco, lai 
radice profonda, 1' ultima riga, al bel rogo, lo scherzo comico, sullo 
scoglio pittoresco, il buon sindaco, il telegramma lungo, il suo zio. 

2. Translate: lo apra, V avremmo, me lo chiesero, li coglie, 
condottovi, ve lo conobbe, glielo devono, ce lo dia, ditele, lui li ha 
divisi, eccotelo, n' esce, glielo fece portare, vi foste, ci pianse, lo 
lessi loro, 1' av^a mosso, muoiano loro, vi nacque, offertoglielo, 
vi sarebbe parso, dovreste piangerne, lo potemmo vedere, me lo 
rese, li ruppero, si vorrebbe sapere, le scrissi, avrebbe dovuto 



148 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

seguirli, ci steste, 1' avranno stretto, lei tacque, lo tenga lei, li trae, 
ci vanno, erano venuti, ci videro, ci ha vissuto. 

3. Translate into Italian: will you be there?, they chose it, we 
had come, he was dying there, give it to him, will they go there?, 
he has been killed, do you know it?, do you know him?, they w^ould 
have lost it, they ought to have opened it, he could not persuade 
him, it pleased him, I put it there, they made me read it, we shall 
remain there, it seemed to them, they have seen us, tell it to we, 
they wish it. ,. / 

4. Study these sentences: i. Mi rispose di si,i e che ci avrebbe molto 
piacere. 2. Lui piangeva piangeva, e gli altri stavano zitti a guar- 
darlo. 3. Sedevano attorno alia tavola, impazienti che si servisse la 
colazione. 4. Morto, le parve assai piu grande e buono che non le 
fosse mai parso vivo. 5. Finalmente riusci a farselo restituire. 6. 
Gli abitanti si rifugiavano su per i monti, portandovi quel che avevan 
di meglio.2 7. Nel succedersi degli avvenimenti in mezzo ai quail 
veniva innalzato al soglio, parve manifestarsi la mano della Prov- 
videnza. 8. Prevedeva di doversene tornare a casa, di li a pochi 
giorni, povero com' era venuto. 9. Che molti di quel temi esistes- 
sero nella poesia piu antica, ci pare pienamente dimostrato. 10. Se 
li perdo, che sara di me? 11. Le stava davanti, quasi aspettasse 
che gh dicesse d' andarsene. 12. Queste poche pagine poste in 
principio serviranno di introduzione a tutto il libro. 13. Decise di 
sentire tranquillamente cio che alio zio piacesse d' aggiungere. 14. 
Si trasse dal dito V anello magico, e se lo mise in bocca. 15. 
Adesso le spieghero, meglio ch' 10 non facessi allora, che cosa vo- 
gliamo fare. I6^ Non posso non farlo, ne vorrei, anche potendo, 
non farlo. 17. Una societa che si formi cosi deve finire con 
r esser composta di ribelli. 18. Parleremo prima di lui, non 
perche egli sia il piu antico, ma perche e il piu importante. 19. Non 
si erano mai accorti delle occhiate di ammirazione con cui lui li 
guardava. 20. Alcuni contadini, credendo che cercasse dei tesori, 
e persuasi che avesse gia qualche cosa di prezioso in tasca, gli ai 
awicinarono per accertarsene. « ,, /. , > 

1 di si, 'that he would.' 

* quel che avevan di meglio, * the best of their belongings.' 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 149 

5. Translate into Italian: i. He told me that he had desired it 
for many years. 2. I should not have believed that you had spoken 
of it to him. 3. If I'm not mistaken, we shall be there in a few 
minutes. 4. I am surprised that they haven't called you yet. 5. I 
know him only by {di) sight; I have seen him several times in the 
Public Gardens. 6. The prisoner has ^ escaped and has hidden him- 
self in the wood; the peasants are protecting him. 7. I was sure 
of it, although her face did not betray any surprise. 8. Did they 
tell you when they would come to your house? 9. We could have 
given it to you, if we had known that you wanted it. 10. It isn't 
impossible that he has seen it, but I don't believe so. 

1 Translate by the proper form of essere. 

LESSON 41. OLD AND POETIC FORMS 

Study section 3 (/) on p. 7, the second footnote on p. 11, the secotid 
footnote on p. 17, section 44 (a), the first footnote on p. 35, section 
48 (e), the footnote on p. 39, section 63 (d), section 68, the forms 
given in section 92 in parentheses and footnotes, the verbs numbered 
23 and 169, and those among nos. 24-125 that are marked Rare or 
Poetical; also the verbs give and ire given on p. 94. 

EXERCISE 41 

1. Give the modern prose equivalents of: lo giorno, i capei, tai re, 
ne^ parla, mel dice, nol credo, sen va, ameria, parleria, parlaro, 
parlerebbono, parloe, parle, parlar, compro,^ sentio, fenno, feste, 
face, diero, ave, avea, avieno, aggia, ara, ei, caggiano, dee, denno, il 
veggo, volsi, puote, ponno, poria, enno, suto, sete, fora, foro, fia, 
chieggo, corre, torre, piagne, vegna. 

^ Do not regard this ne as meaning ' of it.' 

2 Do not regard this form as present indicative. 

2. Study these lines: 

1. Or fia ch' ei vegna solo? Ahi, meglio fora! 

2. Udrassi allor chi puote il ver narrare. 

3. Morte emmi il gire, e il rimaner m' e morte. 

4. Stawi sempre — nol sai? — cui starvi lice. 

5. Tormeli credi? Chi dietti tal forza? 



150 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

6. La patria amar; lieti per lei moriro. 

7. II veggio, o parmi, coi fratei venire. 

8. Qual fuggitivo non vorria mostrarmi. 

9. "O felici costor!" pareane dire. 

10. "Lasciar ti debbo" poi sen gia cantando. 



ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION 

A 

Acacia, accecare, acciaio, acquaiuolo, aggiungere, ahi, allegro, ami- 
cizia, archibugio, artiglieria, bicchiere, biglietto, Boccaccio, Boiardo, 
bugia, buio, buoi, canzone, Carducci, cascaggini, Castiglione, caval- 
leria, Cellini, cencio, centottantotto, cerchio, Checchina, chiacchiere, 
chiaroscuro, Chioggia, cicatrice, ciglio, cinquecento, Civitavecchia, 
cogliere, coraggio, corridoio, costituzionale, crescendo, cugino, cuocere, 
dolcezza, doppio, dunque, echeggiare, faccione, fasciare, fazzoletto, 
fiocchi, fischio, floscio, Fogazzaro, Francesco, fruscio, fuorche, gaio, 
ghiaccio, ghiaia, Ghirlandaio, giaciglio, ginocchio, gioia, Giorgio, 
Girgenti, giudizio, grigio, guai, guerra, Guido Guinizelli, hai, hanno, 
ho, ignobile, incognito, inginocchiatoio, inscioglibile, iridescenza, 
Italia, laggiu, larghezza, lenzuolo, letteratura, liscio, luccichio, Machia- 
velli, menzogna, merciaio, Michelangelo Buonarroti, minchioneria, 
negozio, Niccolo, noialtri, occhiacci, oceano, orecchio, ossia, Pagliacci, 
Palermo, pazienza, Petrarca, piazza, pieghevolezza, Pintoricchio, 
Poliziano, Pollaiuolo, PozzuoH, puo, quacquero, quaggiu, quegli, 
ricchezza, richiamiamo, risuscitare, ruota, Sacchetti, sbercio, sce- 
gliere, schermisce, scherzo, schiamazzo, sciagurato, sciogliere, 
sciupacchiare, scricchiolio, sdraiato, sdrucciolo, Sforza, sgherro, 
Sicilia, singhiozzo, slanciano, squarciagola, stizzisce, sudicio, tazza, 
treccia, tribu,' uggia, uguale, uovo, usciamo, vecchio, viaggio, 

B 

Un mio amico raccontava una scena curiosa alia quale era stato 
presente in casa di un giudice di pace in Milino, molti anni fa. Lo 
aveva trovato tra due litiganti, uno dei quali perorava caldamente 
la sua causa; e quando cestui ebbe finito, il giudice gli disse: "Avete 
ragione." 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 151 

"Ma, signer giudice," disse subito V altro, "lei mi deve sentire 
anche me, prima di decidere." 

"E troppo giusto,"^ rispose il giudice, "dite pur su,^ che v' ascolto 
attentamente." 

Allora quelle si mise con tanto piu impegno a far valere la sua 
causa, e ci riusci cosi bene che il giudice gli disse: "Avete ragione 
anche voi." 

C era li accanto^ un suo bambino di sette o otto anni, il quale, 
giocando pian piano con non so qual bal6cco, non aveva lasciato di 
stare anche attento alia discussione, e a quel punto, alzando un visino 
stupefatto, esclamo: "Ma babbo, non pu d essere che abbiano 
ragione tutt' e due." ' <l,^>m>^ 4^ 

"Hai ragione anche tu," gli disse il giudice. 

Manzoni. 

1 JE troppo giusto, 'That's only fair.' 

2 dite pur su, 'go ahead.' 

3 accdnto, ' in the room with them/ 



Che sia il Pincio nell' 6ra che sul ponente color d'arancio si dipinge 

f^ la gigantesca ombra di San Pietro e del Vaticano, non c' e lingua 

N che possa dire. £ un incanto, un' estasi, un sogno, e un confuso 

viavai d' immensi pensieri, e un tumulto di memorie grandiose e di 

speranze arcafi6, in ctii la mente si perde, come in un mare senza 

confini. Guardando il Gianicolo. e Monte Mario, che stanno in faccia, 

par di vedere nel fondo dell' angusta vallata passar silenziosi i secoli 

fra le nebbie^^della sera, e un iDrivido corre per le ossa, come se da quel 

fonj^o srrizzas'sero , taciturn! e'clipi.gli spettri dei grindi, che resero 

'^'"'^temuta e sacra alle genti questa terra fatale. Questo piccolo spazio, 

che lo s^uardo abbraccia senza fatica, e il punto piii st6rico di tutto 

il mondo. Tutta la civilta antica s^ e"^condensata fra questi colli, e di 

qui, risalendo il Tevere, s' e distesa a^ conquistar la maggior parte 

della terra conosciuta. Di q.ui mossero gli eserciti'invasori, qui ne 

furono celebrati i trionfi, di qui si propagarono le leggi e la lingua che 



152 ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

.... Ut - . 

fecero di gran parte dello sterminato impero un popolo solo. Quando 
poi i vinti si ribellarono, la non vinta regina soggiogo colle speranze 
di un' altra vita tutti coloro che ricusavano il stio dpminio in questa; 
e in nome di Cristo risollevo 1' impero caduto. ^Poiche le furono 
strappate di mano le armi, regno disarmata: ricupero con un altro 
vessillo la corona perdtita, ne fu meno grande e potente di prima. 
E r emblema di questa storia, nodo dei tempi anteriori e dei succes- 
sivi, e la sot to gli occhi: un obelisco egiziano, portato in Roma da- 
gV imperatori romani e sormontato dalla croce, coi^pendia la storia 
di tutta la civilta. '^^ '^'^^^ .,^ 



NOTE ON READING ITALIAN VERSE 

In reading Italian verse the verbal stress is the same as in prose. 
There is no such artificial shifting of the stress as in Latin scansion. 

Two adjacent vowels in the same word are usually to be 
pronounced as belonging to the same syllable, the voice gliding 
quickly from the first vowel to the second. They are however to 
be pronounced as belonging to separate syllables (i) when the first 
is a, e, or o and the second is stressed; (2) when the first of the 
two vowels is the last stressed vowel of the line; (3) in some other 
cases (there is one instance in Exercise E, line 4: trionfdle). 

Two vowels standing one at the end of a word and the other at 
the beginning of the next w^ord and not separated by a mark of 
punctuation are usually to be pronounced, also, as belonging to the 
same syllable. (There are no exceptions in these exercises. Ex- 
ceptions occur when the first of the two vowels is stressed or is 
immediately preceded by a stressed vowel, and in some other 
cases.) If the two vowels are different, the voice glides quickly 
from the first to the second; if they are identical, they are pro- 
nounced as a single long vowel. 

Two adjacent vowels separated by a mark of pronunciation are 
to be pronounced as belonging to separate syllables; though as a 
matter of technical versification they are arbitrarily reckoned as 
belonging to the same syllable, unless they are of one of the types 
referred to as exceptional. 



LESSONS AND EXERCISES 153 



Lungo la strada vedi su la siepe 
ridere a mazzi le vermiglie bacche: 
nei campi arati tornano al presepe 
tarde le vacche. 

Vien per la strada un povero che il lento 

passo tra foglie stridule trascina: 

nei campi intuona una fanciuUa al vento: 

Fiore di spina! . . . Pascoli. 

Line i. su la: the prepositions which normally contract with a 
following definite article are in verse often uncontracted. 

4. tdrde is a predicate adjective used with adverbial force: * slowly/ 
intuona: see section 59 (b). 

8. Fiore di spina: these are the first words of a peasant song. 

£ 

Lievi e bianche a la plaga occidentale 
Van le nubi : a le vie ride e su '1 f oro 
Umido il cielo, ed a 1' uman lavoro 
Saluta il sol, benigno, trionfale. 

Leva in roseo fulgor la cattedrale 
Le mille guglie bianche e i santi d' oro, 
Osannando irraggiata: intorno, il coro 
Bruno de' falchi agita i gridi e 1' ale. 

Tal, poi ch' amor co '1 dolce riso via 
Rase le nubi che gravarmi tanto, 
Si rileva nei sol 1' anima mia, 

E molteplice a lei sorride il santo 

Ideal de la vita: e im' armonia 

6gni pensiero, ed ogni senso un canto. 

CARDUCa. 

Line 2. '/ is a form of il often used in verse. 

10. Rdse is a past absolute used with the force of a present perfect: 
*has swept.' — gravarmi: see section 68 (d). 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



This vocabulary contains all Italian words appearing in exercise sections involving 
translation from theltalian and all words appearing fh Exercises B-E on pp. 150-153, 
with the following exceptions: articles, cardinal and ordinal numerals, possessive and 
personal pronouns, and words occurring only in the following exercise sections; Ex. 28 
sect. 2 Ex. 30 sect. 2, Ex. 31 sect, i, Ex. 34 sect, i, Ex. 35 sect, i, Ex. 36 sect, i, Ex. 39 
sect. I. The meanings of all words occurring in these sections are given in the portions of 
the Grammar assigned for the lessons in question. The irregular verb forms occurring in 
Exercises B-E (except the forms of avere and essere) are separately entered here. 

The position of the secondary stress is indicated only in words in which it falls upon an 
open e or o. 

Nouns ending in are masculine and those ending in a are feminine, unless indication to 
the contrary is given. 



a, to, toward, at, in, on, upon, for, 
by, of; a fare, doing, if one 
does; al fare, on doing, when 
one does. 

abbracciare, to embrace. 

abitante, m., inhabitant. 

abito, coat. 

accadere, to happen. 

accanto, — a, beside. 

accattare, to beg. 

accertarsi, to make certain. 

accogliere, to welcome. 

accorgersi di, to notice. 

accusa, accusation. 

acqua, water. 

addio, good-by. 

adesso, now. 

affare, m., affair. 

affatto, entirely. 

afferrare, to seize. 

affetto, affection. ^ 

Affrica, Africa. .7 

aggiungere, to add. 

agitare, to agitate, wave. 



ah, ah; ah si?, is that so? 

ahi, ah. 

aiutare, to help. 

aiuto, help. -r/^ 

ala, wing. -"y"^ 

albero, tree. 

alciino, some; pran., anyone. 

alloggiare, to lodge. 

allora, then; da — in p6i, there- 
after. 

almeno, at least. 

alto, high, tall; in — , high up. 

altrimenti, otherwise. 

altro, other; 1' uno e 1' — , both. 

alzare, to raise; alzato, up. 

amare, to love, be fond of. 

America, America. ^ 

amicizia, friendship. 

amico, friend. ^-^'^ 

ammalarsi, to fall sick. 

ammirazione, /., admiration. 

amore, m., love. 

anche, also, too, even, at the 
same time. 

ancora, still, yet, again, even, more. 



156 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



andare, to go; andarsene, to go 

off or away; va fatto cosi, it 

must be done so. 
anello, ring, hi 
angusto, narrow, 
anima, soul. 
,anno, year( di due anni, two years 

old; avere due anni, to be two 

years old. 
anteriore, former. 
antico, ancient, old. 
anzi, even, rather, on the contrary. 
apparire, to appear, 
appena, scarcely, as soon as. 
applaudire, to applaud, 
aprire, aprirsi, to open. 
arancio, orange. " 
arare, to plough. 
arcane, secret. '^ ^ 

aria, air; aver 1' — , to seem. 
Ariosto, Ariosto. 
anni, /. j^Z., arms. \i''- 
armonia, harmony. * 
arrivare, to arrive, get; — a, to 

reach. 
ascoltare, to listen, listen to. 
aspettare, to wait, wait for, expect, 
aspetto, aspect, appearance. • 
assai, enough, very, considerably, 

much. 
assente, absent. 
attentamente, attentively, 
attento, attentive, careful, 
dtto, act, attitude. ->w\ 
attomo, — a, around, 
augurare, to wish, 
aurora, dawn. V 

austriaco, Austrian. -^^ 
automobile, m., automobile. ^• 
autore, m., author. •>r^ 
autunno, autumn. -s-"- 



avanti, forward, come in. 

avere, to have, possess, hold; ho 
da, I have to, I must. Other 
idioms in which avere appears 
are registered only under the 
other words concerned. 

awenimento, event. 

awenire, to happen; n. m., future^ 

awertire, to warn. 

awicinarsi a, to approach. 

awiso, warning. 

awocato, lawyer. v.\ 

azione, /., action. ' 

azzurro, blue. 

B 

babbo, papa. ^rv^- 

bacca, berry. 

badare, to notice, take care, pay 
attention. 

balocco, toy. ^^'^ 

bambino, child, small boy. '-^^ 

bastare, to be enough, suffice. 

battaglia, battle. 

battere, to beat, strike. 

baule, m., trunk. 

belle, beautiful, fair, handsome, 
pretty, fine. 

benche, although. 

bene, well; «. m., good thing, hap- 
piness; far — , to do good. 

benedire, to bless. 

benigne, benign. 

benissime, very well. 

bere, to drink. 

biance, white. 

biasimare, to blame, condemn, 

bicchiere, w., glass. 

bigliette, ticket, bill. 

biliarde, billiards. 

biondo, blond, golden. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



157 



bisognare, to be necessary. 

bisogno, need; aver — di, to need. 

bocca, mouth. 

bottone, w., button. 

braccio, arm. 

brivido, shudder. 

bruciare, to burn. 

bruno, brown, dark. 

buio, dark; n., darkness. 

buono, good. 



cadere, to fall. 
caffe, m., coffee. 
calare, to sink, set. 
caldamente, warmly, eagerly. 
caldo, hot, warm. 
cambiare, to change. 
camera, room. 
caminetto, fireplace. 
caniino, chimney. 
campo, field. 
cantare, to sing. 
canto (i), song. 
canto (2), corner. 
capello, hair. 
capire, to understand, 
capitolare, to capitulate, surren- 
der. 
capitolo, chapter, 
cappella, chapel, 
cappello, hat. 
carattere, m., character, 
carico, laden, 
carne, /., meat. 
care, dear. 
carta, paper. 
casa, house, home, 
cattedrale, /., cathedral, 
cattivo, bad. 
causa, cause, case. 



cedere, to yield. 

celebrare, to celebrate. 

centesimo, centime. 

centinaio, hundred. 

centre, centre. 

cercare, to seek, search, look for, 
try. 

certo, certain; per — , for a cer- 
tainty. 

che, conj., that, because, and, 
than; fatto — ebbe, when he 
had made; ecco — , suddenly; 
non — , to say nothing of; se 
non — , if . . . not, but; non 
. . . — , only; poi — , when; 
si — e budno, it's very good 
indeed; o — , used withont trans- 
latable force to introduce a ques- 
tion. 

che, pron., what, what a, who, 
which, that, when; — cosa, 
what; ci6 -:— , quelle — , what, 
that; un nen se — di buone, 
something good, a certain 
goodness. 

chi, who, he who, one who, if any- 
one; — ... — , some . . . 
others; di — , whose. 

chiamare, to call; come si chiama?, 
what is the name of? 

chiare, clear, bright. 

chiave, /., key. 

chiedere, to ask. 

chiesa, church. 

chiudere, to close, shut. 

ci, here, there, in it; often pleo- 
nastic. 

cieco, blind; n., blind man. 

cielo, sky, heaven. 

cio, that; — che, what, that. 

cioe, that is. 



158 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



citta, city. 

cittadino, citizen. 

civilta, civilization. 

classico, classic. 

CO *1, poetic, = col. 

codice, m., manuscript. 

cogliere, to gather. 

colazione,/., lunch. 

c611e, m., hill. 

colore, 7)1., color; — d' arancio, 
orange-colored. 

coloro, those. 

colui, he. 

combattere, to fight. 

come, how, as, like. 

cominciare, to begin. 

compagnia, company. 

compendiare, to sum up. 

compiacersi, to take pleasure. 

compire, to complete, finish. 

compllmento, compliment. 

comporre, to compose. 

comprare, to buy. 

con, with, by, in, on, to. 

concedere, to concede, grant. 

condensare, to condense, concen- 
trate. 

condurre, to lead. 

confetti, m. pi., candy. 

confine, vi., limit. 

confondere, to confuse. 

conoscenza, acquaintance. 

conoscere, to know, make the 
acquaintance of, recognize. 

conquistare, to conquer. 

consiglio, counsel. 

contadino, peasant. 

contentare, to content, satisfy. 

continiiare, to continue. 

continuo, continual. 

contro, — di, against. 



conversazione,/., conversation. 

coraggio, courage; da far — , en- 
couraging. 

coro, choir. 

corona, crown. 

coronare, to crown. 

correre, to run, overrun. 

corte, /., court. 

cortesia, courtesy. 

corto, short. 

cosa, thing, what; che — , what; 
ha qualche — di buono, there 
is something good about it. 

cosi, so, such. 

costare, to cost. 

costo, cost. 

costoro, they. 

costui, he. 

credere, to believe, think. 

crescere, to grow, increase. 

cristiano. Christian. 

Cristo, Christ. 

croce, /., cross. 

crudelta, cruelty. 

cucire, to sew; macchina da — , 
sewing-machine. 

cugina, cousin. 

cugino, cousin. 

cui, whom, which, to which, he to 
whom. 

cuore, m., heart. 

cupo, gloomy. 

cura, care. 

ciirioso, curious. 



da, from, by, for, with, to, of, as, 
like, such as to; da lontano, in 
the distance; da presso, near; 
da mangiare, something or any- 
thing to eat. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



159 



Dante, m., Dante. 

dare, to give, devote; — del, to 

call; darsi per vinto, to give in. 
datare, to date. 

davanti, — a, before, in front of. 
decidere, to decide. 
decisione, /., decision. 
denaro, money, 
dentro, within, in. 
desiderabile, desirable, 
desiderare, to desire. 
desiderio, desire. 
destine, destiny. 
destra, right hand, right. 
deve, 3rd sing. pres. ind. of dovere. 
di, of, about, with, from, by, in, 

to, than, as; dare del, to call; 

dire di si, to say * yes '; al di la 

di, beyond ; del pane, some bread, 
diavolo, devil. 
dietro, — a, behind. 
difetto, defect. 
difficile, difficult. 
difficolta, difficulty, trouble, 
dimenticare, to forget. 
dimostrare, to demonstrate, prove, 
dipingere, to paint. 
dire, to say, tell; — di si, to say 

* yes '; voler — , to mean. 
disarmato, unarmed, 
discussione, /., discussion. 
disgrazia, misfortune, 
dispiacere, to displease; mi di- 

spiace, I'm sorry, I don't like. 
disse, 3rd sing, past abs. of dire, 
distendere, to distend; refl., to 

reach out. 
disteso, pp. of distendere. 
distinguere, to distinguish. 
dite, 2d pi. imv. of dire, 
dito, fini^er. 



divertire, to divert, amuse. 

dividere, to divide. 

divino, divine. 

dolce, sweet. 

dolere, to pain. 

domandare, to ask, ask for. 

domani, tomorrow. 

domenica, Sunday. 

dominio, dominion. 

donna, woman. 

dono, gift. 

dope, after, afterward, since. 

donnire, to sleep. 

dove, where. 

dovere, to owe, be obliged; devo, 

I am to, I have to, I must; 

dovrei, I ought to. 
dure, hard. 

£ 

e, and, both; le dtie e diecii ten 
minutes past two; pift . . . e 
piii, the more . . . the more. 

ecco, here is, there is; — che, 
suddenly. 

ed, and. 

egiziano, Egyptian. 

eh, eh. 

eleggere, to elect. 

emblema, m., emblem. 

energia, energy. 

entrare, to enter, go in, get in, 
come in, 

esagerare, to exaggerate. 

esame, m., examination. 

esclamare, to exclaim. 

esercito, army. 

esistere, to exist. 

espressione,/., expression, remark. 

esprimere, to express. 

essere, to be, become; refl.., to be. 



160 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



est, m., east, 
estasi,/,, ecstasy, 
eta, age. 
Europa, Europe. 

F 

facchino, porter. 

faccia, face; di — , in — , opposite. 

facile, easy. 

falco, falcon. 

falsita, falseness. 

false, false. 

fame,/., hunger. 

fanciulla, girl. 

fanciullo, boy, child. 

fantasma, m., phantom. 

fare, to do, make, have, let, take, 
say, be, act, s,erve as; refl., to 
become, get; lascia — a me, 
leave it to me; dolce — liiente, 
sweet idleness; siil — di, toward; 
fa, ago. Other idioms in which 
fare appears are registered only 
under the other words concerned. 

fatale, fateful. 

fatica, fatigue, difficulty. 

fatto, fact. 

favore, m., favor. 

jfebbraio, February. 

febbre,/., fever. 

fecero, 3rd pi. past ahs. of fare. 

felice, happy. 

ferire, to wound. 

fermo, firm, certain. 

ferro, iron. 

figlio, son. 

filare, to spin. 

filosofia, philosophy. 

finalmente, finally, at last. 

finche, as long as, until; — ... 
non, until. 



fine,/., end. 

finestra, window. 

fingere, to feign; finto, fictitious. 

finire, to finish, end; — coll* an- 

dare, finally to go. 
fine a, until. 
fiore, m., flower. 
fiorino, florin, an obsolete coin 

worth about $2.50. 
Firenze,/., Florence. 
fiume, m., river, 
foglia, leaf. 
folto, thick. 
fondare, to found. 
fondo, depth, trough, hollow, basis, 
fontana, fountain. 
forestiere, w., foreigner, stranger. 
formare, to form, 
fomire, to furnish; — di, to give, 
fore, forum, market place, 
forse, perhaps. 
fdrte, strong. 
fortezza, fort. 
fortimato, fortunate. 
forza, force, strength; con — , hard, 
fotografia, photograph. 
fra, between, among, amid, 

through. 
francese, French, 
frasca, bush, 
frase, /., sentence. 
fratello, brother. 

freddo, cold; fare — , to be cold, 
fretta, haste. 
frutto, fruit. 
fuggire, to flee, 
fuggitivo, fugitive. 
fulgore, m., glow. 
fumare, to smoke. 
fuoco, fire. 
fuorche, except. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



161 



galleria, gallery. 

garantire, to guarantee. 

gente, /., people, nation. 

gentile, gentle, polite, kind. 

gia, already. . 

giacere, to lie. 

giallo, yellow. 

Gianicolo, Janiculum. 

giardino, garden. 

gigantesco, gigantic. 

ginocchio, knee. 

giocare, to play. 

gioia, joy. 

giornale, m., journal, newspaper. 

giorno, day; per — , daily. 

giovane, young; n. m., young man. 

Giovanni, m., John. 

giovine, young. 

giovinezza, youth. 

girare, to whirl. 

gire, poetical, to go; girsene, to 

go away. 
gita, trip, excursion. 
giudicare, to judge. 
giudice, m., judge, justice, 
giungere, to join, clasp; — a, to 

reach. 
giurare, to swear. 
giusto, just, fair. 
godere, to enjoy. 
govemare, to govern. 
grande, great, large, big; n. m., 

great man; fare im — freddo, 

to be very cold. 
grandiose, grand. 
gravare, to weigh down, oppress. 
gravemente, gravely, seriously. 
grazia, favor; pi., thanks. 
grido, cry. 
guadagnare, to earn, gain, win. 



guanto, glove. 

guardare, to look, look at, watch 

guglia, pinnacle. 



idea, idea. 

ideale, m., ideal. 

ieri, yesterday. 

illudere, to deceive. 

illustrissimo, excellency. 

immense, immense. 

imparare, to learn. 

impaziente, impatient. 

impedire, to hinder. 

impegne, pledge, earnestness. 

imperatore, m., emperor. 

impere, empire. 

impertante, important. 

impessibile, impossible. 

in, in, at, to; da allora in p6i, 

thereafter. 
incante, enchantment. 
inchine, bow-. 
incentrare, to meet, 
inderare, to gild, 
indurre, to induce, lead, 
inerzia, inertia, 
infatti, in fact, 
ingegnere, m., engineer. 
Inghilterra, England. 
inginecchioni, kneeling, 
innalzare, to raise, 
insegnare, to teach. 
insieme, together. 
interessante, interesting, 
interesse, m., interest. 
intenare, to intone, start singing, 
intome, round about, 
intreduzione, /., introduction. 
inutile, useless. 



162 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



invasore, m., invader; adj., in- 
vading. 
invece, instead. 
invemo, winter. 
invisibile, invisible, 
ira, anger. 
irraggiato, radiant, 
irrequieto, anxious. 
Italia, Italy. 
italiano, Italian. 



la, there; al di It di, beyond. 

lago, lake. 

lagrima, tear. 

lasciare, to leave, let, fail; lascia 

fare a me, leave it to me. 
latte, m., milk. 
lavorare, to work. 
lavoro, labor, work, 
legge,/., law. 
leggere, to read. 
lento, slow, quiet, gentle, 
lettera, letter. 
levare, to raise, rise, 
lezione,/., lesson. 
li, there; di li a, within, 
liberta, liberty, freedom, 
libro, book. 

licere, poetical, to be permitted, 
lieto, glad. 
lieve, light. 

lingua, tongue, language. 
lira, lira, a coin worth about 20 

cents. 
litigante, m., litigant. 
lontano, distant, far; da — , in the 

distance. 
lume, ni., light. 
limedi, Monday. 



lungo, adj., long. 
lungo, prep., along. 
luogo, place. 

M 

ma, but. 

macchina, machine. 

madre, /., mother. 

maggiore, greater. 

magico, magic. 

mai, never, ever; non ... — ^ 
never, 

malato, sick. 

malattia, sickness, trouble. 

male, badly, ill; n. m., Tiarm, ill; 
far — , to hurt. 

mandare, to send. 

mangiare, to eat. 

maniera, manner. 

manifestare, to manifest. 

mano, /., hand. 

mare, m., sea. 

Maria, Mary. 

Mario, proper name. 

matita, pencil. 

mattina, morning. 

mazzo, cluster. 

medico, doctor. 

medioevale, mediaeval. 

Mediterraneo, Mediterranean. 

meglio, better, best. 

mela, apple. 

memoria, memory. 

menare, to lead, take. 

meno, less; le due — died, ten 
minutes of two; non potere a 
— di non, not to be able to 
help; i — , the minority. 

mente, /., mind; venire in — , to 
occur. 

mentre, while. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



163 



meravigliare, to surprise. 

mercato, market. 

mescolare, to mingle. 

mese, m., month. 

meta, half. 

mettere, to put, set; refl., to begin. 

mezzo, half; in — a, amid; fino a 

— , until the middle of ; le due 

e — , half past two. 
mezzogiorno, noon; dopo — , p. m. 
mica: non ... — , not. 
Michelangelo, Michelangelo, 
migliore, better, best. 
Milano,/., Milan. 
minacciare, to threaten. 
minaccioso, threatening. 
mise, 3rd sing, past abs. of 

mettere. 
misterioso, mysterious. 
modemo, modern, 
moglie, /., wife. 
molteplice, manifold. 
moltissimo, very much, a great 

deal of. 
molto, much, very much; adv., 

much, very; far — male, to 

hurt badly. 
momento, moment. 
mondo, world; non sapere in che 

— si sia, not to know where one 

is, to be completely bewildered. 
montare, to mount, go up. 
monte, m., mountain, mount, 
morire, to die. 
mormorio, murmur, 
morte, /., death. 
mossero, jrd pi. past abs. of 

muovere. 
mostrare, to show; rejl., to 

appear. 
mucchio, pile. 



muovere, to move, start, 
muro, wall. 

N 

Napoli,/., Naples. 

narrare, to narrate, tell. 

nascere, to be born or formed. 

Natale, m., Christmas. 

nazione,/., nation. 

ne, thence; andarsene, to go off 
or away. 

ne, nor, neither; non . . . ne . . . 
ne, neither . . . nor. 

neanche, non ... — , not even. 

nebbia, mist. 

necessario, necessary. 

negare, to deny, refuse. 

nemico, enemy. 

nemmeno, non . . . — , not even. 

nero, black. 

nessuno, no one; non . . . — , 
not anyone. 

neve,/., snow. 

nido, nest. 

niente, non ... — , nothing, not 
anything; dolce far — , sweet 
idleness. 

no, no, not. 

nodo, knot, link. 

nome, m., name. 

non, not, no; — ... che, — 
. . . se — , only; — che, to 
say nothing of; se — , except; 
se — che, if . . . not, but; 
pift . . . che — , more than; — • 
potere — , not to be able to 
avoid or fail; — potere a meno 
di — , not to be able to help; 
un — so che di buSno, some- 
thing good, a certain goodness; 
— so quale, some ... or other. 



164 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



nondimeno, nevertheless. 
nonna, grandmother. 
notizia, notice, news. 
notte, /., night. 
nube, /., cloud, 
nulla, non ... — , nothing, 
numero, number. 
nuocere, to hurt. 

nu6vo, new; che c' e di — ?, 
what's the news? 



o, conj., or, either. 

o, inter j., O; o che, used without 

translatable force to introduce a 

question. 
obbligare, to oblige. 
obelisco, obelisk. 
occasione, /., occasion. 
occhiali, m. pi., glasses. 
occhiata, glance. 
dcchio, eye. 
occidentale, western. 
occupare, to occupy. 
6dio, hatred. 
offrire, to ofifer. 
6ggi, today. 
6gni, every. 
6h, oh. 

6mbra, shadow. 
ombrello, umbrella. 
onorare, to honor. 
onore, m., honor. 
6pera, work. 
operaio, workman. 
opinione, /., opinion. 
ora, adv., now; or — , just. 
6ra, «., hour, time. 
drfano, orphan. 
ore, gold. 
osannare, to sing hosanna. 



osso, bone. 
ozioso, idle. 



pace,/., peace. 

padre, m., father. 

padrone, m., master. 

pagare, to pay. 

pagina, page. 

palazzo, palace. 

pallido, pale. 

pane, m., bread. 

paniere, w., basket. 

parere, to seem, appear, 

parlare, to speak. 

parola, word. 

parte,/., part. 

partire, to depart, leave; — di, to 

leave. 
partita, match, game. 
passare, to pass. 
passo, step. 

patemo, of one's parents, 
patria, fatherland. 
paura, fear. 
pausa, pause. 
pazienza, patience. 
peccato, sin; inter j., too bad. 
pena, trouble. 
penna, pen. 
pensare, to think. 
pensiero, thought. 
pentirsi, to repent. 
per, for, through, along, in, on, as, 

as for; — quanto sia buono^ 

good as it is; stare — , to be 

about to. 
pera, pear. 
perche, why, because, in order 

that; n. m., reason. 
perdere, to lose. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



165 



perfettamente, perfectly, exactly. 

pericolo, danger. 

permettere, to permit, allow. 

perd, however, though. 

perorare, to plead. 

persuadere, to persuade, convince. 

pesce, m., fish. 

pezzo, piece. 

piacere, to please; n. m., pleasure, 

favor; aver — , to be glad; mi 

piace, I like. 
piangere, to weep, cry, weep for. 
piano, smooth, slow; adv., softly, 

quietly. 
picchiare, to knock. 
piccolo, little, small. 
piede, m., foot; a piedi, on foot. 
pienamente, fully. 
pieno, full. 
pieta, pity. 
Pietro, Peter, 
pigliare, to take, catch. 
Pincio, Pincian Hill, 
pistola, pistol. 
pittore, m., painter. 
pitttira, painting. 
pift, more, most, longer, again; — 

. . . e — , the more . . . the more; 

non . . . — , not, no, not any; 

i — , the majority. 
piuttosto, rather. 
plaga, sky. 

po', abbreviated form o/p6co. 
pochissimo, very little. 
poco, little, a little, 
poesia, poetry, poem. 
poeta, m., poet. 

poi, then; da allora in — , there- 
after; — che, when. 
poiche, after. 
polso, pulse. 



ponente, m., west. 

ponte, m., bridge. 

popolo, people. 

porre, to put, place, send. 

porta, door. 

portare, to carry, bring, take, 

show, 
possa, jrd sing. pres. subj. of 

potere. 
possibile, possible. 
posto, place. 
potente, powerful. 
potere, to be able; posso, I can, I 

may; non — non, not to be 

able to avoid or fail; non — 

a meno di non, not to be able 

to help, 
poveretta, poor woman. 
poveretto, poor fellow. 
povero, poor; n., poor man. 
pranzo, dinner. 

praticare, to practice, associate. 
preferire, to prefer. 
preghiera, prayer, entreaty, 
premere, to press. 
prendere, prendersi, to take, 
presentare, to present. 
presente, present. 
presepe, m., stable, 
presso, da — , near, 
prestare, to lend, 
presto, quickly, soon, early, 
pretendere, to expect, 
prevedere, to foresee. 
prezioso, valuable. 
prezzo, price. 
prima, first, before; — di, - - che, 

before. 
principio, beginning. 
profondo, deep, low. 
proibire, to forbid. 



166 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



promettere, to promise. 
pronto, ready, quick, 
propagare, to spread abroad. 
proseguire, to continue, 
prpteggere, to protect, patronize. 
prowidenza, providence. 
pubblicare, to publish. 
punto, point; adv., at all. 
puo, jrd sing. pres. hid. of potere. 
purche, provided that, if only. 
pure, yet, just; — troppo, unfortu- 
nately. 



quadro, picture. 

qualche, some, a few; ha — cosa 

di buono, there is something 

good about it. 
qualcheduno, someone. 
qualcosa, something. 
quale, which, what, as; il — , who, 

which; non so — , some ... or 

other. 
qualita, quality. 
quando, when. 
quanto, how much, as much, as 

much as, all that, that, as; per 

— sia buono, good as it is. 
quarto, quarter. 
quasi, almost, as if. 
quello, that, that one, the one, 

the, he; — che, what, that, 
questo, this, this one. 
qui, here; di — , hence. 



raccolta, collection. 

raccontare, to narrate, tell, tell 

about. 
rSdere, to shave, sweep. 
ragazza, girl. 



ragazzo, boy. 

ragione, /., reason; aver — , to be 

right. 
rase, jrd sing, past abs. of radere. 
re, m., king. 
regalare, to give. 
regina, queen. 
regnare, to reign. 
rendere, to render, give back, 

make. 
resero, jrd pi. past abs. of 

rendere. 
restare, to stay. 
restituire, to give back, 
ribellarsi, to rebel. 
ribelle, m., rebel, 
ricchezza, riches, wealth, 
ricco, rich. 

ricevere, to receive, get. 
richiedere, to ask. 
riconoscere, to recognize, 
ricuperare, to recover, regain, 
ricusare, to refuse, deny, 
ridere, to laugh. 
rifiutare, to refuse. 
rifugiarsi, to take refuge. 
riguardare, to look again, regard, 

concern. 
rilevare, to raise again; refl., to 

rise again. 
rimanere, to remain, be left, be. 
rimettere, to replace; refi., to gaia 
rincrescere, to displease; mi rin- 

cresce, I'm sorry. 
rincrescimento, regret. 
ringraziare, to thank. 
ripetere, to repeat. 
risalire, to go up. 
riso, smile. 

risollevare, to raise again. 
rispettare, to respect. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



367 



rispetto, respect. 
rispondere, to answer, reply. 
rispose, 3rd sing, past abs. of 

rispondere. 
ritardo, delay; in — , late, 
ritirare, to draw back. 
riuscire, to go out again, succeed, 
rivedere, to see again. 
rizzare, to raise; refl., to rise. 
Roma, Rome. 
romano, Roman. 
romanzo, novel. 
rompere, to break. 
r6sa, rose. 
roseo, rosy, 
rosso, red. 
rotondo, round. 



S 

sacro, sacred. 

salire, to go up. 

salotto, parlor. 

salutare, — a, to greet. 

salute,/., health. 

sangue, m., blood. 

sano, sane, safe. 

santo, holy; saint. 

sapere, to know, find out, know 
how, be able; far — , to tell; 
non — in che m6ndo si sia, not 
to know where one is, to be 
completely bewildered; un non 
so che di buono, something 
good, a certain goodness; non 
so quale, some ... or other. 

scala, stair. 

Scarpa, shoe. 

scena, scene. 

scendere, to go down. 

sciocco, fool; da — , foolishly. 



sciogliere, to untie, remove. 

sciopero, strike; fare — , to strike. 

scodella, bowl. 

scopa, broom. 

scopare, to sweep. 

scordarsi di, to forget. 

scorso, last. 

scrivania, desk. 

scrivere, to write. 

scuola, school. 

scuro, dark. 

se, if, whether; se non, except; 

se non che, if . . . not, but; 

non . . . se non, only, 
secolo, century. 
secondo, according to. 
sedere, to sit; seduto, sitting, 
seggiola, chair, 
segnare, to mark. 
seguente, following. 
seguire, to follow. 
seguitare, to follow; — a, to 

keep on. 
semplice, simple. 
sempre, always. 
senno, wisdom. 
sensazione, /., sensation. 
senso, sense. 
sentire, to feel, hear, listen, listen 

to; sentite, I say, tell me. 1 

senza, — che, without, 
sera, evening. 
serva, servant, 
servire, to serve. 
servitore, m., servant, 
sete, /., thirst; aver — , to be 

thirsty. 
settimana, week, 
severe, severe, 
sforzo, effort. 
sguardo, glance. 



168 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



si, yes, so; ah si?, is that so?; si 
che e buono, it's very good 
indeed. 

siepe,/., hedge. 

signora, lady. 

signore, w., lord, gentleman, 
master, Mr. 

silenzioso, silent, still. 

simile, similar, like, such. 

simpatico, sympathetic, agreeable. 

sincero, sincere. 

Sistina, Sistine. 

so, ist sing. pres. ind. of sapere. 

societa, society. 

soffrire, to suffer. 

soggiogare, to subjugate. 

soglia, threshold. 

soglio, throne. 

sogno, dream. 

soldato, soldier. 

soldo, penny, cent. 

sole, m., sun, sunlight. 

solera, to be wont. 

solo, alone, single, only. 

soltanto, only. 

sorella, sister. 

sormontare, to surmount. 

Sorrento, Sorrento. 

sorridere, to smile. 

sospettare, to suspect. 

sotto, beneath. 

spagnuolo, Spanish; n., Spaniard. 

spaventare, to frighten. 

spazio, space. 

spedale, m., hospital. 

spedire, to send. 

speranza, hope. 

sperare, to hope. 

spesso, often. 

spettro, spectre, ghost. 

spiegare, to explain. 



spina, thorn. 

spirito, spirit. 

sposa, wife. 

sposo, bridegroom; adj., engagedo 

stamane, this morning. 

stanno, jrd pi. pres. ind. of stare. 

stanotte, last night. 

stanza, room. 

stare, to stand, be, stay, sit; — 
per, to be about to. 

stasera, this evening. 

state, state. 

stazione, /., station. 

sterminato, boundless. 

stesso, same, self. 

stoffa, stuff, goods. 

storia, history, story. 

storico, historic, historical. 

strada, street, road, 

strano, strange. 

strappare, to snatch, tear. 

stretto, narrow. 

stridulo, harsh, rustling. 

stringere, to bind, press. 

studente, m., student. 

studiare, to study. 

studio, study. 

stupefatto, astonished. 

stupendo, fine. 

su, up, on, upon. 

subito, at once; — che, as soon as. 

succedere, to succeed, follow,, 
happen; succedersi, n. m., suc- 
cession. 

successive, succeeding. 

su6ne, sound. 

superiore, superior. 



tacere, to be silent or still. 
tacitume, taciturn, silent. 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



169 



tale, such, so. 

tanto, so much, as, so; — pift, all 

the more. 
tardi, late. 
tardo, slow. 
tasca, pocket, 
tavola, table. 
teatro, theatre. 
tedesco, German, 
telefonare, to telephone, 
tema, m., theme. 
temere, to fear, be afraid, 
tempo, time, weather; tanto — , 

so long. 
tenere, to hold; — per fermo, to 

be certain; — vivo, to keep up. 
terra, earth, ground, land, world, 
terribile, terrible. 
terrore, m., terror, 
tesoro, treasure. 
testa, head. 
Tevere, m., Tiber, 
tingere, to tinge, stain. 
toccare, to touch, feel, 
togliere, to take; — a, to take 

from. 
tono, tone. 
tomare, to return, go back, come 

back; tomarsene, to come 

home, 
torre, /., tower. 

torto, wrong; aver — , to be wrong. 
totale, total, 
tra, between, through. 
tranquillamente, calmly, 
trarre, to draw, bring, take, 
trascinare, to drag. 
trattare, to treat. 
tremare, to tremble, 
treno, train. 
trionfale, triumphal. 



trionfo, triumph. 

triste, sad. 

troppo, too, too much, very; pur 

— , unfortunately. 
trovare, to find. 
tumulto, tumult. 
tutto, all, everything; — il, the 

whole; tutti e due, both. 

U 

ubbidire, to obey. 

uccello, bird. 

udire, to hear. 

ultimo, last, latest. 

umano, human, of man, kindly. 

umido, wet. 

unire, to unite. 

imita, unity, union. 

universita, university. 

uno, one, some, someone; 1* — 

e 1' altro, both. 
uomo, man. 
uscio, doorway, door, 
uscire, to go out; — di, to leave, 
utile, useful, good. 



vacanza, vacation. 

vacca, cow. 

vagone, m., car. 

valere, to be worth; far — , to 

prove, 
valigia, valise, bag. 
vallata, valley. 

van, 3rd pi. pros. ind. of andare. 
vaticano, Vatican. 
vecchia, old woman. 
vecchio, old; n., old man. 
vedere, to see; far — , to show, 
vendere, to sell, 
venerdi, Friday. 



170 



ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



Venezia, Venice. 

venire, to come, be; — in mente, 
to occur. 

ventina: una — di, twenty or so. 

vento, wind. 

verde, green. 

venniglio, vermilion, red. 

vero, true; non e — ?, a request for 
assent, to he translated, according 
to the context, as am I not?, was 
he not? etc. 

verso, toward. 

vessillo, banner. 

vestito, dress. 

vi, there, to it, in it. 

via, way, street; adv., away. 

viaggio, journey. 

viavai, m., coming and going, 
surging. 

vien, srd sing. pres. ind. of venire. 

villa, villa. 

villaggio, village. 

vincere, to win, vanquish, con- 
quer, overcome; darsi pervinto, 
to give in. 

vino, wine. 

vinto, pp. of vincere. 



virtfi, /., virtue. 

visino, little face. 

visita, visit. 

visitare, to visit. 

viso, face. 

vista, sight, view. 

vita, life. 

vivere, to live. 

vivo, alive, keen; tener — , to 

keep up. 
vizio, vice, 
voce,/., voice. 
volere, to will, be willing, wish, 

want, like, intend, decide, grant, 

think; — dire, to mean; ci 

vuole, it takes; cosa vuole?, 

never mind. 
volta, time; una — , once, once 

upon a time; un' altra — , 

again. 
volume, m., volume. 
voto, vote. 



zio, uncle. 
zitto, silent. 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



This vocabulary contains all English words appearing in exercise sections involving 
translation into Italian, except articles, cardinal and ordinal numerals, and possessive and 
personal pronouns. 

Italian nouns ending in o are masculine and those ending in a are feminine , unless 
indication to the contrary is given. 

Irregular Italian verbs are marked with a star. 



able: be — , potere.* 

about, ( = approximately) circa; 
( = around) intorno a; — it, ne; 
be — to, stare * per. 

according to, secondo. 

ache, dolere.* 

affection, aff^tto. 

afraid: be — , temere. 

after, dope; day — tomorrow, 
doman 1' dltro. 

again, ancora. 

against, c6ntro; {before a disjunc- 
tive protioim) c6ntro di. 

agent, fatt6re, m. 

agreeable, simpatico. 

all, tutto; not ... at — , non . . . 
punto. 

allude, alludere.* 

almost, quasi. 

alone, solo. 

already, gia. 

although, bench&. 

always, sempre. 

among, fra. 

amuse, divertire. 

ancient, antico. 

and, e; go — , andare * a. 



another, un dltro. 

answer, rispondere.* 

any, adj., alcuno; not . . . — , 
non . . . nessuno; pron., ne. 

anything, qudlche cosa; not . . . 
— , non . . . niente. 

applaud, applaudire. 

apple, mela. 

April, aprile, m. 

arrival, arrfvo. 

arrive, arrivare. 

as, come, tanto, qudnto: see 32; 
as soon as, subito che; as far 
as, fino a. 

ascend, salire.* 

ashamed: be — , vergogndrsi. 

ask, (lesson 15) domandare; {les- 
son 32 and later lessons) chie- 
dere *; — for, chiedere.* 

at, a; at last, finalmdnte; at least, 
almeno; at once, subito; at 
his house, da lui; not ... at 
all, non . . . pdnto; look at, 
guarddre. 

aunt, zia. 

automobile, autom6bile, ?n. 

autumn, autunno. 

away, via; go — , andarsenc* 



172 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



B 

back, dietro; come or go — , 
torndre; give — , restituire. 

bad, cattivo. 

bag, valigia. 

basket, paniere, m. 

be, essere *; {of health) stare *; 
I am to, devo.* Other idioms 
with be are registered only tmder 
the other words concerned.* 

beat, battere. 

beautiful, hello. 

because, perche. 

before, adv., prima; conj., prima 
che; prep., (of time) prima di; 
{of place) davanti. 

beg, pregare. 

begittf-Gominciare. 

behind, dietro; {before a disjunc- 
tive pronoun) dietro a. 

believe, credere. 

beside, accanto a. 

best, adj., migliore; adv., meglio. 

betray, tradire. 

better, adj., migliore; adv., meglio. 

between, tra. 

big, grande. 

bind, stringere.* 

black, nero. 

book, libro. 

bom: be — , nascere.* 

both, tutti e due. 

bow, inchino. 

boy, ragazzo. 

brave, coraggioso. 

bread, pane, m. 

break, rompere.* 

brick, mattone, m. 

bring, portare. 

broad, largo. 

brother, fratello. 



build, costruire.* 

business, affdre, m. 

but, ma; ( = only) non . . . che. 

button, bottone, m. 

buy, comprare. 

by, da; {in special cases) di, per. 



call, chiamare. 

can: I — , posse* 

care, cura; take — , badare. 

carry, portare. 

cent, soldo. 

centre, centro. 

century, secolo; see 39 (c). 

certain, c^rto. 

cheek, guancia. 

child, fanciullo. 

choose, scegliere.* 

church, chiesa. 

city, citta. • 

close, chitidere.* 

cloud, nuvola. 

coat, abito. 

coffee, caffe, m. 

cold, freddo. 

color, colore, m. 

come, venire*; — back, tornare; 

— in, entrare. 
comfort, confortdre. 
company, compagnia. 
compel, costringere.* 
conduct, condtirre.* 
conquer, vincere.* 
consist, constdre.* 
content, contento. 
continue, continuare. 
convince, convincere.*^ 
cook, cuocere.* 
comer, canto. 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



173 



cost, costare. 
count, conte, m. 
country, paese, m. 
courage, coraggio. 
cousin, cuginb. 
cover, coprire.* 
crowd, affollare. . 
crude, crude, 
cry, piangere.* 
custom, costume, m. 
cut, tagliare. 



D 

dark, scuro; {lessons 25 and 33) 

buio. 
day, giorno; — after tomorrow, 

doman 1' altro. 
decide, decidere.* 
depart, partire. 
desire, n., desiderio. 
desire, vh., desiderare. 
desk, scrivania. 
die, morire.* 
difficult, difficile. 
difficulty, difficolta. 
dinner, pranzo. 
disappear, sparire.* 
ditch, fossa. 
divide, dividere.* 
do, fare.* For do as auxiliary, 

see 54 (g). 
doge, doge, m. 
door, porta. 
doubt, dubbio. 
down, giu; sit — , sedere.* 
drag, trarre.* 
draw, trdrre.* 
dress, vestito. 
drink, bere.* 
duke, duca, m. 



each, adj., 6gm; pron., ognuno; 

— other: sec 47, 2 and 51 (/). 
early, presto. 
earn, guadagnare. 
easy, facile, 
eat, mangiare. 
egg, uovo. 
either, o. 

Emmanuel, Emanuele, m, 
employee, impiegato. 
end, finire. 
enemy, nemico. 
English, inglese. 
enjoy, godere. 
enough, abbastanza; be — , ba- 

stare. 
enter, entrare. 
entreaty, preghiera. 
escape, scappare. 
Europe, Europa. 
even, ancora; not . . . — , non 

. . . nemmeno. 
evening, sera; this — , stasera. 
ever, sempre. 
every, ogni. 
everything, tutto. 
examination, esame, m. 
exclamation, esclamazione, f^ 
exist, esistere.* 
explain, spiegare. 
express, esprimere.* 
extinguish, spegnere.* 
eye, occhio. 



F 

face, fdccia. 

fall, cadere.* 

far, lontdno; as — as, flno a. 

father, padre, m. 



174 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



fatherland, patria. 

fault, colpa. 

favor, favore, m. 

fear, temere. 

feel, sentire. 

few, a — , pochi. 

fight, combattere. 

finally, finalmente. 

find, trovare. 

fine, bello. 

finger, dlto. 

finish, finire. 

first, adv., prima. 

flee, fuggire. 

Florence, Firenze, /. 

flower, fiore, m. 

follow, seguire.* 

foot, piede, m. 

for, per; — two years, due anni, 
dadueanni: see 79 (e); ask — , 
chiedere *; look — , cercare; 
wait — , aspettare. 

foreigner, forestiere, w. 

France, Francia. 

French, francese. 

friend, amico. 

from, da; {in special cases) di. 

fry, friggere.* 

full, pieno. 



gallery, galleria. 

garden, giardino. 

gather, cogliere.* 

gentleman, signore, m. 

get, ricevere. 

girl, ragazza. 

give, dare *; — back, restitulre. 

glasses, occhiali, m. pi. 

glove, guanto. 

go, andare *; go away, andar- 



sene *; go back, tornare; go 
in, entrare; go out, uscire *; 
go up, sallre.* 

good, buono. 

goods, stoflfa. 

government, governo. 

gratitude, gratitudine, /. 

great, grande. 

greet, salutare. 

grieve, dolere.* 

ground, terra. 

grow, crescere.* 

guarantee, garantire. 

guard, guardia. 



habit, abitudine, /. 

half, «., meta; adj., mezzo; — 

past two, le due e mezzo, 
hand, mano, /.; right — , destra. 
handkerchief, fazzoletto. 
handsome, bello. 
happen, succedere.* 
happy, felice. _ , 

hard, adv., forte. /■ ^^L^ 
harm, nuocere. * - ' ''^ 'j 
hat, cappello. 
have, avere *; {causative) fare *; 

{expressing obligation) dovere.* 

For have as auxiliary, see 54, 3. 
head, testa. 
health, salute, /. 
hear, sentire; {lesson 38) udire.* 
help, aiutare; not to be able to — , 

non potere * a meno di non. 
here, qui, ci: see 84; — is, ecco. 
hide, nascondere.* 
high, alto. 
hill, colle, m. 
hold, tenere.* 
home, casa. 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



175 



honor, on6re, m. 

hope, sperare. 

hotel, albergo. 

hour, ora. 

house, casa; at his — , da Ifii. 

how, come; — much, quanto. 



idea, idea, 

if, se. 

impossible, impossibile. 

in, in; {with the name of a city) 
a; ( = ivithin) fra; {in special 
cases) di; come or go in, en- 
trare; in order that, perche; 
in this way, cosi. 

industrious, industrioso. 

instead, invece. 

interesting, interessante. 

into, in; {in special cases) a. 

invade, invadere.* 

Italian, italiano. 

Italy, Italia. 



John, Giovanni, m. 
June, giugno. 



keep, tenere *; — still, tac6re.* 
key, chiave, /. 
kill, ucjcidere.* 
king, re, m. 
knock, picchiare. 

know, sapere *; { = be acquainted 
with) conoscere.* 



last, ultimo; at — , finalmente; 

— night, stanotte; — year, 

r anno scorso. 
late, in ritardo. 
latest, ultimo. 
laugh, ridcre.* 
lawyer, avvocato. 
lead, menare. 
leaf, foglia. 
least: at — , almeno. 
leave, {intransitive) partire; {tran- 
sitive) lasciare. 
lend, prestare. 
lesson, lezione, /. 
let, lasciare. For let as auxiliary , 

see the note on p. 115. 
letter, lettera. 
library, biblioteca. 
lie, giacere.* 
life, vita. 
light, n., lume, m. 
light, vb., accendere.* 
like, prep., come; — a man, da 

uomo. 
like, vb., {with an infinitive) 

volere *; I like it, mi piace.* 
line, Iinea. 
little, piccolo; a — ( = some), un 

po' di; ( = somewhat), un po'. 
live, vivere.* 
long, lungo. 
look, — at, guarddre; — for, 

cercare. 
lose, perdcre. 
love, amarc. 
low, profondo. 
Itmch, colazi6ne, /. 



lady, signora. 
lake, lago. 
large, grande. 



M 
make, fare.* 
man, uomo; young — , gi6vane, m. 



176 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



manner, mamera. 

market, mercato. 

Mary, Maria. 

may: I — , posso.* 

Milan, Milano,/. 

mile, miglio. 

minute, minuto; ten minutes past 

two, le due e died; ten minutes 

of two, le due meno died. 
mistaken: be — , sbagliarsi. 
moment, momento. 
monarch, monarca, m. 
Monday, lunedi. 
money, denaro. 
month, mese, m. 
more, piu. 
morning, mattina; this — , sta- 

mane. 
most, piu. 
mother, madre, /. 
mountain, montagna. 
move, muovere.* 
Mr., signer. 
much, molto; how — , quanto; 

so — , tanto; too — , troppo; 

very — , molto. 
must: I — , devo.* 



N 
name, nome, m. 
Naples, Napoli, /. 
near, vidno a. 
necessary, necessario; be — , bi- 

sognare. 
never, mai. 
new, nuovo. 
newspaper, giornale, m. 
night, notte, /.; last — , stanotte. 
no, no; — one, nesstino. 
noon, mezzogiorno. 



not, non. 
novel, romanzo. 
now, ora. 



obliged: be — , dovere.* 

o'clock: two — , le due. 

of, di; of it, of him, of them, ne; 

ten minutes of two, le due meno 

died. 
off, via; take — , levare. 
offer, offrire.* 
often, spesso. 
old, vecchio. 

on, su; {in special cases) con. 
once, una volta; at — , subito. 
one, uno; {as indefinite subject) 

si; no — , nessuno; other — , 

altro; that — , the — , quello; 

this — , questo; — who, chi. 
only, adj., solo; adv., sol tanto. 
open, adj., aperto. 
open, vh., aprire.* 
or, o; ten or so: see^O. 
order, n., ordine, m.; in — that, 

perche. 
order, vh., comandare. 
other, — one, altro; each — : see 

47, 2 and 51 (/). 
ought: I — , dovrei. 
out, fuori; go — , uscire *; put — =, 

spegnere.* 
outside, di fuori. 
owe, dovere.* 
own, proprio. 



pain, dolere.* 
pair, paio. 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



177 



paper, carta. 

pardon, perdonare. 

parlor, salotto. 

past, passato; half — two, le due 

e mezzo. ^ 

patience, pazienza. 
pay, pagare. 
peasant, contadino. 
pen, penna. 
pencil, matfta. 
perfectly, perfettamente. 
perhaps, forse. 
person, persona. 
persuade, persuadere,* 
photograph, fotografia. 
picture, quadro. 
place, n., posto. 
place, vh., porre.* 
please, piacere.* 
pleasure, piacere, m. 
pocket, tasca. 
poem, poesia. 
polite, gentile. 
poor, povero. 
pope, papa, m. 
porter, facchino. 
praise, lodare. 
prefer, preferire. 
present, presentare. 
press, premere. 
pretty, belle. 
prisoner, prigioniero. 
probably, probabilmente. 
promise, promettere.* 
protect, proteggere.* 
provided, purche. 
public, pubblico. 
push, spingere.* 
put, (lessons 28 and 30) mettere *; 

(lessons 32 and 34) porre *; — 

out, sp^gnere.* 



queen, regina. 
quick, subito. 



rain, pidvere.* 

read, leggere.* 

ready, pronto. 

really, veramente. 

recall, ricordare. 

receive, ricevere. 

recognize, conoscere.* 

red, rosso. 

remain, rimanere.* 

Renaissance, Rinascimento. 

repeat, ripetere. 

respect, rispettare. 

return, tornare. 

right, diritto; — hand, destra; be 

— , aver* ragi6ne. 
rise, sorgere.* 
river, fiume, m. 
Rome, R6ma. 
room, stanza. 
rose, rosa. 
round, rot6ndo. 
rim, correre.* 



run, correre. "^ 
Russia, Russia. 



sacristan, sagrestdno. 
say, dire.* 
scene, scena. 
school, scuola. 
search, cercdre. 
seated, seduto.^ 
see, vedere.* 
seek, cercdre. 
seem, parere.* 



178 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



self, stessD. 

send, mandare. 

sentence, frase, /. 

September, settembre, m. 

servant, servitore, m. 

serve, servire. 

several, parecchi. 

sew, cucire.* 

shake, scuotere.* 

shoe, Scarpa. 

shop, bottega. 

short, corto. 

shoulder,' spalla. 

show, mostrare. 

shut, chiudere.* 

sick, malato. 

sight, vista. 

silent, silenzi6so; be — , tacere.* 

since, {causal) poiche; {temporal) 

dacche. 
sincere, sincere. 
sing, cantare. 
sir, signore, m. 
sister, sorella. 
sit, — down, sedere.* 
site, site. 
sleep, dormire. 
small, piccolo. 
smile, sorridere.* 
smoke, fumo. 
snow, n., neve,/. 
snow, vb., nevicare. 
so, cosi; so much, tanto; I think 

so, lo credo; ten or so: sec 40. 
some, alcuno, qualche, ne: see 89. 
someone, qualcuno. 
something, qualche cosa. 
song, canto. 
sonnet, sonetto. 

soon, presto; as — as, subito che. 
speak, parlare. 



spend, {of money) spendere *; 

{of time) passare. 
square, piazza, 
stand, stare.* 
start, partire. 
station, stazione, /. 
stay, {lesson 15) restare; {lesson 24 

and later lessons) rimanere.* 
still, adj., quieto; keep — , tacere.* 
still, adv., ancora. 
stocking, calza. 
street, via. 
student, studente, m. 
study, 71., studio. 
study, vb., studiare. 
such a, un tale. 
suffer, soffrire.* 
summer, estate, /. 
sun, sole, m. 
Sunday, domenica. 
sure, sictiro. 
surprise, ;/., sorpresa. 
surprise, vb., sorprendere *; be 

surprised, meravigliarsi. 
siurender, renders!.* 
surround, cingere.* 
swear, giurare. 
sword, spada. 
syllable, siUaba. 



table, tavola. 

take, prendere*; ( = take away) 
togliere *; ( = accompany, lead) 
menare; — care, badare; — 
off, levare; it takes, ci vuole.* 

talk, parlare. 

tall, alto. 

telephone, telefonare. 

tell, {lessons 13-17) raccontare; 
{lessons 35-40) dire.* 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



179 



than, che, di: sec 33. 

thank, ringraziare. 

that, conj., che; in order — , 
perche. 

that, pron., quello, cio, che: see 
42 and 44; — one, quello. 

theatre, teatro. 

then, poi. 

there, la, vi, ci: see 84; — is: 
see note on p. log. 

thing, cosa. 

think, {= meditate) pensare; ( = 
suppose) credere. 

this, questo; — one, questo; in 
— way, cosi; — morning, 
stamane; — evening, stasera. 

though, pero. 

thousand, migliaio. 

through, per, 

ticket, biglietto. 

time, tempo, volta: see note on p. 
III. 

to, a; {before the name of a coun- 
try) in; {in special cases) da, di, 
per; according to, secondo; be 
about to, stare * per. For to 
before an infinitive, see 79 {b); 
for to with an unemphatic per- 
sonal pronoun, see 47-50. 

today, oggi. 

tomorrow, domani; day after — , 
doman V altro. 

too, — muchj troppo; he — , 
dnche lui. 

toward, verso. 

tower, torre, /. 

train, treno. 

travel, viaggiare. 

tree, albero. 

true, vero. 

tnmk, baule, m. 



try, cercdre. 

turn, {intransitive) volgersi*; {tran- 
sitive) volgcre.* 

U 

umbrella, ombrello. 

under, sotto. 

understand, capire. 

until, conj., finche non; prep. 

fine a. 
up, su; up to, fino a; go up, 

salire, * 



vase, vaso. 
Venice, Venezia. 
very, — much, molto, 
Victor, Vittorio. 
view, vista. 
villa, villa, 
village, villaggio. 
visit, visitare. 
vote, votare. 

W 

wait, — for, aspettare. 

wake, svegliare. 

walk, cammindre. 

wall, muro. 

want, volere.* 

warm, caldo. 

waste, sprecare. 

watch, guardare. 

water, acqua. 

way, via; in this — , cosi, 

weather, tempo. 

week, settimana. 

weep, piangere.* 

well, bene. 

what, inter]., c6me. 



180 



ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY 



what, pron., quello che, che, che 
cosa: see 42-44. 

when, quando. 

where, dove. 

wherever, dovunque. 

which, che, quale: see 43 and 44. 

while, mentre. 

white, bianco. 

who, chi, che : see 43 and 44 ; one 
— , chi; whom, cui. 

whole, intero; the — , tutto il. 

whose, di chi. 

why, perche. 

wife, moglie, /. 

willing: be — , volere.* 

wind, vento. 

window, finestra. 

winter, inverno. 

wish, volere.* 

with, con. 

without, senza; {before a disjunc- 
tive pronoun) senza di. 

woman, donna. 



wont: be — , solere.* 

wood, bosco. 

word, parola. 

work, n., lavoro; {literary work) 

opera. 
work, vh., lavorare. 
worse, peggio. 
worth: be — , valere.* 
worthy, degno. 
write, scrivere.* 
writer, scrittore, m. 
wrong: be — , aver* torto. 



year, anno. 

yellow, giallo. 

yes, si. 

yesterday, ieri. 

yet, ancora; ( = nevertheless) ep- 

pure. 
yield, cedere. 
yoimg, giovane. 



INDEX 



[The numbers refer to paragraphs. Ad. N. means the Additional Notes on 
Pronunciation printed on pp. 6-10.] 



a (letter): 2; Ad. N., 2. 

a (preposition): 79; 79, b, h. 

Accent: 7; Ad. N. (pp. 9, 10); 47; 
48; 84; 92, e. 

Accents: 3; 7. 

Address (forms of): 52. 

Adjectives: 26-34. 

Comparison: 31-34; gender: 
26; 28; number: 26; 29; 
position: 27; used as nouns: 
20; 30. 

Adverbs: 80-85. 

ci, vi: 47, a; 84; comparison: 
80, 2; manner: 85; ne: 47, 
3, a; 56, h; 'never': 83; 
'not,' non: 80, i; 81; 91, a; 
'only': 82; position: 80, i; 
'so': 85, a. 

* All': 87. 

Alphabet: i; Ad. N., i. 

altrui: gi, d. 

'Any': 88. 

Articles: 9-16. 

Augmentatives : 35-37. 

Auxiliary verbs: 53-57. 

avere: 53, b; 54, 3; essere: 53, 
a; 54, I, 3; compound 
tenses: 54; 56; modal aux- 
iliaries: 57. 

avere: 53, b; 54, 3; 54, b; 92, 5. 



'Be': 53, a; 54, i, 3; 54, a, c, d, f; 

92, 126. 
belle: 29, c. 
'Both': 38,4; 91- 
buono: 29, c. 

'Can': see Modal Auxiliaries. 

ci (adv.): 47, a; 84. 

ci (pron.): 47-50- 

Close Vowels: 3; Ad. N., 3. 

Comparison: 31-34; 80, 2. 

Adjectives: 31-34; adverbs: 
80, 2; irregular: 31, a; 
80, 2. 

Compound Tenses: 54; 56; 73; 75. 

Conditional: see Past Future. 

Conjugation: 53-68; 92. 

First: 59; second: 60; third: 
60; fourth: 61; variation?:' 
63; 66, a; 68; irregular 
verbs: 64-68; 92; auxiliary 
verbs: 53-57; compound 
tenses: 54; 56; compound 
verbs: 67, a; 93, a. 

Conjunctions: 78. 

With subjunctive: 77, d; 78, 
a, b. 

Consonants: 4-6; Ad. N., 4-6. 

Contraction: 12; 23 (2); 50 (})\ 
63, d; 65; 66, i; 68, a. 



182 



INDEX 



da: 79, c,/, g. 
Dates: 38, b; 39, b, c. 
Definite Article: 10-13. 

Form: 10-12; use: 12, a; 13; 
38, b; 39, a; 45; 69; 70. 
di: 12; 17; 79, b, 3,/, /f,i. 
Diminutives: 35-37. 
'Do': 54, g. 
Double Letters: 6. 
Doubling: Ad. N., 6; 48, d; 93, a. 

e (letter): 3; Ad. N., 3; 68, i,j. 
e (conjunction): 78; 78, c. 
ecco: 48, e; 84, a. 
essere: 53, a; 54, i, 3; 54, a, c, J; 

92, 126. 
Exclamations: Ad. N (p. 10); 43, 

b; 79, b. 



Infinitive: 48, b; 58; 69-72. 

Contracted: 65. 
Inflections of the Voice: see p. 9. 
Interrogation: see Questions. 
issimo (sufiix): 35, a. 
'It': 47; 51; 51, /^. 

Letters: i; Ad. N., i. 

*May': see Modal Auxiliaries. 
Modal Auxiliaries: 57. 
Moods: 57; 69-77; 78, a. 

Conditional: see Past Future. 
Imperative: 66, b; 72; 77, a; 
infinitive: 48, b; 58; 65; 69- 
72; participle: 54, a, b; 62; 
63, d; 69-71; subjunctive: 
44, c; 77; 78, a. 
* Must ' : see Modal Auxiliaries. 
'Myself,' 'thyself,' etc.: 47, 2; 
51, e. 



*For': 79, e. 
Fractions: 39, d. 
Future: 54, 2; 68, c; 74; 77. 
Contracted: 65; 66, i. 

ne (adv.): 47, a; 56, b; 84. 
Gender: 9-11; 14-15; 18-21; 26; ne (pron.): 47,3; 48; 49; i 



89. 



28. 
grande: 29, c. 

h: 4; 22, a; 23, a, c; 59, a. 
'Have': 53, b; 54, 3; 54, ^ h; 57, 

a; 92, 5. 
*Here': 84. 

i (letter): 2; 2, a; 4; Ad. N., 2; 22, 

*; 23, b; 59, a; 60; 92,/. 
i (euphonic): 79; 81. 
Imperative: 66, b; 72; 77, a. 
Imperfect: see Past Descriptive. 
Impersonal Verbs: 51; 51, /?; 77, c. o (conjunction): 78; 78, c. 
Indefinite Article: 14-16. Old Forms: Ad. N., 3,/; 12 («); 

Form: 14-15; use: 16; 38, i; 23 (2); 44, a; 47 0); 48, d; 

43, b, 50 C); 63, d; 68; 92; 93. ^ 



Neuter Verbs: 54, 3; 56, a. 
'Never': 83. 
non: 80, i; 81; 91, a. 
'Not': 80, i; 81. 
Nouns: 17-25. 

Gender: 18-21; number: 22 

25- 

Number: 9-1 1; 22-25; 29. 
Numerals: 38-40. 

Cardinal: 38; ordinal: 39. 

o (letter): 3; Ad. N., 3; 59, b. 



INDEX 



183 



Preterit: see Past Absolute. 

Preterit Perfect: see Second Past 
Perfect. 

Pronouns: 41-52; 86-91. 

Demonstrative: 42; indefinite: 
86-91; interrogative, 43; 
personal: see Personal; pos- 
sessive: see Possessive; re- 
ciprocal: see Reciprocal; 
reflexive: see Reflexive; 
relative: 44. 

Pronunciation: 1-8; Ad. N. 



'One' (indefinite): 55; 86. 
'Only': 82. 

Open Vowels: 3; Ad. N., 3. 
'Ought': see Modal Auxiliaries. 

Participle: 54, a, h; 62; 63, d; 69- 

71. 
Past: 54, a, h; 63, d; 71, c; 
present: 62; 69-71. 
Partitive: 12, a; 88; 89. 
Passive: 54, i; 54,// 55; 56, c. 
Past Absolute: 60; 65; 66, 2, 3; 68, 

d, e; 75- 
Past Descriptive: 

Form: 63, 6;^, c; 65; 68, a, h; 
use: 54, d, e; 73; 75. 
Past Future: 54, 2; 68, h; 76; 77; 
92, c. 

Contracted: 65; 66, i; 92, c. 
Past Perfect: see Perfect Tenses. Reciprocal Pronouns and Verbs: 
Perfect Tenses: 54, 3; 56; 731 75- - 47, 2; 48; 49; 5o; 51, 3; 5i, 

Personal Pronouns: 46-52. -•. ^. ^ ^^ 

Conjunctive: 47-50; form: 47; Reflexive Prinounsi 47, 2; 48; 49; 
48, ., d; 50; 52, i; position: ^^. ^^^ 3, ^^^ ^. ^^. ^g, t,; 

48; 49. 63, a; 86. 

Disjunctive: 51-52; omission: Reflexive Verbs: 55; 56, b; 63, a; 



qualche: 29, b; 89. 
Quantity: 2; Ad. N., 2. 
Questions: Ad. N. (p. 10); 43; 51, 
2; 77,/, g; 79, b; 81, a. 



51, 2; 51, h; use: 51; 51, i; 

51, a, b, h. 
Pitch: see p. 9. 

Pluperfect: see Perfect Tenses. 
Plural: 22-25; 29. 

Irregular: 23, d; 25; words in 

-co and -go: 23, c. 
Poetic Forms: see Old Forms. 
Possessive: 17; 45; 52, i. 
Prefixes: 93, a. 
Prepositions: 79. 
da: 79, c,f, g. 
'to': 79, a, b. 
Present: 65; 66, 4; 68, /, g; 

73; 74. 



86. 



santo: 29, c. 

Second Past Perfect: 54, 3; 75- 

'Shall': 54, 2; 57- 

'Should': 54, 2; 57; 76; 77. 

si: 47-50; 52; 55; 56, b; 63, 

a; 86. 
'So': 8s, a. 
'Some': 89. 
SpeUing: 1-8. 

Subjunctive: 44, c; 77; 78, a. 
Suflftxes: Ad. N., 3; 35-37; 85. 
Syllables: 8. 



184 



INDEX 



Tenses: 

Compound: 54; 56; 73; 75- 
Future: see Future; imper- 
fect: see Past Descriptive; 
past absolute: see Past 
Absolute; past descriptive: 
see Past Descriptive; pres- 
ent: see Present; preterit: 
see Past Absolute. 

'Than': SS- 

'There': 84. 

Time of day: 38, c. 

*To': 79, fl,^- 

u (letter): 2; 2, a; 4; Ad. N., 2. 

Verbs: 53-77; 92; 93- 

Auxiliary verbs: see Auxiliary; 
conjugation: see Conjuga- 



tion; lists of irregular verbs: 
92; 93; alphabetical: 93; by 
conjugations: 92; moods: 
see Moods; tenses: see 
Tenses; regular verbs: 55- 
56; 59-63; irregular verbs: 
64-68; 92; regular parts: 
66; compound verbs: 67, a; 
93, a; old forms: 63, d; 
68; 92. 

vi (adv.): 47, a; 84. 

Vowels: 2-3; Ad. N., 2-3. 

'Whatever': 44, c. 

* Whoever': 44, c. 

'Will': 54, 2; 57. 

'Would': 54, 2; 54, e; 57; 76; 77. 

'You': 52; 86. 



A^.Ck^ 



H! 



K 1- 

RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 



CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 

This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
on the date to which renewed, 
books are subject to immediate recall. 



8GGLCK. MATUTB 



^^0, m. ppj 



mo 



^ 



^ 



x^ 



mi 1 8 1986 



JUL 7 1986 



^^BGULA 



TiOH UEPT 

my 2 1 1997 



LD21 — 32m — 1,'75 
(S3845L)4970 



General Library 

University of Calif orni 

Berkeley 



GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY 



BDDQ773113